Abstract:
An automated assembly line is operated and controlled by a computer system. The assembly line includes of a plurality of machines which are each segmented into its basic unit operations providing work stations. The work stations are then controlled by the computer system and operated asynchronously with respect to the other work stations of the assembly line.

Description:
This is a Continuation of pending application Ser. No. 08/304,630 filed Sep. 12, 1994, which is a Continuation of abandoned application Ser. No. 08/023,998 filed May 24, 1993, which is a Divisional of application Ser. No. 07/928,631 filed Aug. 12, 1992, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,216,613, which is a Continuation of abandoned application Ser. No. 07/837,670 filed Feb. 14, 1992, which is a Continuation of abandoned application Ser. No. 07/759,799 filed Sep. 13, 1991, which is a Continuation of abandoned application Ser. No. 07/398,796 filed Aug. 24, 1989, which is a Divisional of application Ser. No. 06/696,876 filed Jan. 30, 1985, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,884,674, which is a Continuation of abandoned application Ser. No. 06/599,211 filed Apr. 12, 1984, which is a Continuation of abandoned application Ser. No. 06/269,306 filed Jun. 1, 1981, which is a Divisional of application Ser. No. 05/134,387 filed Apr. 16, 1971, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,306,292. 
    
    
     This invention relates to automated assembly lines and, in particular, to computer controlled and operated automated assembly lines. More particularly, the invention relates to methods for the real time asynchronous operation of a computer controlled and operated automated assembly line. 
     This invention also relates to copending patent application Ser. No. 134,388, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,314,342 by McNeir et al for UNSAFE MACHINES WITHOUT SAFE POSITIONS, assigned to the assignee of and filed of even date with the present invention. 
     The invention is widely useful for the computer control and operation of automated assembly lines. One such assembly line in which the present invention has been successfully utilized is described in copending patent application Ser. No. 845,733, filed Jul. 29, 1969 now U.S. Pat. No. 3,765,763 by James L. Nygaard for AUTOMATIC SLICE PROCESSING. This particular assembly line is for the manufacturing of semiconductor circuits and devices. Application Ser. No. 845,733 is hereby incorporated by reference. Other lines in which the present invention is useful include automobile manufacturing assembly lines, engine manufacturing assembly lines, tire manufacturing assembly lines, railroad operation and control, etc.. 
    
    
     The invention will best be understood from the claims when read in conjunction with the detailed description and drawings wherein: 
     INTRODUCTION . . . 20 
     FIG. 1 Flowchart of a general segment operating procedure . . . 24 
     FIG. 10 Infra . . . 24 
     TABLES 1A-B Description of the normal sequence of events when a workpiece is transferred from work station to work station . . . 27 
     FIG. 2 Block diagram of a computer system utilized in conjunction with an embodiment of the invention . . . 29 
     BIT PUSHER COMPUTER  10  . . . 30 
     TABLE IIa Description of four special MODE 2 registers utilized to accomplish reentrancy . . . 34 
     TABLE II Description of the 2540M bit pusher status word conventions and the order of the interrupt service routine . . . 37 
     TABLE III Description of the interrupt levels of an embodiment of the 2540M bit pusher and their assignments . . . 39 
     TABLE IV Description of the four major areas into which the 2540M computer core is divided and the core assignments of these four areas in the present embodiment . . . 40 
     TABLE V Description of the core structure of the 2540M computer for MODE 1 programs and data to provide segmented operation in the present embodiment . . . 41 
     TABLE VI Description of the core structure of the 2540M computer for MODE 2 programs and data in the present embodiment . . . 45 
     TABLE VIIa Description of the basic core structure of the MODE 2 Machine Header Array subdivision . . . 46 
     TABLE VIIb Description of the basic core structure of the MODE 2 Machine Procedures . . . 47 
     TABLE VIIc Description of the basic core structure of the MODE 2 Machine Data Area . . . 48 
     TABLE VIId Description of the basic core structure of the MODE 2 Abnormal Neighbor Pointers . . . 49 
     TABLE VIIe Description of the basic core structure of the MODE 2 Software Bit Flags . . . 50 
     2540M PROGRAMS . . . 52 
     PROCEDURE SEGMENTS . . . 53 
     CONTEXT SWITCHING . . . 54 
     SUPERVISORY PROGRAMS . . . 55 
     GENERAL PURPOSE COMPUTER  11  . . . 57 
     FIG. 2 Supra . . . 59 
     GLOBAL SOFTWARE SUBROUTINES . . . 60 
     TABLE VIII Summarizes the relationship between the various GLOBAL subroutines . . . 66 
     (I.1) REQUEST WORKPIECE ROUTINES . . . 67 
     FIG. 3A Flowchart of request workpiece routine for the first segment with a normal predecessor . . . 68 
     FIG. 3B Flowchart of request workpiece routine for the first segment with an abnormal predecessor . . . 69 
     FIG. 3C Flowchart of request workpiece routine for the second to Nth segment where sensor available . . . 70 
     FIG. 3D Flowchart of request workpiece routine for the second to Nth segment where sensor not available . . . 70 
     (I.2) ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF WORKPIECE ROUTINES . . . 70 
     FIG. 3E Flowchart of acknowledge receipt of workpiece routines for all segments with a normal predecessor . . . 70 
     FIG. 3F Flowchart of acknowledge receipt of workpiece routines for first segment with an abnormal predecessor . . . 72 
     FIG. 3G Flowchart of acknowledge receipt of workpiece routines for second-Nth segments of a processor with no sensor available . . . 72 
     (II.1) READY TO RELEASE WORKPIECE ROUTINES . . . 72 
     FIG. 3H Flowchart of ready to release routine for Nth segment with a normal successor . . . 72 
     FIG. 3I Flowchart of ready to release routine for Nth segment with an abnormal successor . . . 74 
     FIG. 3J Flowchart of ready to release routine for the first to (N−1)th safe segment . . . 74 
     FIG. 3K Flowchart of ready to release routine for the first to (N−1)th unsafe segment . . . 74 
     (II.2) ASSURE EXIT OF WORKPIECE ROUTINES . . . 74 
     FIG. 3L Flowchart of all segments with a normal successor . . . 75 
     FIG. 3M Flowchart of Nth segment with an abnormal successor . . . 76 
     FIG. 3N Flowchart of first to (N−1)th segment where workpiece sensor is not available . . . 76 
     GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURE FLOWCHART . . . 76 
     FIG. 1 Supra . . . 76 
     GLOBAL SUBROUTINES INTERFACE WITH MODULE SERVICE . . . 78 
     FIG. 4A Flowchart showing the program steps for the control sequence of REQUEST WORKPIECE . . . 78 
     FIG. 4B Flowchart showing the program steps for the control sequence of ACKNOWLEDGE WORKPIECE . . . 79 
     FIG. 4C Flowchart showing the program steps for the control sequence of READY TO RELEASE . . . 80 
     FIG. 4D Flowchart showing the program steps for the control sequence of ASSURE EXIT . . . 80 
     COMPUTER CONTROL OF AN ASSEMBLY LINE MODULE . . . 82 
     MODULE MACHINE SERVICE PROGRAM . . . 83 
     FIG. 5A Flowchart of the program procedure of MODULE SERVICE . . . 83 
     FIG. 5B Flowchart of the program procedure in response to a START command flag . . . 83 
     FIG. 5C Flowchart of the program procedure in response to a STATUS REQUEST command . . . 84 
     FIG. 5D Flowchart of the program procedure for illegal offline commands . . . 84 
     FIG. 5E Flowchart of the program procedure if the module being controlled is running . . . 84 
     FIG. 5F Flowchart of the program procedure in response to a command of EMPTY . . . 84 
     FIG. 5G Flowchart of the program procedure in response to an EMERGENCY STOP command . . . 85 
     FIG. 5H Flowchart of the continued MODULE SERVICE program procedure . . . 85 
     FIG. 5I Flowchart of the program procedure in response to a TRACKING command . . . 86 
     FIGS. 5J-K Flowchart showing the EXIT steps from the MODULE SERVICE program . . . 87 
     FIG. 5L Flowchart showing the program steps of the MACHN subroutine . . . 88 
     FIG. 5M Flowchart showing the program steps of the SFMNT subroutine . . . 89 
     FIG. 5N Flowchart showing the program steps of the SGTRK subroutine . . . 91 
     FIG. 5O Flowchart showing the program steps of the SGTKA subroutine . . . 92 
     FIG. 5P Flowchart of the program steps of the ONLIN subroutine . . . 93 
     FIG. 5Q Flowchart of the program steps of the OFLIN subroutine . . . 94 
     FIG. 5R Flowchart of the program steps of the RELOD subroutine . . . 94 
     FIG. 5S Flowchart of the program steps of the SETRG and STEPR subroutines . . . 95 
     TABLE IXa Description of the CONDITION flag words for representation of machine states . . . 96 
     TABLE IXb Description of the COMMAND flags for changing states . . . 96 
     MAINLINE PROGRAM MANEA . . . 98 
     FIGS. 6A-C Flowcharts of the MANEA program . . . 100 
     FIG. 6D Flowchart of the program steps of the MSG 4 X subroutine . . . 101 
     FIG. 6E Flowchart of the program steps of the MSG 5 X subroutine . . . 101 
     FIG. 6F Flowchart of the program steps of the MSG 6 X subroutine . . . 102 
     FIG. 6G Flowchart of the program steps of the MSG 7 X subroutine . . . 102 
     FIG. 6H Flowchart of the program steps of the MSG 8 X subroutine . . . 103 
     FIG. 6L Flowchart of the program steps of the MESSAGE HANDLER subroutine . . . 103 
     MESSAGES FROM THE GENERAL PURPOSE (1800) HOST COMPUTER . . . 105 
     FIG. 6I Flowchart of the program steps of the DSPEC subroutine . . . 105 
     FIG. 6J Flowchart of the program steps of the PATCH subroutine . . . 105 
     FIG. 6K Flowchart of the program steps for abnormal successors and predecessors . . . 105 
     TABLE Xa Description of superimposed list word information for a parity check of data transfers . . . 107 
     TABLE Xb Description of CRU interrupt status card used with LEVEL  1  to permit masking and status saving . . . 108 
     LEVEL  1  . . . 108 
     FIG. 7A Flowchart of the program steps involved in the LEVL 1  interrupt routine . . . 108 
     LEVEL  4  . . . 109 
     FIG. 7B Flowchart of the program steps involved in the LEVL 4  routine . . . 110 
     LEVEL  3   
     FIG. 7C Flowchart of the program steps involved in the LEVL 3  routine . . . 111 
     FIG. 7D Flowchart of the program steps for a shutdown or abortion of the data transfer . . . 111 
     FIGS. 7E, E- 1  Flowchart of the program steps for a READ function and for a WRITE function . . . 112 
     THE COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM . . . 113 
     SOURCE LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION SET . . . 117 
     REPRESENTATION OF THE 2540M COMPUTER MEMORY LAYOUT . . . 120 
     TABLE XI Description of the 2540M computer&#39;s memory layout for the method of the present embodiment . . . 121 
     INTERRUPT LEVEL ASSIGNMENTS . . . 122 
     TABLE XII Description of the 16 priority interrupt levels of the 2540M computer in conjunction with the present embodiment . . . 122 
     PROGRAMMING OF THE 2540M COMPUTER . . . 123 
     SPECIAL (BASIC) INSTRUCTIONS . . . 125 
     TABLE XIII Description of MODE 1 and MODE 2 instruction set for the 2540M computer . . . 125 
     TABLE XIIIa Description of the notation for the description of special instruction executions . . . 126 
     FIG. 8A Block diagram of the Store Register . . . 126 
     FIG. 8B Block diagram of the Load Register . . . 127 
     FIG. 8C Block diagram of the Unconditional Jump Register . . . 128 
     FIG. 8D Block diagram of the Test Digital Input Register . . . 129 
     FIG. 8E Block diagram of the Digital Output Register . . . 130 
     FIG. 8F Block diagram of the Set Software Flag Register . . . 130 
     FIG. 8G Block diagram of the Digital Input Comparison/Conditional Jump Register . . . 131 
     FIG. 8H Block diagram of the Digital Input Comparison/Conditional Digital Output Register . . . 132 
     FIG. 8I Block diagram of the Test Software Flag Register . . . 133 
     FIG. 8J Block diagram of the Wait for NO-OP Register . . . 133 
     FIG. 8K Block diagram of the Change Mode Register . . . 134 
     FIG. 8L Block diagram of the Compare Data Register . . . 135 
     FIG. 8M Block diagram of the Test Within Two Limits Register . . . 136 
     FIG. 8N Block diagram of the Software Flag Comparison/Conditional Jump Register . . . 137 
     FIG. 8O Block diagram of the Change Memory Location Register . . . 138 
     FIG. 8P Block diagram of the Input Fixed Number of Bits Register . . . 139 
     FIG. 8Q Block diagram of the Output A Field Register . . . 140 
     FIG. 8R Block diagram of the Increment Memory Location Register . . . 141 
     VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX FOR SPECIAL (BASIC) INSTRUCTIONS . . . 142 
     SUPPLEMENTARY 2540 COMPUTER INSTRUCTIONS . . . 143 
     TABLE XIV Description of the supplementary 2540 computer instructions . . . 143 
     TABLE XIVa Description of the notations for Operand derivation and Instruction execution . . . 144 
     FIG. 9A Block diagram of the Shift Register . . . 156 
     FIG. 9B Block diagram of the Exchange Status Word Register . . . 164 
     FIG. 9C Block diagram of the Load Status Word Register . . . 165 
     VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX OF THE SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . 166 
     SIMULATION OF THE 1800 GENERAL PURPOSE COMPUTER BY THE 2540M COMPUTER . . . 168 
     TABLE XV Description of the instruction set of the 2540M which simulates the 1800 computer operations . . . 169 
     VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX FOR SIMULATION . . . 170 
     SPECIAL IMPLEMENTATION OF INSTRUCTIONS . . . 171 
     TABLE XVI Special purpose functions . . . 171 
     WRITING PROCEDURES FOR CONTROL OF SPECIFIC MACHINES . . . 172 
     INSTRUCTIONS DEALING WITH INPUT/OUTPUT BIT LINES . . . 173 
     INSTRUCTIONS DEALING WITH SOFTWARE BIT FLAGS . . . 174 
     EXAMPLE OF THE OPERATION OF A SPECIFIC MACHINE . . . 180 
     FIG. 10 Isometric drawing of a loader machine . . . 180 
     TABLE XVa Description of the program steps of the first segment of the LOADER . . . 184 
     TABLE XVb Description of the program steps of the second segment of the LOADER . . . 185 
     TABLE XVc Description of the program steps of the third segment of the LOADER . . . 186 
     TABLE XVd Description of the program steps of the fourth segment of the LOADER . . . 187 
     TABLE XVe Description of the program steps of the subroutine CHECKAIR . . . 188 
     PARTITIONING . . . 188a 
     FIGS. 11A-F Flowcharts showing the alteration of the GLOBAL subroutines REQUEST and ACKNOWLEDGE . . . 188a 
     FIGS. 3A-F Supra . . . 188a 
     UNSAFE MACHINES WITHOUT SAFE POSITIONS . . . 189 
     FIG. 12 Flowchart illustrating the procedural steps of the special program taken for modules containing UNSAFE machines . . . 191 
     ASSEMBLER DEFINITION . . . 193 
     FILE PREPARATION . . . 193 
     SYMBOL TABLE BUILD . . . 194 
     TABLE XVI Description of the assignments generated internally by the ASSEMBLER . . . 195 
     FIG. 13 Diagram of the process producing the linked list data structure by the ASSEMBLER . . . 207 
     FIG. 14 Isometric drawing showing the composition of the ASSEMBLER card deck . . . 209 
     MULTIPLE SYMBOL TABLES . . . 210 
     ASSEMBLER USAGE . . . 211 
     FIG. 15A Isometric drawing showing the composition of a card deck for PROC, DATA and SUPRA . . . 212 
     FIG. 15B Isometric drawing showing the composition of a card deck for TEST . . . 212 
     THE ASSEMBLER . . . 224 
     FIG. 16 Block diagram representing the translation of the instruction LOAD 1, 100 by the ASSEMBLER . . . 226 
     ASSEMBLER DEFINITION MODE . . . 227 
     CORE LOAD CHAIN FOR ASSEMBLER DEFINITION . . . 227 
     TABLE XVII Description of the core load chain for assembler definition . . . 227 
     1. EXECUTION OF ASSEMBLER DEFINITION . . . 227 
     TABLE XVIIIa Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ASMD . . . 230 
     TABLE XVIIIb Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for KEYAD . . . 232 
     TABLE XVIIIc Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for LOAD3 . . . 233 
     TABLE XVIIId Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ASM2 . . . 235 
     TABLE XVIIIe Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ASM2A . . . 237 
     TABLE XVIIIf Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for INTZL . . . 239 
     TABLE XVIIIg Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ZROP . . . 239 
     TABLE XVIIIh Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ASM31 . . . 241 
     TABLE XVIIIi Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CHECK . . . 244 
     TABLE XVIIIj Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for BLDHD . . . 244 
     TABLE XVIIIk Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ASM32 . . . 246 
     TABLE XVIIIl Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ALBCD . . . 248 
     TABLE XVIIIm Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ISIT . . . 249 
     TABLE XVIIIn Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for FINT . . . 251 
     USER OPERATION MODE . . . 252 
     CORE LOAD CHAIN FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY . . . 252 
     TABLE XIX Description of the core load chain for normal assembly . . . 252 
     2. EXECUTION OF ANALYZER . . . 253 
     TABLE XXa Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ASMF . . . 255 
     TABLE XXb Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for OPTNS . . . 258 
     TABLE XXc Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for FETFA . . . 263 
     TABLE XXd Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for FIEND . . . 267 
     TABLE XXe Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for FINDN . . . 269 
     TABLE XXf Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for DFALT . . . 270 
     3. EXECUTION OF PROLOG (PASS ONE) . . . 271 
     4. EXECUTION OF PASS ONE . . . 271 
     TABLE XXIa Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for PROLI . . . 277 
     TABLE XXIb Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for PIDIR . . . 278 
     TABLE XXIc Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for FRAM1/FRA1 . . . 280 
     TABLE XXId Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for UPDAT . . . 281 
     TABLE XXIe Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for LABPR . . . 284 
     TABLE XXIf Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for OPCD1 . . . 285 
     TABLE XXIg Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for NCODE . . . 286 
     TABLE XXIh Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for MOD1 . . . 288 
     TABLE XXIi Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ORG1/EQV1 . . . 289 
     TABLE XXIj Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for DC1 . . . 291 
     TABLE XXIk Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for HDNG/LIST1 . . . 293 
     TABLE XXIl Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for BSS1/BES1/BSSE1/BSSO1 . . . 295 
     TABLE XXIm Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ABS1 . . . 300 
     TABLE XXIn Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ENT1 . . . 301 
     TABLE XXIo Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for MDAT1 . . . 303 
     TABLE XXIp Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CALL1/REF1 . . . 304 
     TABLE XXIq Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for MDUM1/END1 . . . 307 
     TABLE XXIr Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for DEF1 . . . 309 
     TABLE XXIs Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for DMES1 . . . 311 
     TABLE XXIt Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for WOFF . . . 314 
     TABLE XXIu Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for PASON . . . 316 
     5. EXECUTION OF PASS TWO . . . 317 
     TABLE XXIIa Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for INIP2 . . . 322 
     TABLE XXIIb Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for INOBJ . . . 324 
     TABLE XXIIc Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for P2FRM . . . 327 
     TABLE XXIId Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for P2STT . . . 331 
     TABLE XXIIe Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for LIST1 . . . 336 
     TABLE XXIIf Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for HDNG2 . . . 340 
     TABLE XXIIg Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for LIST2 . . . 341 
     TABLE XXIIh Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ABS2, ENT2, DEF2 . . . 343 
     TABLE XXIIj Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for DC2 . . . 344 
     TABLE XXIIk Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CALL2 . . . 346 
     TABLE XXIIl Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for PARSE . . . 350 
     TABLE XXIIm Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for LILR, LILR2 . . . 358 
     TABLE XXIIn Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for OPERA . . . 360 
     TABLE XXIIo Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure INDX, IN, IN3 . . . 362 
     TABLE XXIIp Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for REG . . . 364 
     TABLE XXIIq Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CSAV2 . . . 366 
     TABLE XXIIr Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for INDR2 . . . 367 
     TABLE XXIIs Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for WOBJC . . . 369 
     TABLE XXIIt Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for SRABS . . . 371 
     TABLE XXIIu Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for SRREL . . . 373 
     TABLE XXIIv Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for SRCAL . . . 374 
     TABLE XXIIw Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for TLOCA . . . 378 
     TABLE XXIIx Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for INSCD . . . 380 
     TABLE XXIIy Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for WRAPO . . . 382 
     EXECUTION OF EPILOG . . . 384 
     TABLE XXIIIa Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for EPLOG . . . 386 
     TABLE XXIIIb Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for PRINT . . . 387 
     TABLE XXIIIc Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CROSR . . . 389 
     TABLE XXIIId Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for ORDER . . . 392 
     TABLE XXIIIe Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for RVRSL . . . 394 
     TABLE XXIIIf Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for PNCHO . . . 396 
     TABLE XXIIIg Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for TBLOC . . . 398 
     TABLE XXIIIh Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CINSP . . . 400 
     TABLE XXIIIi Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for CONPC . . . 401 
     TABLE XXIIIj Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for STOBJ . . . 403 
     TABLE XXIIIk Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for EROUT . . . 405 
     TABLE XXIIIl Description of the ASSEMBLER procedure for WRFL . . . 406 
     UTILITIES . . . 407 
     TABLE XXIVa Description of the procedure for PSHRA/POPRA . . . 409 
     TABLE XXIVb Description of the procedure for TOKEN . . . 411 
     TABLE XXIVc Description of the procedure for READC . . . 418 
     TABLE XXIVd Description of the procedure for EXPRN . . . 421 
     TABLE XXIVe Description of the procedure for EX1 . . . 424 
     TABLE XXIVf Description of the procedure for GENRA . . . 427 
     TABLE XXIVg Description of the procedure for INSP2 . . . 431 
     TABLE XXIVh Description of the procedure for WRTP2 . . . 431 
     TABLE XXIVi Description of the procedure for ERRIN . . . 433 
     TABLE XXIVj Description of the procedure for NXEDT . . . 434 
     TABLE XXIVk Description of the procedure for SAVEC . . . 436 
     TABLE XXIVl Description of the procedure for COMPS . . . 437 
     TABLE XXIVm Description of the procedure for SPMOC . . . 437 
     TABLE XXIVn Description of the procedure for HASH . . . 439 
     TABLE XXIVo Description of the procedure for FXHAS . . . 441 
     TABLE XXIVp Description of the procedure for INSYM/ERINS . . . 443 
     TABLE XXIVq Description of the procedure for REFR . . . 445 
     TABLE XXIVr Description of the procedure for TESTL . . . 446 
     TABLE XXIVs Description of the procedure for CHEKC . . . 448 
     TABLE XXIVt Description of the procedure for GETNF . . . 449 
     TABLE XXIVu Description of the procedure for SVEXT . . . 451 
     TABLE XXIVv Description of the procedure for MOVE . . . 452 
     TABLE XXIVw Description of the procedure for WRTOB . . . 454 
     TABLE XXIVx Description of the procedure for FTCH2 . . . 455 
     TABLE XXIVy Description of the procedure for INS . . . 457 
     TABLE XXIVz Description of the procedure for WRFL/WRTFL . . . 458 
     TABLE XXVa Description of the procedure for NOTHR . . . 460 
     TABLE XXVb Description of the procedure for STRIK . . . 461 
     TABLE XXVc Description of the procedure for CUTB . . . 463 
     TABLE XXVd Description of the procedure for NEXTH . . . 464 
     TABLE XXVe Description of the procedure for FLTSH . . . 466 
     TABLE XXVf Description of the procedure for REPK . . . 467 
     TABLE XXVg Description of the procedure for RPSVW . . . 469 
     TABLE XXVh Description of the procedure for FTCHS . . . 470 
     TABLE XXVi Description of the procedure for FTCHE . . . 472 
     TABLE XXVj Description of the procedure for MOVER . . . 473 
     TABLE XXVk Description of the procedure for EXTRK . . . 475 
     I/O DATA FLOW . . . 476 
     FIG. 17 a  Block diagram of the analyzer section of the ASSEMBLER . . . 476 
     FIG. 17 b  Block diagram of the peripherals used in the instruction options of the ASSEMBLER utilized in the present embodiment . . . 477 
     STORAGE ASSIGNMENT AND LAYOUT STRUCTURE . . . 482 
     TABLE XXVIa Description of the allocation of variable core . . . 482 
     TABLE XXVIb Description of the core allocation for the EDIT function during execution of Pass One . . . 483 
     TABLE XXVIc Description of the symbol table after instruction definition . . . 484 
     TABLE XXVId Description of the symbol table after an assembly . . . 485 
     TABLE XXVIe Description of the symbol table for Hash Table entries . . . 486 
     TABLE XXVIf Description of the symbol table for symbol table entries . . . 488 
     TABLE XXVIg Description of the symbol table for reference entries . . . 489 
     TABLE XXVIh Description of the header for each instruction . . . 489 
     TABLES XXVIi-j Description of the Instruction Composition List . . . 490 
     RETURN ADDRESS STACK . . . 492 
     TABLE XXVIk Description of the return address stack . . . 492 
     FLAG TABLE . . . 493 
     TABLE XXVIl Description of the flag table . . . 493 
     TABLE XXVIm-n Description of the bit assignments for the flags CONTL, MACHF and OBJCT . . . 496 
     CARD BUFFER . . . 498 
     TABLE XXVIo Description of the card buffer . . . 498 
     TABLE XXVIp Description of the Pass Two text . . . 499 
     TABLE XXVIq Description of the IDISK, ODISK and EDISK buffers . . . 500 
     TABLE XXVIr Description of the WDISK buffer . . . 501 
     TABLE XXVIs Description of the page header buffer . . . 501 
     TABLE XXVIt Description of the printing buffer . . . 502 
     TABLE XXVIu-v Description of the error list buffer . . . 502 
     TABLE XXVIw-x Description of the parse stack . . . 504 
     TABLE XXVIy Description of pseudo accumulator maintained in conjunction with parse stack . . . 505 
     TABLE XXVIz Description of symbol table for operand list . . . 506 
     TABLE XXVIIa Description of external reference list . . . 506 
     TABLE XXVIIb Description of edit vector . . . 507 
     TABLE XXVIIc Description of the object module for relocatable programs . . . 508 
     TABLE XXVIId Description of the object module for absolute programs . . . 509 
     TABLE XXVIIe Description of the OBJ Module Program Type . . . 509 
     TABLE XXVIIf Description of the Data Block (Header and Data) . . . 510 
     TABLE XXVIIg List of Error Codes utilized in the present embodiment for assembly errors . . . 512 
     CORE LOAD BUILDER . . . 517 
     PROGRAM OPERATION . . . 520 
     PROCESSING ENTRIES AND REFERENCES . . . 521 
     PROGRAMS . . . 523 
     TABLE XXVIIIa Description of the procedure for CONL . . . 525 
     TABLE XXVIIIb Description of the procedure for LOADR . . . 529 
     TABLE XXVIIIc Description of the procedure for FIND1 . . . 532 
     TABLE XXVIIId Description of the procedure for PENT1 . . . 534 
     TABLE XXVIIIe Description of the procedure for PREF1 . . . 536 
     TABLE XXVIIIf Description of the procedure for CMAP . . . 537 
     TABLE XXVIIIg Description of the procedure for ILEVA . . . 540 
     TABLE XXVIIIh Description of the procedure for MARKL . . . 541 
     TABLE XXVIIIi Description of the procedure for ERDEF . . . 543 
     TABLE XXVIIIj Description of the procedure for LOAD . . . 544 
     TABLE XXVIIIk Description of the procedure for RLD . . . 546 
     TABLE XXVIIIl Description of the procedure for MOVEW . . . 547 
     TABLE XXVIIIm Description of the procedure for TSTBF . . . 549 
     TABLE XXIVl Supra . . . 548 
     TABLE XXIVm Supra . . . 550 
     TABLE XXVIIn Description of the procedure for WRTCD . . . 551 
     MOVEMENT OF DATA . . . 552 
     TABLE XXIX Description of the movement of data from the object module to core load . . . 552 
     LOAD MATRIX DESCRIPTION . . . 553 
     TABLES XXXa-d Description of the LOAD MATRIX . . . 553 
     SEGMENTED CORE LOAD BUILDER . . . 556 
     TABLE XXXIa Description of the procedure for SEGCL . . . 557 
     DATA BASE BUILDER . . . 562 
     TABLE XXXIb Description of the procedure for DATBX . . . 563 
     ACCESS LOGICAL FILE . . . 575 
     TABLE XXXIc Description of the procedure for MACLF . . . 577 
     2540 BOOTSTRAP . . . 583 
     TABLE XXXId Description of the procedure for the 2540 BOOTSTRAP . . . 584 
     LOAD 2540 . . . 585 
     TABLE XXXIe Description of the procedure for LDWRB . . . 587 
     CONCLUSION . . . 594 
    
    
     INTRODUCTION 
     In accordance with the present invention, machines are operated by computer control. This is accomplished by generating individual machine control programs or procedures which are organized into modular segments, with the segments in a one-to-one correspondence with physical work stations in the machine, and operating each work station independently with respect to all other work stations by executing each segment of each control program independently of all others. 
     This method of operation is particularly useful where assembly lines or portions of assembly lines are comprised of machines placed side by side in a row. Manufacturing or processing takes place by transporting a workpiece from work station to work station and from machine to machine. The workpiece is stopped at the various work stations of each machine and operations are performed on the workpiece. The workpiece is then transported to another work station of the same machine or the next machine in the line. 
     Different manufacturing or processing can take place on a single assembly line by varying or bypassing altogether an individual machine&#39;s operation or by skipping some of the machines and hence some of the steps in the assembly line or by repeatedly passing a workpiece through the same machines to perform similar steps. This represents a departure from the uni-directional flow of the normal assembly line from upstream to downstream. The dilemma is resolved in accordance with an embodiment of the invention by implementing a forked line. A given machine may have more than one exit path or more than one input path where one path is designated as normal and any additional paths would be considered abnormal. Between any two machines or work stations, the flow of workpieces is still from upstream to downstream, regardless of the path. Material tracking of the workpieces from work station to work station becomes very desirable to insure that a workpiece is processed appropriately and to insure that the workpiece follows its proper path down the assembly line. Since each machine may have one or more work stations, the machines would have a respective number of independent control program segments so that each work station of the assembly line operates independently with respect to the other work stations. This independent operation permits any number of workpieces desired to be present in the assembly line. In addition, with asynchronous operation, a workpiece may be processed at each work station regardless of the status of any other workpiece or work station in the line. 
     “Asynchronous” in this context refers to the appearance of simultaneous (though unrelated) operation of all the machines under control of a single computer. In fact, a typical digital computer can do but one thing at a time; it is capable of performing only one instruction at a time and sequentially obtaining the instructions from its own memory, unless the sequence is altered by response to interrupt stimuli or execution of certain instructions, widely known as “branch” instructions. 
     In controlling electromechanical devices, a relatively “large” amount of time (in seconds) is required for mechanical motion while a computer may process data and make decisions in micro seconds. For example, suppose a typewriter is to type a sentence under computer control. The appropriate program in the computer might present a single character to the typewriter with the command to type. Electronic circuitry then accesses the character presented, closing the circuit corresponding to the correct key, triggering a solenoid whose magnetic field forces the key to strike the typewriter ribbon against paper, leaving the correct character impression. Meanwhile, the programs in the computer have been doing other things. An interrupt may be used to signal the computer that the character has been typed and the typewriter is ready to receive another character. Responding to the interrupt, the computer may briefly reexecute the appropriate program to present another character and again command to type. 
     This same concept; that is, requiring the computer only to start an activity, and then briefly at intervals continue the activity, leads to simultaneous activity among all devices attached to a given computer. 
     The combination of asynchronous operation with segmented program organization and operation describes the segmented asynchronous operation of an assembly line. 
     Manufacturing or processing in many industries involves steps which are considered unsafe for one reason or another. For example, steps involving extreme heat or extreme pressures or movement of large mechanical bodies or noxious chemicals may damage the workpiece or the machine or any operators in the area unless they are carried to completion. Detection of malfunction or abnormal condition is an essential part of computer control of machines as is providing operator messages in the event of such detection and taking corrective action to bring a malfunctioning machine to a safe condition. In computer control of machines, several states are recognized. For instance, the machine may be operational or not. The machine which is operational and under computer control is often called on-line, although the machine may be empty or not, as it may contain workpieces in any state. The machine may be in a safe condition or an unsafe condition. The workpiece or machine itself or any nearby humans may be in danger unless the machine finishes some or all of its work. In accordance with the invention, segmented operation allows these states to be carried down to the level of a work station. A multi-work station machine may have failure or malfunction in any one work station. Depending on the particular machine involved, it may be important to know which work station has malfunctioned. For example, if one work station should malfunction while another in the same machine is in an unsafe condition, the malfunctioning work station causes an alarm to the machine operators, if there are any, and processing on the station stops. However, for the work station in the unsafe condition, processing continues until a safe state is reached. Then, the entire machine causes an alarm and operation discontinues. 
     Workpiece movement between two adjacent work stations is accompanied by software segment communication using software gate flags. Each work station program segment has its own set of gate flags and, in particular, an input gate flag and an output gate flag. Other software flags might be used to keep track of various status of machine devices such as: Up-Down, Left-Right, In-Out, Light-Dark, Top-Bottom, Open-Shut, or any other two valued functions. When the gate flags are open between work station segments, a workpiece is passed between the work stations. The gate flags are closed as the workpiece clears the upstream work station and enters the downstream work station. Opening and closing of software gate flags and detection of workpiece movement is identical from work station to work station. These operations are incorporated into program subroutines called GLOBAL SUBROUTINES. The GLOBAL SUBROUTINES are shared by all work station program segments to control workpiece movement. 
     The global subroutines control workpiece movement using the gate flags, depending on the state of the Work station or machine. There are four global subroutines in the present embodiment of the invention. The first two, known as REQUEST WORKPIECE and ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT, are used in the program segment to obtain a workpiece from an upstream work station. The other two, called READY RELEASE and ASSURE EXIT, are used in the program segment to transmit a workpiece to a downstream work station. TABLES 1A-B show the normal sequence of events when a workpiece moves from work station to work station. A guideline, or general flow chart of one work station program showing the interleaving of segment execution with global subroutines, is shown in FIG.  1 . This one work station program segment, shown in FIG. 1, controls the transfer of workpieces and workpiece processing for a single work station. There is a separate work station program segment for each work station, and two work station program segments control the transfer of workpieces between two corresponding adjacent work stations. 
     FIG. 10 shows a loader machine utilized to load semiconductor slices into a carrier. The loader machine is a multi-work station machine having four work stations and four corresponding work station program segments. The loader machine will be described in detail later in the description; however, for the purposes of this immediate description, the first three work stations  1000 ,  1001  and  1008  will be referred to briefly. The first two work stations  1000  and  1001  are queues, each comprising a bed section  1002  large enough to hold a workpiece  1003 , a photocell sensor  1004  for detecting the workpiece presence, a brake  1005  for keeping the workpiece in place, and a pneumatic transport mechanism  1006 . 
     The third work station is comprised of a workpiece carrier platform  1007  which can be moved vertically up and down, a tongue extension  1008  on the bed section on which the workpiece travels with a brake  1009  at the tongue to stop and position a workpiece precisely in a carrier  1010 , the shared pneumatic transport mechanism  1006  and photocell sensors. 
     The workpieces  1003  are semiconductor slices. Work station  1000  is the upstream neighbor work station to work station  1001 , work station  1001  is the downstream neighbor work station of work station  1000 , work station  1001  is the upstream neighbor work station of work station  1008 , and work station  1008  is the downstream work station to work station  1001 . The workpieces  1003  are transferred to work station  1000 , then to work station  1001 , then to work station  1008 . A processing operation is carried out in each workpiece at each work station. The processing operation carried out in the loader shown in FIG. 10 is a queue of wait at work stations  1000  and  1001 , and a load at work station  1008 . Other machines can carry out varied work processes at their work stations. 
     Three work station program segments correspond to the three work stations  1000 ,  1001  and  1008 . 
     There is a work station program segment as shown in FIG. 1 for each of the work stations  1000 ,  1001  and  1008 . 
     In the work station program segment shown in FIG. 1, the two global subroutine calls REQUEST WORKPIECE  22  and ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT  24  handle the request and receipt of a workpiece from an upstream neighbor work station. Under abnormal conditions, as when a workpiece is entered manually at the work station, provision is made in REQUEST WORKPIECE  22  to proceed directly to PROCESS WORKPIECE  28 . The REQUEST WORKPIECE Subroutine  22  in a work station program segment corresponding to work station  1001  will request a workpiece from the upstream neighbor work station  1000 . The processing performed is the work to be performed on the workpiece  1003  at work station  1001  (a queue operation). If, for some reason, the upstream neighbor work station such as work station  1000  fails to send the workpiece  1003 , as in a machine failure, the work station program segment can recover by special exit from ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT  24  and WAIT FOR A NEW TRANSACTION. 
     The two subroutine calls READY RELEASE  29  and ASSURE EXIT  31  in a workpiece program segment corresponding to work station  1001  control the transfer of a finished workpiece such as workpiece  1003  to a downstream neighbor work station  1008 . The work station program segments corresponding to work stations  1000  and  1008  control the transfer of workpieces to and from those work stations and the processing of workpieces at those work stations in the same manner as the work station program segment for work station  1001 . 
     The normal sequence of transmitting workpieces between work stations through use of program segments is shown in Table IA and Table IB. 
     The use of work station program segments to control the transfer of workpieces between work stations and to control process operations on the workpieces at work stations has been briefly described. The following description will describe this in more detail. 
     TABLE IA 
     Normal sequence of workpiece transfer between adjacent work stations using program segments. 
     1. All gates between the work station program segments closed. 
     2. Upstream work station program segment—workpiece processing finished. Open outgate of upstream work station program segment by READY RELEASE—From upstream work station program segment. 
     3. Downstream work station program segment. Open ingate of downstream work station program segment by REQUEST WORKPIECE—From downstream work station program segment. 
     4. Upstream work station program segment—workpiece clears station (PC sensor senses workpiece has exited). Close outgate of upstream work station program segment by ASSURE EXIT from upstream work station program segment. 
     5. Downstream work station program segment Close ingate of downstream work station program segment—by ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT from downstream work station program segment Wait for arrival. (PC sensor senses workpiece has arrived). 
     6. All gates between work station program segments closed again. Time sequence of workpiece transfer between adjacent work stations using program segments. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE IB 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     In one embodiment, the assembly line is organized into modules representing major process steps. Each module or portion of the assembly line is comprised of machines placed side by side in a row. In such an embodiment, major process steps are performed sequentially on the workpiece as it proceeds from module to module through the assembly line until a finished product is produced at the end of the assembly line. Each machine in a module performs some necessary step to the workpiece at each work station in the machine by stopping the workpiece at the particular work station long enough to perform the necessary work. 
     Referring to FIG. 2, one computer system utilized to operate an assembly line of this type is functionally comprised of one or more bit pusher computers  10  and one general purpose digital computer  11 . The general purpose digital computer  11  is called the “host computer” of “supervisory computer” and the bit pusher computers  10  are called “worker computers ”. 
     In this embodiment, each computer  10  controls a group of machines  12  corresponding to a major process step by executing each segment of each machine control program when a workpiece is present at the corresponding work station  14  of the machine  12  (although the group of machines  12  may be the entire assembly line). Where the machines  12  are grouped to perform a single major process step to the workpiece, the group is called a module  13 . However, in accordance with the invention, each computer  10  has the capability to control more than one module  13  such that each module controlled by a computer  10  operates asynchronously and independently with respect to the other modules controlled by the same computer. Machines  12  comprising a module  13  are individually connected to a communications register unit (CRU) forming part of the respective bit pusher computer  10 . 
     General purpose computer  11  in this system performs all “host” functions, or support functions, for computers  10 . Program assembly for computers  10  and preliminary testing is done on general purpose computer  11 . Copies of the control programs for each computer  10  and a copy in core image form of the memory contents of each computer  10  in an initialized state are kept on general purpose computer  11 . 
     A communications network  15  permits communication between any computer  10  and computer  11 . This linkage is used routinely for alarm and other message traffic, and for initial startup of each computer  10 . It should be noted that communications are necessary only for utilization of the entire system, illustrated in FIG. 2; however, any one of computers  10  in the system is “autonomous” and will operate without communications as will computer  11 . 
     BIT PUSHER COMPUTER  10   
     A bit pusher computer is one which is provided with bit processor means for control through input/output channels of external machine processes. One such computer is known as the 960, manufactured and sold by Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex. Another such computer is known as the 2540M computer, also manufactured and sold by Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex. The bit processor computers are described in detail in copending patent application Ser. No. 843,614 filed Jul. 22, 1969 by George P. Shuraym and assigned to the assignee of the present invention. Patent application Ser. No. 843,614 is hereby incorporated by reference. 
     Although both the 960 computer and the 2540M computer are well-suited for application as the “worker” computer in the present system, only the 2540M computer is discussed with respect to the present embodiment. Basically, the 2540M is typical of stored program digital computers with the addition of having two modes of operation, called MODE  1  and MODE  2 . In MODE  1  operation, it offers the same features as many other digital computers; that is, arithmetical capability, hardware interrupts to respond to external stimuli, and an instruction set slanted toward computer word operations. It operates under control of a supervisory software system, containing an executive routine, interrupt service routines, peripheral device drivers, message queuing routines and the like. However, MODE  2  operation involves a separate group of instructions which are slanted toward machine control. In particular, the input and output functions reference the CRU of the 2540M, and are not word-oriented, but rather bit-oriented. The machine control function is best implemented in this mode, because machine-computer interface is more often in terms of bits (representing single wire connections) than in terms of computer words (representing a prescribed number of bits, such as sixteen). The result of this simplified interface is the segregation of computer-related functions from machine control-related functions in the system. 
     Another feature of the bit pusher computers is the use of base register file. The instruction set permits referencing of any of the base registers and permits a combination of displacement plus the contents of one of the registers. From the standpoint of MODE  2  operation, the machine control function is very conveniently implemented by dedicating some of the base registers. One register is designated as the Communications Base Register or CRB. Another register is designated as the Flag Base Register or SFB. Instructions utilizing bitwise displacements can reference these two registers for bit input/output I/O and for bit flag manipulation. Two registers, designated Machine Procedure Base Register or MPB and Machine Data Base Register or MDB utilize displacements which are word-oriented with one register set to the beginning address of a control procedure program, another register set to the beginning address of the data block for a given machine, and another register set to the beginning I/O bit for the machine and another register set to permit segment communication by use of bit flags. The programmer&#39;s job becomes very easy, as he can forget the problems of interfacing the machine or program to the rest of the system and concentrate on the sequence of instructions necessary to operate the machine. Also, a job of exercising supervisory control over the machines becomes very easy for the programmer because, in switching control from one machine to another, means are provided so that it is necessary simply to switch the contents of these base registers to the appropriate settings for another machine. 
     In the 2540M computer, eight registers are dedicated for MODE  2  operation; four of them are dedicated as described above, the MPB, MDB, SFB and CRB. Of the other four registers, one is used as an event or displacement counter for instructions within a procedure and the remaining three as programmable timers. These timers are set by loading the appropriate registers. They are automatically decremented and provide an interrupt stimulus when the amount of time represented by the number loaded into them has been reached. Instruction execution involves the registers without their being specified as part of the instruction bit pattern. That is, the appropriate instruction is automatically referenced based on an operation code (OP code) for the instruction. Separation of functions along these lines, in particular separation of the instructions which are encoded in the procedure and separation of operating variables which are delegated to machine data, make it possible to write reentrant machine control programs in a very convenient manner. The advantage of the reentrant program is an efficient usage of core memory in the computer. 
     Hardware Reentrancy - Reentrancy is utilized in the present embodiment. Reentrancy in the context of this embodiment means a program or group of instructions which is capable of being utilized simultaneously by any number of users or machines with no interaction or interference. 
     A distinction is made between a ‘Procedure’ which contains only instructions of what to do and how to do it; and ‘Data’ which contains only the status of a particular user during his execution of the ‘Procedure’. With this distinction made, and with each user keeping track of his own ‘Data’, it is obvious that the same Procedure can be shared by many users, simultaneously with no interference. 
     Reentrant programs can be written for many different types of computers, but in most computers reentrancy is accomplished only at the cost of much shuffling of temporary locations and intermediate values in order to keep the changing Data separate from the unchanging Procedure. 
     In the 2540M, reentrancy is accomplished by the use of four of the special MODE  2  registers. These registers are automatically referenced in execution by the MODE  2  subset of instructions. The MODE  2  user is thus relieved of the problem of reentrant coding. The four MODE  2  registers are: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 Machine Procedure Base Register 
                 (MPB), for instructions 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Machine Data Base Register 
                 (MDB), for data 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Machine Flag Base Register 
                 (SFB), for software bit flags 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Machine Communications Base 
                 (CRB), for I/O lines. 
               
               
                   
                 Register 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The four MODE  2  registers are shown in Table II a . 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE IIa 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 2540 MODE 2 OPERATION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MPB 
                 Machine Procedure Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 EC 
                 Event Counter (MODE 2 Program Counter) 
               
               
                   
                 MDB 
                 Machine Data Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 SFB 
                 Software Flag Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 CRB 
                 Communications (I/O) Base Register 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Machine Procedure—instructions needed to operate a machine type. No changes are made in the procedure code during execution (no local storage of data) so that the procedure is reentrant and can be used by any number of machines at once. 
     Machine Data—Data area needed by each machine. All temporary or permanent data unique to a given machine is kept in this area. 
     Machine Flags—Software bit flags used by a given machine. 
     Machine Communications (I/O)—Input and output lines connecting a given machine and a given computer. 
     The other four MODE  2  registers are: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 5. 
                 Event counter 
                 (EC), for procedure instruction counter 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Programmable timer 
                 (TIME1), for Module/Machine Service 
               
               
                   
                   
                 intervals 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Programmable timer 
                 (TIME2), for general purpose computer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 communications 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Programmable timer 
                 (TIME3), for workpiece identification 
               
               
                   
                   
                 interval timing. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Programming Conventions - Certain conventions have been established as to the 2540M computer utilized in the present embodiment for its proper operation and for proper operation of the machines which it controls. These conventions are discussed below. 
     Interrupt Masking - Each interrupt service routine establishes independently the interrupt mask under which the system will operate during its execution. The convention established here is that each interrupt level will mask itself and all lower levels. For example, during servicing of a level 1 interrupt, the only interrupt that would then be honored would be an interrupt on level 0. All other interrupts would remain pending until the servicing of the level 1 interrupt was complete. 
     CONVENTION: Each interrupt level mask itself and all lower levels. 
     Status Work Order - The 2540M uses two status words for processing of interrupts. The term ‘status work’ is somewhat misleading since each ‘status word’ consists of four consecutive 16 bit words, starting on some even valued core address. The contents of these four words, in order, are: 
     1. Program counter 
     2. Condition code and overflow bit 
     3. Interrupt mask 
     4. Not used. 
     When an interrupt is entered through an XSW (Exchange Status Word) instruction, the operand field of the XSW contains the address of a two word status word pointer set. The first of these two words contains the address of the new status word to be used during the interrupt processing, and the second word contains the address of the old status word where the current status of the machine is to be saved during the interrupt processing. The 2540M hardware allows these three blocks to be disjoint, but the convention established for their use is that they be contiguous. The order is the pointer block followed by the new status word block followed by the old status word block. 
     TABLE II illustrates this order. 
     Since each interrupt routine can establish independently the mask status of the system, some form of coordination must be used to insure that the mask convention discussed is followed. This coordination is accomplished by the cold start routine which calculates the system mask based on the interrupt routines actually in core and then inserts the proper mask into each interrupt routine status block. If, for some special reason, a routine requires a mask different from that supplied by the routine, the required mask can be specified by the programmer at assembly time. This will not be changed at execution time since the initialization routine will insert the calculated mask only if the new mask word is zero. 
     CONVENTION: To use the calculated mask specify zero for the new interrupt mask at assembly time. At execution time the calculated mask will be inserted. 
     To use a non-standard mask specify the desired mask at assembly time. At execution time it will not be changed. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE II 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 2540M STATUS WORD CONVENTIONS 
               
             
          
           
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE 
               
             
          
           
               
                 The first 10 
                 A 
                 D C 
                 B 
                 Address of new status word 
               
               
                 words of the 
                   
                 D C 
                 C 
                 Address of old status word 
               
               
                 interrupt service 
                 * 
               
               
                 routine are 
                 B 
                 D C 
                 D 
                 New PC value 
               
               
                 the status word 
                   
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 New condition code 
               
               
                 pointers and the 
                   
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 New interrupt mask 
               
               
                 status words 
                   
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 Not used 
               
               
                 in the order 
                 * 
               
               
                 shown. 
                 C 
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 Old PC value 
               
               
                   
                   
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 Old condition code 
               
               
                   
                   
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 Old interrupt mask 
               
               
                   
                   
                 D C 
                 *—* 
                 Not used 
               
               
                   
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 D 
                   
                   
                 First instruction of service 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 routine 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Interrupt Structure and Response - Priority assignments, if any, are assigned by the user. All of the interrupt lines are routed through the CRU in the 2540M and interrupt assignments are made there. Currently the interrupt levels and their assignments are described in TABLE III. 
     Data Structure - One of the most important steps in obtaining a clear understanding of any computer/software system is to develop a clear understanding of the way that the system data is structured. ‘Data’ here is used in the broad sense to include the entire content of the computer core. 
     The 2540M has its total available core split into four major areas. These four areas are: 
     1. MODE  1  Programs and Data 
     2. MODE  2  Programs and Data 
     3. Unused core 
     4. BOOTSTRAP LOADER 
     These four areas are assigned sequentially in core with the MODE  1  area starting at core location/0000. See TABLE IV. 
     MODE  1  Structure - TABLE V shows the structure used by the MODE  1  programs and data. The first 48 words of the 2540M core memory are dedicated by hardware to certain special machine functions. From/0000 to/001F are reserved for the 16 interrupt levels trap addresses. Level 0 has as its trap address/0000; Level 1 has as its trap address/0002; Level 2 has as its trap address/0004; etc. An XSW (Exchange Status Word) instruction is placed in the trap address for each interrupt level that is in use. Levels that are not in use have a NOP (No Operation) code placed in their trap locations. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE III 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Level 
                 Trap Address 
                 Function 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                  0 
                 /0000 
                 Power Down 
               
               
                  1 
                 /0002 
                 ATC Transfer Complete 
               
               
                  2 
                 /0004 
                 Internal Fault 
               
               
                  3 
                 /0006 
                 Real Time Clock - 2 ms period 
               
               
                  4 
                 /0008 
                 List Word Transfer Controller 
               
               
                  5 
                 /000A 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                  6 
                 /000C 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                  7 
                 /000E 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                  8 
                 /0010 
                 Timer1 - Module Service 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 ms period 
               
               
                  9 
                 /0012 
                 Timer2 - TTY Message 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Controller - Optional 
               
               
                 10 
                 /0014 
                 Timer3 - Workpiece Reader Service 
               
               
                   
                   
                 5 ms period 
               
               
                 11 
                 /0016 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                 12 
                 /0018 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                 13 
                 /001A 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                 14 
                 /001C 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                 15 
                 /001E 
                 TTY Controller - Optional 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE IV 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 2540M CORE MAP 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE V 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 2540 CORE MAP - SEGMENTED OPERATION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Core addresses from/0020 to /002D are reserved for the channel list words for the seven data channels under the control of the Autonomous Transfer Controller (ATC). One of these channels is used for communications with the general purpose computer  11  and one for the optional card reader. The other channels are unused at present. Details of the intercomputer communications system will be discussed later. 
     Core address/002E is the trap address which is activated by the front panel stop/reset button. Addresses/002E and /002F contain a branch to the beginning of the Cold Start (or initialization) Program. 
     Core addresses from/0030 to /007F make up a special table called the ‘Include Branch Table’ which at present contains room enough for 40 entries. This table contains branch instructions to a special group of MODE  1  programs that are to be included in the MODE  1  Core Load Build even though they are not called by name in any of the other MODE  1  programs. These programs are called ‘Supervisor Calls’ because they provide a special linkage with the MODE  2  programs. The details of this special linkage will be discussed later. 
     Starting at core address/0080 is the Cold Start or initialization program. This program provides all the operations necessary to put the system in a known state immediately after an initial program load (IPL). Embedded in the program are five functionally independent areas, which in some cases occupy the same core space. 
     A large part of the work done by the Cold Start Program needs to be done only one time, at IPL. A much smaller part need to done whenever the system is reset and then restarted. 
     Restart Program - The part of the program that is executed every time the system is reset and restarted is called the Restart Program. It reinitializes the three programmable timers, unmasks interrupts, and branches to the mainline program. Entry to the restart program is through a two instruction test to see if this is the first time the program has been executed since IPL. It if is the first time, the Cold Start portion is executed. If not the first time, only the Restart portion is executed. 
     Cold Start Program - This part of the program is executed only once, and immediately after IPL. Since this block of the program is to be used only one time, it is located in an area of core which will later be used as the input and output message buffers. When used as a message buffer area, of course, the original program is destroyed. 
     The Cold Start Program calculates the system interrupt mask and the required mask for each interrupt level, and inserts the correct mask into the new status word for each level. It initializes the data table discussed later, zeros all CRU output lines and initializes the pointers for the Core Allocator Program. Having done these functions, it sets the flag to indicate that it is no longer the first time and then branches to the Restart portion of the program. 
     Fixed Table - The Fixed Table is a dedicated area of core in the 2540M that is used in common by many of the MODE  1  programs and by the host in building core loads for the 2540 and in communicating with it. 
     Inbuffer - This section of core follows immediately after the fixed table and is used to receive messages from the 1800. 
     Outbuffer - This section of core follows immediately after the inbuffer and is used to transmit messages to the 1800. 
     The core space allocated for the Inbuffer and Outbuffer is also used by the one-time-only portion of the Cold Start Program. After its initial execution, it is destroyed by the subsequent normal message traffic. 
     MODE  2  Structure-TABLE VI shows the structure used by the MODE  2  programs and data. The basic unit in the MODE  2  structure is that block of code that is used to service one module. A module is defined as a group of machines that perform a series of related tasks to accomplish one process step. The present system allows up to five modules to be handled at once. 
     Within each module area there are five major subdivisions. These are: 
     1. Machine Header Array 
     2. Machine Procedures 
     3. Machine Data 
     4. Abnormal Neighbor Pointers (if any) 
     5. Software Bit Flags 
     The basic structure of each subdivision is shown in TABLE VII a-e  and is discussed below. 
     Machine Header Array - The first word in this array contains the number of individual machines in the module. Following this machine count word is the header array itself, eight words for each machine in the module. Each machine header contains information necessary for the supervisor, or MODE  1  programs to set up the needed registers for the MODE  2  programs and for certain other supervisory functions. The eight words and their functions are discussed below. 
     Word One - Procedure Location - This word contains the address of the first word in the procedure used to run the machine. Remember that several machines may share the same procedure. 
     Word Two - Data Location - This word contains the address of the first word in the data set for the machine. This data set is unique to this machine and is used by no others. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE VI 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 2540 CORE MAP - MODE 2 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE VIIa 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 MACHINE HEADER ARRAY 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 No. 
                 Procedure 
               
               
                   
                 Machines 
                 Location 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Location 
               
               
                   
                   
                 I/O 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ADDR-1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Number of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Outputs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Number of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Segments 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Size of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Abnormal 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Neighbor 
               
               
                   
                   
                 List 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Location 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Spare 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE VIIb 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 BIT FLAGS 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE VIIc 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PROCEDURE 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE VIId 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 MACHINE DATA 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE VIIe 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 ABNORMAL NEIGHBOR LIST 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 FOR THIS CASE FIRST TWO WORDS OF VDATA ARE 
               
               
                   
                 DEDICATED. 
               
               
                   
                 NON-APPLICABLE WORDS IN BOTH ABNORMAL 
               
               
                   
                 NEIGHBOR LIST AND VDATA SET EQUAL TO ZERO. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Word Three - I/O Address-1- This word contains the address of that line in the CRU field that is one before the first input/output line for the machine. The offset of one line is supplied so that the displacement of the I/O lines need not be zero; the lowest numbered I/O line in the procedure is 1. 
     Word Four - Number of Outputs - this word contains the number of output lines connected to the machine. The number of output lines may or may not be equal to the number of input lines. 
     Word Five - Number of Segments - This word contains the number of segments of the machine procedure. The number of segments is the number of parts of the machine procedure that run simultaneously. This number is usually but not always equal to the number of work stations in the machine. 
     Word Six - Size of Common -This word specifies the size of an area in the machine data beyond the machine work area and the segment work areas that will not be altered by specification changes that apply to the machine. By convention, such a change will only affect any remaining data words, referred to as Variable Data. 
     Word Seven - Abnormal Neighbor List Location - This word contains the address of a list which specifies any abnormal neighbors which the machine may have. If the machine has no abnormal neighbors this word contains a zero. 
     Word Eight - Spare - This word has no assigned function at present. 
     Machine Procedures - This section of core contains all of the different machine procedures needed to run the module. There will be a separate procedure for each machine type in the line (machines of the same type use the same procedure). 
     It was mentioned earlier that the number of segments in the procedure is specified in the machine header. The procedure itself specifies the entry points to each segment. 
     2540M PROGRAMS 
     The organization of programs in the 2540M computers  10  follows the organization of the two mode operation of the computer. Supervisory functions are implemented by programs which execute in MODE  1 . Machine control functions are implemented by programs which execute in MODE  2 . The programs are all written in assembly language. The assembly language is subdivided into two categories, reflecting again the two mode operation. A special control language has been developed to facilitate writing machine control programs for execution on the 2540M. This language highlights the bit-oriented instructions of the 2540M MODE  2  subgroup. In practice, it makes machine  12  control programs possible which are not available in conventional computer systems. Programs for machine control are called procedures and are written using this group of instructions and operate under control of the MODE  1  supervisory program. 
     An important feature of the MODE  2  programs is the separation of instructions and data. Many machines  12  of the same type can use the same procedure program but may vary in their individual control parameters. Data blocks or programs are segregated from procedure blocks or programs in the 2540M. The procedures contain the actual instructions for the machine&#39;s control and some invariant data. Any variable data or operating parameter is allocated to the data block for a particular machine  12 . Due to this separation, only one procedure is required for identical machines. For example, if four identical machines  12  are connected to one 2540M computer  10 , the computer  10  contains four data blocks, one for each machine  12  and one procedure shared by all of them. The machines may or may not perform identical functions, depending on the parameters specified in the individual data blocks. 
     PROCEDURE SEGMENTS 
     A feature of the MODE  2  procedure is the segmented organization. Since the physical machine  12  on the assembly line represents one or more work stations  14  in a process, the data block and procedures for a given machine also reflect a work station segmentation of the machine. At a single work station  14  or segment, the work to be done is characterized by three features. It is cyclic in nature; it involves workpiece movement; and it involves the specific work that station is to perform on the workpiece. The segments of a procedure imitate this organization; that is, each segment performs three functions. The first function is to obtain workpieces from the upstream neighbor or work station; the second is to perform the necessary work on the workpiece at that station; the third is to pass the workpiece to the downstream neighbor or work station. Workpiece movement is controlled by the segment utilizing global subroutines. 
     These global subroutines are implemented as MODE  1  programs on the 2540M computers  10 . Each global subroutine is shared by all of the procedures which use that subroutine function. Special instructions are available in the special control language to link the segment to these subroutines. Some auxiliary data is required for control of an entire module  13  by a computer  10 . Additional data blocks called machine headers contain this additional information. Headers are arrayed in the computer  10  memory in the same way the machines  12  themselves are physically aligned in a module  13 ; that is, in the order of workpiece flow. The headers contain the memory address of the procedure of a particular machine&#39;s control; the memory address of the data block for that machine&#39;s control; the number of segments represented in that machine; and some additional words for any abnormalities in the physical order of the module. For instance, a work station may feed two downstream machines or may be fed by two upstream machines one at a time. The header of the machine containing such a work station references a special list pointing to the data blocks and flags for the machines so arranged. 
     CONTEXT SWITCHING 
     In operation, the MODE  1  supervisory programs switch into MODE  2  operation and pass control to the MODE  2  control programs in much the same manner that a time-sharing computer executive program switches control to user programs on a demand or need basis. This mode switching occurs on every segment of every procedure. Overhead data is incurred by this continuous switching from MODE  1  to MODE  2  operation in the 2540&#39;s. Any necessary upkeep or overhead data is assigned to the data block for each segment and, additionally, some for each machine  12  separate from its segments. The procedures switch from MODE  2  back to MODE  1  at the completion of the work that they require. They also Switch back to MODE  1  to enter and perform work in global subroutines and some other special functions which are implemented by MODE  1  subroutines. This continual switching back and forth between MODE  1  and MODE  2  allows the supervisory programs to perform diagnostic checks on every individual Work station  14 . This permits extremely rapid identification and operator alarm in case of malfunction or abnormalities on the assembly line. This context switching also allows the supervisory program to discontinue operation of any Work Station  14  of any machine  12  in case of malfunction. If a work station  14  is declared inoperative, the Work stations of the same machine may continue their work function until workpieces in them are brought to a safe condition. When the workpieces are in a safe condition in all of the Work stations  14  of the machine  12 , the machine is declared inoperative and an operator will be alarmed so that the machine can be repaired and returned to service without damaging any workpieces other than possibly the one workpiece in the failed segment. Judicious choice of alarm messages in many cases isolates a particular machine component which caused the failure, thereby making repair or replacement a very fast means of restoring the machine  12  to service. 
     SUPERVISORY PROGRAMS 
     The supervisory functions to be performed by the computer are reflected in the organization of the programs. There is one program which performs supervision of all machines  12  in a module  13  and all modules  13  connected to a computer  10 . Other programs perform the communication function with the general purpose host computer  11 . 
     The module supervisor program (Module Service) in a 2540M computer  10  operates on a polling basis. An interval timer assigned to an interrupt level creates a pulse which causes execution of this program at specified intervals. Each time the program is executed, it searches the list structure of headers corresponding to each machine connected to the computer and switches to the appropriate place in the machine&#39;s procedure for those of machines  12  which require attention during the present interval in MODE  2  for entry and re-entry to the procedure, or MODE  1  in the case of GLOBAL SUBROUTINES. Each of the machine procedures (or GLOBAL SUBROUTINES) that require attention then switch back to MODE  1  and return to the Module Service program at the completion of the steps that are required during the present interval. When the entire list has been searched and serviced, execution of this program is suspended until the next interval. 
     One of the functions of the supervisory programs is to set properly the MODE  2  registers. The MPB contains the address of the first word in the machine procedure to be executed, the MDB contains the address of the first word in the machine data area, the SFB contains the address of the software bit flags assigned to the machine, the CRB contains the address of the I/O field of the CRU assigned to the machine, and the EC contains the number of the next instruction to be executed. 
     Once these registers are properly set, execution of the procedure may begin. The hardware of the 2540M is such that any references by the procedure to I/O lines, data, or software flags is automatically directed to the proper area as defined by the appropriate base register. The normally messy part of re-entrant programming is thus taken care of very simply and the user can execute the procedure as if he were the only one using it. 
     A very substantial savings of core storage is achieved using this technique since the procedure required to operate a machine type need appear in core only once. The only items then that are private to a given machine are its Data, its Flags, and its I/O field. The total core requirements for the Data and Flag areas are generally much smaller than that required for the procedure, resulting in a net saving of core. 
     When a 2540M computer  10  is started, a bootstrap loading program is stored into it to make it operable. Then communication between host computer  11  and the 2540M computer  10  are established. This communication link is used to load the memory of the 2540M computer  10  through communications network  15 . Once the 2540M computer  10  is loaded in this fashion, it is fully operational and is ready to command and control the assembly line modules  13  which are connected to it. All further communication with the host computer  11  is in the form of messages. The 2540M computer  10  may recognize abnormalities or machine malfunctions and send alarm messages back to computer  11  where they are decoded or printed out on a special typewriter  20  for operator attention. Computer  11  may send information to a 2540M computer  10  for slight alternations in line operation or module operation and also for operator inquiry and response through peripheral equipment connected to the 2540M computer  10  such as a CRT display unit. Through this unit, an operator can request and will see in response some of the operating variable parameters, such as temperature settings, which are required for operation of a particular module. Such peripheral equipment can be implemented as An additional machine in the module; that is, it may be controlled by a procedure and have data for display passed through its data block. 
     THE GENERAL PURPOSE COMPUTER  11   
     Almost any general purpose digital computer can be adapted for use in the present system. For example, a computer known as the 980 computer, manufactured and sold by Texas Instruments Incorporated, is suitable for this purpose. Another computer known as the 1800 computer, manufactured and sold by the International Business Machines Corporation (IBM) is also suitable for use as the general purpose computer  11 , and is the general purpose computer utilized in the present embodiment. 
     The 1800 computer operates under control of TSX, which is an IBM supplied operating system. The TSX system supports Fortran and ALC programming languages on the 1800 computer. All of the programs in the present embodiment which perform user functions are written in these two programming languages. The TSX system on the 1800 computer supports catalogued disk files where user programs or data blocks may be stored by name for recall when needed. 
     The function which general computer  11  performs for the worker computers  10  is implemented by execution of user programs under the TSX system. These functions are: (1) create data files and store descriptive information lists regarding each 2540M computer  10 ; (2) assembly MODE  1  and MODE  2  programs for the 2540M computers  10 . A group of programs known collectively as the ASSEMBLER performs this function; (3) integrate the MODE  1  programs or supervisory programs intended for a particular 2540M computer  10  into a single block. A group of programs collectively called the CORE LOAD BUILDER performs this function; (4) integrate the MODE  2  program machine control procedures and data blocks intended for a particular assembly line module  13  connected to a particular 2540M computer  10  into a single list structure called a data base. A program called DATA BASE BUILDER performs this function; (5) integrate the MODE  1  programs block and MODE  2  data base blocks for a particular 2540M computer  10  into a single block called a segmented core load. A program known as SEGMENTED CORE LOAD BUILDER performs this function; (6) transmit a segmented core load to a particular 2540M computer  10  through the communications network. A program known as the 2540M SEGMENTED LOADER performs this function. 
     Note that the order of these functions is the order utilized to implement a module as part of the total system; that is, the steps are sequential, and each step is executed in order, to add a module to the overall system. Also, the steps are independent of each other, and may be executed on the basis of convenience. 
     An advantage of this sequential organization is that minor changes may be quickly incorporated. For instance, modification of an operating parameter for a particular machine  12  on a particular module  13  is the most frequent task encountered in the operating assembly line. This requires changing only the data block for that machine; then the steps of building the data base, the segmented core load build, and reloading the particular computer are executed. No other machine  12  and no other computer  10  is affected. Changing the supervisory programs, and the MODE  1  core load build, are bypassed. 
     As illustrated in FIG. 2, the general purpose computer utilized in the present embodiment employs peripheral equipment such as disk storage unit  16 , tape storage unit  17 , card reader  18 , line printer  19 , and a typewriter  20 . 
     GLOBAL SOFTWARE SUBROUTINES 
     In accordance with the present invention, a separate procedure for each machine in the assembly line module executes under control of a supervisor program. A single machine procedure may have one or more segments, corresponding to each work station, or position in the assembly line module where a workpiece may appear. Workpiece movement between two adjacent stations is accompanied by segment communication in the form of software flags or gates. Each segment has its own set of gate and other flags (bits) in a computer word. To allow one segment to reach the flags of another segment, the flag words are assigned in consecutive order in memory, one computer word for each segment. One segment is allowed to look at the flags for its upstream and downstream neighbors (a special case is an abnormal configuration where a fork in the line of machines occurs) simply by looking at the bits in the preceding or succeeding memory words. When the gates (flags) are “open” between the segments, a workpiece is passed between the work stations. The gates are closed when the workpiece clears the upstream station. Communication between segments can be made using bit flags. The flags for a given machine are assigned contiguously in core memory with the first (upstream) segment occupying the lowest core address. The SFB register points to the flag word before the flag word for a given segment and handles positive displacement. Hence, if a bit flag is to be used for intersegment communication, it is assigned to be within the range of flag words that can be reached by the farthest downstream segment. Further, each segment uses a different displacement, or equated label, to reach the desired bit. Each machine has a single set of MDATA and each segment has access to all of the MDATA block so that different segments can communicate with each other through MDATA words if desired. The MDATA structure has a common block used by the supervisory program and procedure for certain functions; a separate work area used by the supervisory program for handling each separate segment; and a variable data area. Descriptive labels are used to describe these blocks, as follows: 
     A RUN flag is a combination communication and status word used jointly by Module Service and by a machine procedure. Its various values are: 
     RUN=0 
     The machine in on-line but not processing. (Safe state shutdown). There may or may not be workpieces present in the machine. 
     RUN=1 
     The machine is on-line in normal processing. 
     RUN=2 
     Command to machine to complete processing any workpiece it has, hold them, and to go to safe state shutdown. Machine sets RUN=0 when it has complied with this command. 
     RUN=3 
     Command to machine to empty itself. No new workpieces are accepted. Processing of existing workpieces is completed and they are released. 
     A MONITOR flag MONTR is used to detect malfunctions of any Work station. The monitor for every Work station program segment is decremented by Module Service at every servicing interval. If it falls below preset limits, a warning message is output, but the Work station program segment and hence the respective work station continues to be serviced, and the monitor decremented. If it should fall below an additional set of limits, the Work station is declared inoperative and is removed from service with an accompanying message. 
     This reflects the very practical situation that an electro-mechanical machine most often degrades in performance, by slowing down, before failing completely. A series of repeated warning messages, indicating such a slowdown, permit maintenance attention to be directed to the machine before failure creates a breakdown in the assembly line module. 
     The monitor is analogous to an alarm clock that must be continually reset to keep it from going off. If it ever goes off, something has gone wrong. 
     At the beginning of the processing step, the segment sets a value into the monitor flag word corresponding to a reasonable time for completion of processing. In workpiece movement steps, the monitor flag word is set appropriately by the GLOBAL SUBROUTINES. 
     In addition to decrementing the monitor flag for each segment, each machine&#39;s status is tested by Module Service at each servicing interval. Failures in a machine&#39;s hardware or electronic components, or circuit overloads may cause the machine to be inoperative, or an operator may wish to remove a machine from computer control. Two lines for each machine serve this purpose. 
     The first output line for each machine is an “operate” line, referenced by label OPER. The first input line for each machine is a “READY” line, referenced by label READY. Pushbutton and toggle switches on each machine allow an operator or technician to remove a machine from computer control by changing the state of the READY line to the computers and restore the machine to computer control by restoring the state of the READY line. Conversely, the computer assumes control of a machine by detecting a READY signal in response to an “OPERATE” output, and removes a machine from service by changing the state of the “OPERATE” output. 
     a TIMER word is used to specify the number of intervals which are to elapse before a segment again requires attention. This is particularly useful where long periods are required for mechanical motion. This word may be set to a value corresponding to a reasonable time for the work station to respond and will be decremented by one until it reaches zero by Module Service, once each interval, before re-entering the procedure segment. 
     A BUSY flag is utilized to allow an orderly shutdown of a multi-Work station machine in case of failure of a Work station segment. The value of the BUSY flag ranges from zero to the number of Work stations segments in a machine. Each Program segment increments the BUSY flag when it is entering a portion of its procedure which is not to be interrupted. When it reaches a portion of the procedure where an interruption is permissible, it decrements the BUSY flag. Module Service shuts a machine down when the count of failed Work stations equals the value of the BUSY flag. Usually the global subroutines handle all BUSY flag operation. 
     A TRACKING flag is a bit flag set by Module Service to indicate whether the module is in a workpiece tracking mode or not. Normal operation will be tracking, and in that mode workpieces are introduced only at the beginning machine of an assembly line module. This would be quite inconvenient during initial checkout, so tracking can be disabled to allow workpiece insertion anywhere. 
     Each Work station is treated by Module Service almost as if it was a separate machine. Each Program segment corresponding to a work station has its own set of bit flags, its own event counter, its own delay word and its own monitor, etc. With this mode of operation, it is quite possible for one Work station of a multi-Work station machine to fail while the other work stations are still operating normally. It is, however, not always possible to shut down only a portion of a machine; if, for example, each machine has only a single OPERATE bit and a single READY bit. In such case, the BUSY flag, discussed earlier, provides a for an orderly shutdown. When it is permissible for Module Service to shut down a machine with one or more failed work stations, it does so by dropping the OPERATE bit. All other outputs are left unchanged. This action immediately takes the machine off-line and turns on a red warning light. All outputs from the computer  10  are disabled by local gating at the machine even though they are unchanged by the computer  10  itself. Module Service also saves the current value of the event counter for each program segment of the machine taken off line. The machine then remains off-line until human action is taken to restore it to service. When whatever condition that caused the machine to fail has been corrected and the machine returned to the state it was in when it failed, the operator pushes the READY button and Module Service then reactivates the machine. Each segment procedure is re-entered at the point where it was when the machine failed, and whatever output conditions existed at that time are restored. Module Service also sets a bit flag for each program segments to indicate that the machine is in a restart transient. This restart bit is turned on when a machine restarts from a failure, and remains on for exactly one polling interval for each work station of the machine. The use of this restart bit is discussed in more detail with the global subroutine description below, and normally all testing of the restart bit is done by these global routines. If it is necessary, however, for machines with complex workpiece processing requirements to know whether or not they are in a restart condition, this bit is available for that purpose. 
     In some configurations, the 2540M computer is required to handle an assembly line module that contains a machine from which a workpiece has two possible exits. Since a computer core is essentially a one dimensional linear array, this means that it is not possible, in general, for a machine to know which machines are upstream and downstream from it merely by being adjacent to them in core. Explicit, rather than implicit, pointers are required. 
     A core organization is utilized for the general cases such that under normal conditions a machine can make use of its implicit knowledge of its neighbors for communicating with them. Abnormal conditions exist when this is not possible and explicit pointers are then used. The normal and abnormal predecessors and successors referred to below are these normal and abnormal conditions. 
     Each segment has its own input gate and output gate flags. The labels used to reference these gates are GATEB and GATEC, respectively. In addition, GATEA is used by a segment to reference the output gate flag of its upstream neighbor, and GATED is used to reference the input gate flag of its downstream neighbor. 
     The global subroutines for workpiece handling into and out of a work station form a hierarchal structure. The two major groupings are for workpieces entering a work station and for workpieces leaving a work station. There are two subgroups under each major group and several variants under each subgroup. TABLE VIII below summarizes the relations between the various subroutines which are next described in detail. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE VIII 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 I. Workpiece Entering Work Station Routines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. Request Workpiece Routines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 a. Segment 1 - Normal Predecessor 
               
               
                   
                 b. Segment 1 - Abnormal Predecessor 
               
               
                   
                 c. Segments 2-N - Workpiece Sensor Available 
               
               
                   
                 d. Segments 2-N - Workpiece Sensor Not Available 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 2. Acknowledge Workpiece Routines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 a. All Segments - Normal Predecessor 
               
               
                   
                 b. Segment 1 - Abnormal Predecessor 
               
               
                   
                 c. Segments 2-N - Workpiece Sensor Not Available 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 II. Workpiece Leaving Work Station Routines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. Ready to Release Workpiece Routines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 a. Segment N - Normal Successor 
               
               
                   
                 b. Segment N - Abnormal Successor 
               
               
                   
                 c. Segments 1-(N-1) - Safe 
               
               
                   
                 d. Segments 1-(N-1) - Unsafe 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 2. Assure Exit Routines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 a. All Segments - Normal Successor 
               
               
                   
                 b. Segment N - Abnormal Successor 
               
               
                   
                 c. Segments 1-(N-1) - Workpiece Sensor Not Available 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Of this total group of subroutines listed in TABLE VIII, however, only four different program calls are used. The routine themselves, through use of data available to them from Module Service, and the arguments passed to them, will determine the proper section to use. These four calls are (I.1) REQUEST WORKPIECE (I.2) ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT (II.1) READY TO RELEASE; and (II.2) ASSURE EXIT. All four calls require one argument to be passed to them. For three of the four, the argument is the address of a workpiece sensor used to determine whether or not a workpiece is present at the work station using the call. The subroutines assume that all workpiece sensors produce a logical “1” when a workpiece is present. For the work stations that have no workpiece sensor an address of zero is passed, thereby indicating to the subroutine that there is no sensor to be checked. 
     The fourth call argument passes information as to whether the work station is a safe or unsafe station, and the Ready to Release routine takes appropriate action. 
     (I.1) Request Workpiece Routines 
     The four routines associated with this group differ only slightly. Therefore, only the normal processor routine (I.1.a) will be discussed in detail and the differences between the normal processor routine and the others (I.1.b-d) will be appropriately pointed out. All four are reached with a single call, and have the same exit conditions. 
     The call for this group is: 
     
       
         REQST SLICE (PC). 
       
     
     Here PC is the important sensor argument, and SLICE (meaning workpiece) is included only as an aid to legibility. 
     Referring to FIG. 3A, upon entering the routine, the BUSY flag is decremented  100  to indicate that this segment is prepared for a shutdown, and the routine then enters a loop that comprises delay  101  or 100 ms, setting  102  of the segment monitor, a check  103  of the RUN flag, a check  104  on the presence of a workpiece, a check  105  on GATEA, and then back to the delay  100 . The check  103  on the RUN flag allows traverse of the complete loop only if the RUN flag is one. If it is two, a shorter loop is entered which sets  106  the RUN flag to zero as soon as the machine become  107 , not BUSY. If the RUN flag is zero or three, a short loop is entered which essentially deactivates the segment. No workpieces are accepted unless the RUN flag is one. 
     While in the full loop  100 - 105 , a check  104  on the workpiece present is made since it is not legal for a workpiece to be present here if the module is in its workpiece tracking mode. If a workpiece appears, then a check  108  is made to see if the module is in a tracking mode. If so, the routine sends  109  a message that there is an illegal workpiece present and locks  110  itself into a test loop. If the workpiece is removed before the monitor is timed out, the routine resumes its normal loop. If not, if fails in that test. If the module is not in a tracking mode, however, the workpiece is accepted  111  and the subroutine returns control to the procedure via EXIT  1 . 
     Under normal conditions, the subroutine stays in the full loop  100 - 105  described above until the upstream machine/segment signals that it is ready to send a workpiece by setting GATEA to zero. The subroutine then responds  112  by setting GATEB to zero and incrementing BUSY. It then enters a loop that consists of a delay  113  or 100 ms, setting  114  the monitor, and a check  115  on GATEB and then  116  on GATEA. Normal operation then would be for the upstream work station to indicate that the workpiece is on its way by setting GATEA back to one. In the event that the workpiece is lost by the upstream work station, or that it is directed to hold it by the RUN flag, it sets both GATEB and GATEA back to one. Since the subroutine checks GATEB before it checks GATEA, this action tells it that the upstream work station has changed its mind. It then decrements  117  BUSY and returns to the first idling loop at  101 . If the setting of GATEA and GATEB indicate that a workpiece is on the way, the routine returns control to the procedure via EXIT  2 . 
     EXIT  1  from the routine returns control to the operating program procedure at the first instruction following the subroutine cell. Since this exit is taken when there is an unexpected but legal workpiece present, the first instruction following the routine call should be a JUMP to the workpiece processing part of the procedure. EXIT  2  from the subroutine returns control to the procedure at the second instruction following the subroutine call. This exit is taken when a workpiece is on the way from the upstream work station and the instructions beginning here should be to prepare for the workpiece arrival. 
     Referring to FIG.  1 A. EXIT  1  returns control to the calling segment of the procedure at step  26  for processing. EXIT  2  returns control at step  23 . 
     Referring to FIG. 3B, if the machine has an abnormal predecessor, the MODE  1  program determines the address of the indicated upstream work station&#39;s bit flag word and makes this address available to the subroutine. The action of the subroutine now is the same as just described, except that the subroutine sets the SFB to point  119  and  121  to the current machine work station segment when testing or setting GATEB, and to point  118  and  120  to the indicated predecessor when testing GATEA. 
     For segments 2-N, the action of the subroutine is the same as for the normal case above, except that no check  103  is made on the RUN flag. This check must be omitted from these segments or else the command to empty the machine (RUN=3) would be ineffective, as illustrated in FIG.  3 C. 
     For work stations that have no workpiece sensor available, the subroutine action is as described above, except that no check  104  on workpiece presence is made, and the subroutine always returns control to the procedure via EXIT  2 , as illustrated in FIG.  3 D. 
     (I.2) Acknowledge Workpiece Routines 
     Of this group of routines, only level (I.2.a) will be discussed in detail. The differences in the others (I.2.b-c) will be pointed out. A single cell is used for access to all of these subroutines and the same exit conditions exist for all. 
     The call for this group is: 
     
       
         ACKN RECEPT (PG) 
       
     
     Here, PC is the important sensor argument and RECPT is included as an aid to legibility. 
     Referring to FIG. 3E, upon entering the subroutine, a loop is entered comprising a delay  122  of 100 ms, a check  123  for workpiece presence, and a check  124  of the RESTART bit, and back to the delay  122 . Since this subroutine is entered only when there is definite knowledge that a workpiece is on the way, the monitor is not set in this loop. The workpiece must arrive within the proper time or this segment will fail. The previous global subroutine, REQUEST SLICE, will have set a monitor value of two seconds before returning for normal workpiece transport. For those machines where two seconds is not sufficient, the monitor is properly set in the machine operating program by the normal procedure as part of its preparation for the workpiece arrival. 
     If the workpiece arrives at the sensor within the prescribed time, as is normal, the routine sets 125 GATEB to one to indicate that the workpiece arrived as expected, and returns control to the procedure via EXIT  1 . 
     If the workpiece does not arrive, the machine will fail in this loop and human intervention is called for. One of two different actions is taken by the human operator, depending on the condition of the workpiece that failed to arrive. If the workpiece is OK and just got stuck somewhere between the two segments transporting it, the required action is to place the workpiece at the sensor that was expecting it and to restart the machine. Upon restarting, the first instruction executed is to check the sensor to see if the workpiece is now present. Since it is, all is well and the routine makes a normal exit via EXIT  1 . 
     If, however, the workpiece is somehow defective, the human operator removes it from the line, and then restarts the machine. The first instruction is executed as above, but this time the workpiece present test fails and the routine goes on to test the RESTART bit. This bit is on during the first polling interval following a restart. Since this is still the first period, the RESTART bit is still on and the test is answered true. This condition conveys the information that the workpiece was lost or destroyed in transit. The routine then  126  sets GATEB to one and AMEM (a bit flag used by the tracking supervisor) to zero; this simultaneous action informing the tracking supervisor that the workpiece is lost, sends a message that the workpiece is lost and the particulars concerning it, and returns control to the procedure via EXIT  2 . 
     EXIT  1  from the subroutine returns control to the machine procedure at the first instruction following the subroutine cell. This is the exit taken when a workpiece arrives normally and the instruction there should be a JUMP to the processing part of the procedure. 
     EXIT  2  from the subroutine returns control to the machine procedure at the second instruction following the subroutine call. Since this exit is taken when the expected workpiece has been lost, the instructions beginning here should be to reset the preparations made for the workpiece, and then return to the beginning of the procedure to get another workpiece. 
     Referring to FIG. 1, EXIT  1  returns control to the calling segment at step  26  for processing. EXIT  2  returns control at step  25 . 
     Referring to FIG. 3F, if the machine has an abnormal predecessor, the subroutine action is the same as above except that the SFB is set  126   a  to point to the proper machine as described with reference to FIG.  3 B. 
     If the machine/segment has no workpiece sensor, the only action the subroutine can take is to assume that the workpiece arrived properly, set GATEB to one, and return to the procedure via EXIT  1 , as illustrated in FIG.  3 G. 
     (II.1) Ready to Release Routines 
     The call for this group of routines is: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 READY 
                 SAFE 
                 RELEASE 
               
               
                   
                 READY 
                 UNSAF 
                 RELEASE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Here, the important argument is SAFE or UNSAF, indicating whether the work station is a safe one for the workpiece to stay in or not. The term RELEASE is treated as a comment. 
     Referring to FIG. 3H, the detailed discussion is of level (II, 1.a) which is of the last work station in a machine with a normal successor. 
     Referring to FIG. 3H, upon entering the subroutine the BUSY flag is decremented  127  and GATEC set to zero, indicating that the routine is ready to send a workpiece to the next work station. It then checks  128  for GATED to be one. GATED will normally be one at this point, and the check is made to assure that only one workpiece will be passed between two work stations for each complete cycle of the segment gates. If GATED is not one at this time, the routine loops  138  until it is, and then enters a waiting loop comprising a delay  129  of 100 ms, setting  130  the monitor, and then checking  131  the RUN flag and checking  132  GATED for a zero. 
     As long as the RUN flag is 1, indicating normal operation; or 3, indicating that work station is empty, the routine stays in this wait loop checking  132  on GATED. If the RUN flag becomes 2, the routine ceases to check on GATED, and sets  133  GATEC and GATED both to 1. Setting of GATED is necessary here in case the RUN flag and GATED both changed state within the same polling period. The simultaneous closing of GATEC and GATED indicates to the downstream work station that the workpiece is not coming, even if it had just requested it. The routine then waits  134  until the work station is not BUSY and sets  135  the RUN flag to zero. It then stays in a short loop until Module Service tells it to go again by setting the RUN flag back to 1 to 3. When it received this command, it sets  136  GATEC open (=0) again and resumes the loop checking  132  on GATED. When GATED becomes zero, indicating that the downstream work station is ready for the workpiece, the routine increments BUSY and returns control to the calling procedure at the first instruction following the call. Only one EXIT is used for the READY TO RELEASE routines. 
     When the procedure regains control at this point, it goes through the action of releasing the workpiece it has to the downstream work station. 
     Referring to FIG. 1, control returns to the calling segment at step  30 . 
     Operation of the subroutine with abnormal successors is similar to the operation described earlier for abnormal predecessors. Here the action of the subroutine is the same except for the explicit setting  139 - 141  and  133   a  of the SFB to point to the right machine at the right time, as illustrated in FIG.  3 I. 
     For the remainder of machine work stations  1 -(N- 1 ), a distinction is made between safe and unsafe work stations. 
     For work stations that are not the last work station, no check  131  need be made on the RUN flag, as illustrated in FIG. 3J but, except for this omission, the subroutine operation is the same as just described. 
     For unsafe work stations (by definition the last work station is not considered to be unsafe) the subroutine operation is illustrated in FIG.  3 K. The BUSY flag is not decremented since the machine is not in an interruptable state, GATEC is set  127   a  to zero, and the routine loops checking  128  and  132  on GATED to reach to proper state indicating that the downstream work station is ready for the workpiece. The monitor is not set in the unsafe release routine, since the work station must get rig of its workpiece within its prescribed time, or fail. 
     (II.2) Assure Exit Routines 
     
       
         ASSUR EXIT (PC) 
       
     
     Here, the important sensor argument is PC, indicating the sensor to be used n checking on workpiece presence. EXIT is included as an aid to legibility. 
     The ASSURE EXIT subroutine is called immediately upon completion of the release workpiece action, before the workpiece has had an opportunity to leave the position where the workpiece sensor can see it. 
     Referring to FIG. 3L, upon entering the subroutine, the first instruction sets  142  the RESTART bit ON, and then it immediately checks  143  to see if the workpiece is still at the sensor. Taking this action allows the routine to detect a workpiece that somehow disappeared during normal workpiece processing. Providing that the routine is called immediately as described above, the workpiece will not have had time to leave the sensor, so that the first test to see if the workpiece left will fail. The RESTART bit  144  is on for only one polling interval (Module Service resets the bit after each interval) so that by the time the workpiece does leave the RESTART bit is reset. When the workpiece leaves normally, then the routine sets  146  GATEC to one, indicating that the workpiece left, and then returns control to the procedure at the next instruction following the subroutine call. 
     Referring to FIG. 1, control returns to the calling segment at step  32 . 
     The procedure then allows sufficient time for the workpiece to clear the work station, and return the work station to a quiescent state. 
     If the workpiece is gone on the first test  143  of workpiece presence, with the RESTART bit on  144 , then the workpiece is declared lost, a message is sent to that effect and GATED and GATEC are closed (=1) simultaneously  145  and  146 . This simultaneous closing tells the downstream work station not to expect a workpiece. Without this knowledge, it would expect the workpiece and would fail when it did not arrive. 
     One further possibility is that the workpiece will not leave the sensing station. If this happens, then the work station and hence the machine will fail waiting for the workpiece to leave, and human intervention is required. One of two alternatives is open to the operator. If the workpiece is just struck, but otherwise, OK, then the operator will free it and leave it at the station, at the sensor, where the machine failed. Upon restarting the actions described above are taken and the computer can tell whether the workpiece is still there and OK or if it has been removed from the line. If the workpiece is damaged or otherwise unusable then the operator removes it from the work station before restarting. 
     If the work station has abnormal successors, then the SFB is set  145   a  to the proper work station as the subroutine goes through its steps, illustrated in FIG. 3M; otherwise, the action is as described above. 
     If the work station has no sensor, indicated by passing an argument of zero, then the routine sets  146  GATEC to one, and hopes that everything works as it should. This is shown in FIG.  3 N. 
     General Operating Procedural Segment Flow Chart 
     The use of the global subroutines for handling the various overhead functions required for proper operation of the line simplifies the writing of specific segment operating procedures. As described above, there are four global subroutine calls, and in the general segment procedure, each one is used once. 
     Again referring to FIG. 1, for the general work station, with no complicating factors, the first step in the procedure after entry  21  is to call REQUEST SLICE  22 , indicating the photocell or sensor to be used. If the routine returns through EXIT  1 , a JUMP passes control to the processing part of the procedure steps  26 ,  27 ,  28 . Step  28  (processing) maybe skipped on the basis of a machine data work labeled BYPAS. If it returns through EXIT  2 , then do whatever is necessary to prepare for the workpiece  23  and then call ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT  24 . If it returns through EXIT  2 , then restore whatever preparations  25  were made for the workpiece and JUMP to REQUEST SLICE (WORKPIECE)  22 . 
     In the processing section of the procedure, the monitor should be set  26 , the input utilities reset  26 , and a test of the BYPASS flag  27  should be made. Then process  28  or BYPASS to  29 , depending on the results of the test. 
     Then call READY TO RELEASE  29 , indicating SAFE or UNSAFE conditions. When the routine returns control, release the workpiece  30  and call ASSURE EXIT  31 , indicating the proper sensor. When that routine returns control, wait long enough for the workpiece to clear the work station  32 , reset the output utilities  33 , and jump back to REQUEST SLICE(WORKPIECE)  22 . 
     GLOBAL SUBROUTINES INTERFACE WITH MODULE SERVICE 
     Since the GLOBAL SUBROUTINES are called from a segment routine, it is convenient to have direct interface between the GLOBAL SUBROUTINES and the MODULE SERVICE program at the work station segment service level. In practice, the GLOBAL SUBROUTINES are reentered repeatedly before workpiece movement is accomplished. The logic of decoding an argument and saving it, selecting an appropriate variant, and the setting of the type of return to MODULE SERVICE which is accomplished for the GLOBAL SUBROUTINES is illustrated in FIGS. 4A-D. 
     Referring to FIG. 4A, the steps involved with the control sequence for REQUESTS are: save the instruction counter according to the instructions that call this subroutine  150  by storing it in the segment work area; determine if the present work station is the first work station of a machine  151 ; if not, jump to step  161 , otherwise store reentry point in segment work area  152  and store the SFB in location HERE and location THERE  153  and determine if this machine has a normal predecessor or not  154 . If not, get the address of the explicit software flag address  155  and store the SFB address for the predecessor machine  156  in THERE. If the machine is normal, get the sensor address and store it  157 ; then enter  158  routine variant A. If the present work station is not the first work station  151 , then a determination  161  is made as to whether the work station has a sensor. If the work station has a sensor, the reentry point is stored  162  in a segment work area. The sensor address is obtained and stored  163 . Then, at  164  routine variant B is entered. If the work station does not have a sensor, as determined at  161 , the reentry point is stored  167  in the segment work area and routine variant C is entered at  168 . Three returns are provided from routine variants A, B, and C. If the subroutine function is not finished, return is made to point EXIT where the return pointer is saved  159  and control is passed  160  to MODULE SERVICE at point MDKM 2 . If the subroutine function is completed and the first exit path is taken, then return is made to point EXIT  1 . Then at  165  the return pointer is zeroed (the event counter is incremented by 2), the event counter is set and control is returned to  166  MODULE SERVICE at point MODCM. The third return point from the subroutine variants is at point EXIT  2  which is the second exit pass on completion of the subroutine function. From EXIT  2 , at  169 , the return pointer is zeroed, the event counter is incremented by four and the event counter is set. Control is returned  166  to MODULE SERVICE at point MODCM. 
     The control sequence for ACKNOWLEDGE GLOBAL SUBROUTINES are illustrated in FIG.  4 B. The first step  170  in this segment is to decrement the event counter by 2 and store the results in the segment work area. A determination is made as to whether the work station has a sensor  171 . If the work station does have a sensor, the reentry point is stored  172  in segment work area, the SFB is stored  173  in location HERE and location THERE and at  174  a determination is made as to whether the work station has a normal predecessor. If the work station does not, the predecessor software flag base address is obtained and stored in THERE at  175 . Whether the work station has a normal predecessor or not, the next step  176  is to obtain the sensor address and store it. Then, a variant (A)  176  is entered at routine  177 . Three exits are provided from the variant A routine. The first exit is taken when the subroutine function is not completed and control is returned to the subroutine at the next polling interval. This exit point is led to at  159  and control is returned to MODULE SERVICE  160  at point MDKM 2 . In the event that the subroutine&#39;s function is completed or the work station has no sensor, EXIT  1  is taken which is the exit taken when the subroutine has been completed normally and control is then returned  166  to MODULE SERVICE at point MODCM. The third exit is labeled EXIT  2  and is taken when the subroutine function has been aborted. The point  169  is labeled EXIT  2  and control is returned  166  to MODULE SERVICE at point MODCM. 
     Referring now to FIG. 4C, the control sequence required for the READY RELEASE SUBROUTINE is presented. The firs step is to decrement the EC (event counter) by 2 and store it  178  in the segment work area; then a determination is made  179  as to whether the present work station is the last work station of a machine. If the work station is the last work station, the appropriate reentry point is stored  180  and the SFB is stored  181  in location HERE and location THERE. Then at  182  a determination is made as to whether the work station has a normal successor. If it has an abnormal successor, then location THERE is set  183  to the software flag base address for the abnormal successor. Whether the work station is normal or not, the routine variant A is entered  184 . If the present segment is not the last segment of the work station  179 , a determination is made  185  as to whether the argument passed to the subroutine indicates a safe or unsafe machine. If it is safe, the reentry point is stored  186 ; and routine variant B is entered at  187 . If the machine is unsafe  185 , the reentry point is stored  188  and routine variant C entered at  189 . The same return points EXIT and EXIT  1  described previously are used by this subroutine. In the event that the subroutine function is not completed, control returns  159  to the point labeled EXIT. When the subroutine function is completed, control is returned  165  to point EXIT  1 . 
     Referring to FIG. 4D, the control sequence for GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ASSURE EXIT is described. The first step is to decrement the EC register by 2 and store  190  the results in the segment work area; then, the reentry point is stored  191  in the segment work area. Next, a determination is made as to whether the argument passed indicates this work station has a sensor  192 . If the work station has a sensor, the SFB is stored  193  in location HERE and location THERE. A determination is then made  194  as to whether the work station has a normal successor or an abnormal successor. If the work station has an abnormal successor, the pointer from the machine header is obtained and location THERE is set to the software flag base address for the abnormal successor at  195 . Whether the work station is normal or not, the sensor address is obtained and stored  196 ; then variant A (which is the only variant implemented) routine is entered  197  in this routine. The same return points EXIT and EXIT  1  are provided, as described earlier. Point EXIT is taken  159  when the subroutine function is not completed and control is to return to this subroutine at the next interval. Point EXIT  1  is taken  165  when the subroutine function is completed. 
     COMPUTER CONTROL OF A MODULE 
     After a 2540M bit pusher computer  10  is loaded and is started into execution, it is in an idle condition, doing only three things; (1) program MANEA is repeatedly monitoring a pushbutton control box for each module; (2) communications with the 1800 is periodically executed on the basis of interrupt response programs which interrupt program MANEA; and (3) the module machine service program is periodically instituted in response to interval timer interrupts. All modules and all machines are off-line. 
     When an operator pushes one of the pushbuttons on the box, it is sensed by program MANEA and the COMMAND FLAG is set appropriately. An alternative method is for a programmer is manually set this flag word through the programmer&#39;s operation of the computer. At the next interval, MODULE SERVICE responds to the numerical volume in the COMMAND FLAG and executes the appropriate action with all the machines in the module. Program MANEA continues to monitor the pushbutton box during the time period in which no interrupts are being serviced. 
     Messages are produced by MODULE SERVICE in response to pushbutton commands and to abnormal conditions relating to machine performance. These messages are buffered by subroutines. When the 1800 computer queries the 2540M and the message happens to be in a buffer, the interrupt response to the 1800 general purpose computer query transmits the buffer contents and resets it to an empty condition. Messages communicated from the 1800 computer are treated in the same manner; that is, interrupt response subroutines put the messages in buffers and transfer execution to whatever response program is required to handle the particular message. 
     Once a module is commanded to do something, it stays in the commanded state until it is commanded to do something else. 
     MODULE MACHINE SERVICE PROGRAM 
     The MODULE MACHINE SERVICE program is entered in response to interval timer interrupt with its level and all lower level interrupt masks are disarmed. Referring to FIG. 5A, the first step of the routine is to save  200  all registers. MODE  1  registers  1 - 8 ; MODE  2  registers  1 - 5 , not the timers. The program then sets  201  the interrupt entry address for lockout detection or to a condition of overrun of the polling period for this interval and disarms or unmasks the interrupt level. Next, the software clock and date are incremented  202  and the timer is restarted for the next interval  203 . Register  4  MODE  1  is set to the number of modules to be processed and this number of modules is saved  204  in MODNO and the module image flag set to zero. 
     Subroutine SETRG is called to initialize the MODE  2  registers for the first module requiring service  205 . Then the condition flag CONDF is tested to see if the module is off-line  206 ; that is, CONDF=0. If the module is not off-line, control is passed to step  219 . If the condition flag is zero, step  207  is a branch on the contents of the COMMAND flag, so that the program goes to step  269  or  208  or  218  or  218  or  235  or  216  or  218  or  218 , depending on the value of the command flags  0 - 7 . In response to a START COMMAND flag value step, a COMMAND flag is set to zero and the condition flag is set  208  to  1  as illustrated in FIG.  5 B. Subroutine RELDA is called  209  to initialize pointers for this machine. Subroutine ONLNA  210  is called to start the machine; subroutine FXSFB is called  211  to fix the SFB for this machine. Subroutine STEPR is called  212  to point to the next machine. Control returns to step  209  until all the machines are finished. Then, the IMAGE flag is tested to see if it was zero  213  and control passes the step  214  if not, or step  269  if it was zero. The IMAGE flag is one if some machine did not come on-line, in which case the first machine is stopped  214  by setting run to zero and the flag STRT 2  is set  215  to  1 . Control the passes to step  269 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5C, if the command was STATUS REQUEST, the command flag COMFG is set to zero  216  and subroutine MSIOO is called  217  to send a status message. Control passes to step  269 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5D, commands stop, empty, tracking on, tracking off are invalid if the module is off-line. A COMMAND flag is set to zero  218 . Control passes to step  269  effectively ignoring the commands. 
     Referring to FIG. 5E (including FIG. 5E-1) if the module is running, a branch on the command flag numerical value is executed  219 . Control passes to step  267  or  220  or  223  or  227  or  235  or  239  or  256  or  261 , depending on the numerical value of the command flag  0 - 7 . In response to start command, a CONDITION flag is set  220  to  1 ; a machine run flag is set  221  to  1 ; and subroutine STEPR is called  222  to set the registers to the next machine in the module. Control returns to step  221  until all the machines are finished, in which case control is passed to step  269 . In response to stop command, the condition flag CONDF is set  223  to  2 ; the machine run flag is checked for zero  224  and if zero, control is passed to step  226 ; if not zero, the machine RUN flag is set  225  to  2  and subroutine STEPR is called  226  to step the registers to the next machine in the module. Control returns to step  224  until all the machines are finished, in which case, control passes to step  269 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5F, in response to a command of empty, the condition flag is set  227  to  3 ; register  7  is set to the second machine in the module  228 ; the machine run flag is set  229  to  1 ; and subroutine STEPR is called  230  to step the registers to point to the next machine. Control returns to step  229  until all machines are finished, in which case pointers are set for the first machine  231  and subroutine STEPR is called  232  to set the registers appropriately. The machine RUN flag is tested for zero  233 . If the RUN flag is equal to zero, control passes to step  266 . If not, the RUN flag is set to  2 , indicating an empty condition  234  and control passes to step  269 . Referring to FIG. 5G, in response to a command of the EMERGENCY STOP, a COMMAND flag and CONDITION flag are set to zero  235 , subroutine RELDA is called  236  to reload the machine registers to zero; subroutine FXSFB is called  237  to set the software flag base for the next machine; subroutine STEPR is called  238  to step register to the next machine in the module; and control returns to step  236  until all machines in the module are finished. Then control passes to step  269 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5H, in response to status request, FLAG word TEMP  1  is set to zero  239  and the conditional branch is executed on the contents of the condition flag CONDF  240 . Control passes to step  241  or step  242  or step  242 A, depending on the value of the command flag. In response to a condition of module running, subroutine MSIOO is called  241  to send a message that the module is running. In response to condition of module stopped, subroutine MSIOO is called  242  to send message module stopped. In response to a condition of module emptying, subroutine MSIOO is called  242 A to send a message “module emptying”. Then, the machine off-line message is set up and some data words are zeroed  243 , the machine timer is integrated to determine whether it is negative  244  and control passes to step  245  or to  247 , depending on whether it is negative or not negative, respectively. If the timer is negative, subroutine MSIOO is called  245  and to send a message machine off-line and data words TEMP  2  is incremented  246 . Control passes to step  247 , where the comparison is made to determine “Is this machine segment a bottleneck?” If the answer is yes, control passes to step  248 . If the answer is no, control passes to step  249 . At step  248 , the bottleneck data words are saved and  248  the segment number is decremented  249 . Then, if all segments of the machine have been examined, control passes to step  252 . If not, control passes to step  251  which points registers to the next segment and passes control back to step  247 . At step  252 , subroutine STEPR is called to increment the registers to point to the next machine. If all machines have not been examined, control returns to step  244 . When all the machines are examined, control passes to step  253  and the comparison is made to determine. “Are any machines off-line”. If the answer is no, control passes to step  254 , If the answer is yes, control passes to step  255 . At step  254 , subroutine MSIOO is called to send the message “All machines on line”. Subroutine MSIOO is called to send  255  a message “limiting segments is XX” and control passes to step  266 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5 (including FIGS. 5I-1 and  5 I- 2 ) in response to tracking on command the TRACKING flag bit for this segment is set on to  56  and the segmented number is decremented  257  and a comparison is made to determine is that all segments for this machine  258 . If the answer is no, control passes to step  259 . If the answer is yes, control passes to stel  260 . At step  259 , a register is stepped to point to the next segment and control passes back to step  256 . When all segments have been examined, subroutine STEPR is called  260  to step the registers to the next machine in the module. Until all machines in the module are examined, control returns to step  256  when all the machines have been examined, control passes to step  266 . In response to the tracking off command, the TRACKING bit is set off for this segment  261 , a segment is decremented  262 , and the comparison is made to determine “Is that all segments for this machine?”  263 . If the answer is yes, control passes to step  265 . If the answer is no, control passes to step  264 . At step  264 , the registers are stepped to the next segment and control returns to step  261 . When all segments of the machine have been examined, subroutine STEPR is called  265 . Until all machines n the module have been examined, control returns to step  261 . When all machines have been examined, control passes to step  266 . When conditions are such that a module is to be processed, the COMMAND flag is set to zero  266  and subroutine SETRG is called  267  to initialize registers for the first machine to be processed which is the last machine in the module. Until the last machine is reached, control passes to step  268 . When the last machine is reached, control passes to step  269 . Subroutine MACHN is called  268  to service all machines in the module. Then the module number is decremented  269  and if any machines are left  270 , control passes to  204 . If any modules are left, the module number, machine number and segment number are zeroed  271  and control passes to step  272  for program exit. 
     Referring to FIGS. 5J-K to exit normally from the program, all interrupt levels are masked or disarmed  272 . The interrupt response entry address is reset to the normal program entry point  273 , disabling the lockout trap. The internal timer is read  274  and execution time is calculated at the current time minus the starting time. All registers are restored  275  and the program returns to the one which was interrupted by replacing the old status block of information  276 . If the interval timer should run down and cause an interrupt before module service can exit normally, the MODE  2  registers are received  278  and subroutine MSOOO is called  279  to send the message “module service lockout” with the responsible machine&#39;s identification. Subroutine OFLIN is called  280  to remove the machine from further operation, set its status words appropriately and declare the machine inoperative. Then control is returned to step  203  to resume servicing for this next interval. 
     Referring to FIG. 5L, subroutine MACHN is described, which does all machine level processing for the module service program. On entry, the READY line is sensed  300 . If it is on, control passes to step  301 . If the READY line is off, control passes to step  307 . This READY line indicates whether or not the machine is under computer control. The machine timer is queried to see if it is negative  301 . If the machine timer is negative, indicating that the machine has exceeded the normal time limit for operation, subroutine ONLIN is called  302  to set the status of the machine accordingly. If the machine timer is not negative, control passes to step  303  where the FAIL flag is queried. If the FAIL fag contains a yes, control passes to step  305 . If not, the fail count is compared to the BUSY segment counter during step  304 . If they are equal, control passes to step  308 . If they are not equal, control passes to step  305 . Subroutine SGMNT is called during step  305  to process the segments of this machine and subroutine STEPR is called  306  on return from subroutine SGMNT. Control returns to step  300  until all machines in the module are finished. Then the program exits  306 A by returning to the caller. At step  307 , a machine timer is queried to determine whether it is negative. If it is negative, control passes to step  310 . If it is not negative, control passes to step  308 , where subroutine OFLIN is called to set the machine off-line. Then control passes to step  309  where subroutine FXSFB is called to set the software flag base register for the next machine and control passes to step  306 . At step  310  the IMAGE flag is set to 1 and the timer is compared  311  to the maximum negative number, −32768. If they are equal, control passes to step  313 ; if not, control passes to step  312 , where the timer is decremented and control goes to step  313 . At step  313 , the timer is compared to a value of one minute. If it has been a minute since the machine went off-line, the answer is yes, and control passes to step  314 . Subroutine RELOD is called to reinitialize the machine to empty and Cold Start condition. Then control passes to step  309 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5M (including FIG.  5 M- 1 ), subroutine SGMNT is described. On entry, subroutine SGTKA is called  315  to monitor the segments downstream gate. Then the segment timer is queried  316  for a negative value. If it is negative, control passes to step  317  where the IMAGE flag is set to 1 and control then passes to step  343 . If the segment timer is not negative, control passes to step  318  where the segmented monitor is decremented and compared  319  to preset limits. If the number is out of the present limits, control passes to step  319   a  where the timer is set to −1, FAIL count is incremented, IMAGE value is set to 1 and the message is sent that the segment failed. Control passes to step  343 . If the monitor is within limits, the timer is compared  320  to a value of zero. If it is equal to zero, control passes to step  323 ; if not, control passes to step  343 . At step  323  the image value is tested for a positive value. If it is positive, control passes to step  324  where the image bit flag IMAGF is set on and control goes to step  326 . If IMAGE is not positive, control passes to step  325  where the image bit flag IMAGF is set off and control goes to step  326 . At step  326 , the monitor for the segment is set to zero. The timer is set to 31 1  327 , the temporary value TEMP 1  is set to the event and the event counter is loaded  328  from location TEMP 1 . The global address data word is tested  329  for a positive value. If it is positive, control passes to step  330 , and an indirect branch is taken into the appropriate global subroutine  330 . If the global address word is not positive, control passes to step  331  labeled MODCM which is also the return point for MODE  1  subroutines into this program. The mask for interrupt levels is set to indicate the lockout trap active  331  and a change mode instruction is executed  332  carrying control to the appropriate procedure for execution. Upon return from MODE  2 , the event counter is saved  333  and control passes to step  334  which is labeled MDKM 1  and is the unfinished MODE  1  subroutine return point. The original mask is restored and control passes to step  335  labeled MDKM 2  which is the operation complete return for global subroutines. The machine timer is tested for zero  335 . If the timer is equal to zero, control passes back to step  327 ; if not, a machine timer is tested  336  for a positive value. If the machine timer is a positive value, control passes to step  338 . If the machine timer is not positive, the machine timer is set to zero  337  and control passes to step  338 . A segment timer is set to equal the machine timer  338  and the machine monitor is tested for zero  339 . If the machine monitor is equal to zero, control passes to step  343 ; if not, the segment monitor is tested  340  for a minus. If not a minus, control passes to step  342 . If it is a minus, subroutine MSOOO is called  341  to send a message that a “segment overran”. Control passes to step  342  where the machine monitor is stored in the segment monitor. Subroutine SGTRK is called  343  to monitor the segment performance. A segment number is decremented  344  and tested for zero  345 . If it is equal to zero, control returns to the caller  348 ; if not, the registers are pointed to the next upstream segment flags  346  and control returns to step  315 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5N (including FIG. 5N-1) subroutine SGTRK, which is the segment tracking subroutine or segment performance monitor, is described. On story to subroutine SGTRK the TRANSPORTING bit flag is tested  348 . If the flag is equal to “yes”, control passes to step  349 . If it is equal to “no”, control passes to step  359 . At step  349 , the segment transport time is incremented and the gate is tested to determine if it is open  350 . If it is open, control passes to step  357 ; if it is closed, the A memory bit AMEM is tested for an “on” condition at step  351 . If it is “off”, control passes to step  353 ; if it is “on”, control passes to step  352  where a process bit flag PRCSS is turned on and control passes to step  353  where the transport bit flag TRANS is set off. The accumulator register is set to the value in the TWAVG register. Subroutine UPDAT is called  354  to calculate the average transport time and the average transport time is returned in the accumulator register. The accumulator is stored in data word TWAVG  355  and word NWVAL is set to zero  356  or a new accumulation. The restart bit RSTRT is set off  357  and control returns to the caller. At step  359 , the process bit flag PRCSS is queried for an “off” condition. If it is in the “off” condition, control passes to step  362 . If it is in the “on” condition, control passes to  360  where the wait bit is tested for an “off” condition. If it is in the “off” condition, control passes to step  373  if not, an indirect branch is executed  361  on the RUN flag contents and control passes to step  357  or  370  or  357  or  370 , depending on the numerical value of the RUN flag  0 - 3 . At step  362 , a data word NWVAL is incremented and GATEB is tested for an “open” condition  363 . If it is “closed”, control passes to step  364 . If it is “open”, control passes to step  365  where GATEC is tested for a “closed” condition. If GATEC is “closed”, control passes to step  357 ; if GATEC is “open”, control passes to step  366 , where the WAIT bit is tested for the “on” condition and control passes to step  367 . At step  364 , the transport bit TRANS is tested for an “off” condition  365 . At step  367 , the process bit PRCSS is set to the “off” condition and the data word PWAVG is set in the accumulator register. Subroutine UPDAT is called  368  to calculate the average process time which is returned in the accumulator register. The accumulator is stored in data word PWAVG, and word NWVAL is set to zero  369 . Control then passes to step  357 . At step  370 , GATEC is tested for an “open” condition. If GATEC is “open”, control passes to step  357 ; if GATEC is “closed”, the WAIT bit is set to “off”  371  and GATED is queried for the “closed” condition  372 . If GATED is “closed”, control passes to step  357 . If GATED is “open”, the A memory bit AMEN is tested to determine if it is in the “on” condition  373 . If “on”, control passes to step  357 ; if “off”, GATEA is queried for an “open” condition  374 . If GATEA is “open”, control passes to step  357 ; if not, GATEB is queried for a “closed” condition  375 . If GATEB is “closed”, control passes to step  357 ; if not, the transport bit TRANS is set “on” and the NWVAL data word is set  376  to zero and control passes to step  377 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5O, the subroutine SGTKA is represented. GATEC is queried for a “closed” condition  380 . If it is “closed”, control passes to step  381  where CMEM is tested for an “on” condition and control passes to step  383 . If GATEC is “open”, C memory bit CMEM is set “off”  382  and control passes to step  383 , where control returns to the calling program. Subroutine UPDAT on entry computes the rolling weighted average of the number in the accumulator register seven combined with the data word NWVAL and leaves the results in register seven  384 . Then control returns to the caller  385 . Subroutine FXFSB sets the software flag base register for a particular segment. On entry, subroutine SGTRK is called  386  to monitor the performance of the segment. A segment number is decremented  387  and tested for a zero condition  388 . If it is equal to zero, control passes to the caller  390 ; if not, the SGB register is pointed to the next segment  390  and control returns to step  386 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5P, subroutine ONLIN is illustrated. On entry to this subroutine, MSIOO is called  400  to send the message to restart the machine. Control passes to step  402 . On entry to a secondary entry point ONLNA, the return address is fixed up, step  401  and control passes to step  402  where the operate bit OPER is set “on”. This is a CRU output and is a command to the machine. The READY line is sensed for on  403 . If it is “on”, control passes to step  407 . If the READY line is “off”, subroutine MSIOO is called  404  to send the message “machine did not start”. Subroutine OFLIN is called  405  to remove the machine from service, set its pointers appropriately, set its data appropriately, and declare the machine operative. Control returns to the caller program  406 . At step  407 , a register is sued or saved and the machine FIAL COUNT, TIMER and RUN flag are initialized and Register Six is set to contain the number of segments for the machine. Then a segment timer is set to zero; the segment monitor is set for five seconds; the restart bit RSTRT is set “on” and the SFB is pointed to the next segment  409 . The number of segments is decremented until all segments are processes. The control returns to step  409 . When all segments in the machine have been examined, the registers are restored  411  and control returns to the caller program  412 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5Q (including FIG. 5Q-1 and  5 Q- 3 ) subroutine OFLIN is described. On entry, subroutine MSIOO is called  415  to send the message “Machine is off line”. Then the operate output line is set to the “off” condition to disconnect the machine from computer control; the machine&#39;s timer is set to −1 and the image is set  416  to −1. Control returns to the calling program  417 . 
     Referring to FIG. 5R, subroutine RELOD is described. On entry, subroutine MSIOO is called  420  to send the message “machine loaded” and control passes to step  422 . A secondary entry point, RELDA on entry the return address is set  421  and control passes to ste 1   422  where the data word indicating abnormal neighbor is queried. If the machine has an abnormal neighbor indicated by a non zero data word, control passes to step  423 . If the data word is zero, indicating that there is not abnormal neighbor, control passes to step  425 . At step  423  a data word is queried to see if it is an abnormal successor or predecessor. If it is not an abnormal successor, control passes to step  425 . If it is an abnormal successor, control passes to step  424  where a flag address of the successor is calculated and stored in data word THERE. Control passes to step  425  where GATED is “closed”. Then, the busy data word BUSY is set  426  to equal the number of segments. A loop counter is established in Register Zero. Register Six is pointed to the procedure and the software flag address is saved  426 . At step  427 , the segment starting address is set into the EVENT word. The global address GLADR is set to 0. The global place GLPA is set to 0. Gate B is “closed”. GATE C is “closed”, transport flag TRANS is set to the “off” condition, process bit flag PRESS is set to the “off” condition, the wait flag WAIT is set to the “off” condition and the flag address for the next segment is decremented. Register Zero is incremented  428  and tested for a positive value  429 . If it is not a positive value, control returns to step  427  for the next segment. If it is a positive value, control passes to step  430  where the SFB resister is restored. All outputs to this machine are turned “off” and control returns  431  to the caller. 
     Referring to FIG. 5S (including FIG. 5S-1) subroutines set register SETRG and step register STEPR are described. On entry into subroutine SETRG the data address register is set; the machine number and the software flag base register are set one higher than required  435 , subroutine STEPR is called  436  to point the registers to the appropriate machine. On return, control is returned to the caller  437 . On entry to subroutine STEPR, the machine number is decremented  440  and queried for zero  441 . If it is equal to zero, control returns to the finished exit  422  which is the all machines serviced exit. If the machine number is not zero, control passes to step  443  where Registers  1 ,  2 , and  3  are set. At step  444 , the SFB, CRB, MPB, MDB registers are set for this machine. The segment number is set to the number of segments for the machine. Then, control is returned to the not finished exit  445  which means there are more machines to be processed. 
     MODULE CONTROL FlAGS 
     To provide operator control of the assembly line modules, recognition of machine states is provided. The states are indicated by condition flag words as shown in TABLE IXa. A pushbutton box connected to the CRU of the 2540M computer is monitored by program MANEA. A command flag COMFG is set to correspond to the appropriate button whenever it is pushed. Command to change state are recognized as shown in TABLE IXb. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE IXa 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 OFFLINE (all machines) 
                 CONDF = 0 
               
               
                   
                 STARTED (all machines) 
                 CONDF = 1 
               
               
                   
                 STOPPED (all machines) 
                 CONDF = 2 
               
               
                   
                 EMPTYING (all machines) 
                 CONDF = 3 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE IXb 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 As Indicated 
                 Module/Machine Service 
               
               
                 COMMAND 
                 Command Flag 
                 Acknowledgement 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 NO COMMAND 
                 COMFG = 0 
                   
               
               
                 START MODULE 
                 COMFG = 1 
                 COMFG = 0, CONDF = 1 
               
               
                 STOP MODULE 
                 COMFG = 2 
                 COMFG = 0, CONDF = 2 
               
               
                 EMPTY MODULE 
                 COMFG = 3 
                 COMFG = 0, CONDF = 3 
               
               
                 EMERGENCY STOP 
                 COMFG = 4 
                 COMFG = 0, CONDF = 0 
               
               
                 STATUS REQUEST 
                 COMFG = 5 
                 COMFG = 0 
               
               
                 TURN TRACKING ON 
                 COMFG = 6 
                 COMFG = 0 
               
               
                 TURN TRACKING OFF 
                 COMFG = 7 
                 COMFG = 0 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The command flag COMFG and condition flag CONDF are in the FIXED TABLE in the 2540M computer and are manually changed through the programmer&#39;s console. A module is switchable to any state except when the module is OFFLINE; then, only START, EMERGENCY STOP, and STATUS REQUEST COMMANDS are utilized. 
     MODULE/MACHINE SERVICE 
     The Module/Machine Service program is an interrupt response program. It is assigned to an interrupt level in the 2540M computer to which an interval timer is connected. The timer is loaded initially with a value by an instruction in the Cold Start program. When the value is decremented to zero, an interrupt stimulus is energized in the computer. If the level is unmasked (armed), the interrupt is honored, and reset, by execution of an instruction in a particular memory location. An XSW (Exchange Status Word) instruction is used to save the current program counter, status of various indicators, and insert a new program counter value and interrupt status mask. The new program counter value is the entry address of the Module/Machine Service program. The timer is then reloaded for the next interval. 
     The program searches the machine header list for each module connected to it and services those machines which require servicing. Normally servicing is competed, and control returns to the program which was interrupted (usually program MANEA) until the remainder of the interval passes. 
     To detect the abnormal case (LOCKOUT) where the amount of work required for servicing is longer than the interval, a special subroutine is employed. The interrupt entry address is changed to cause entry and execution of the special subroutine when the Module/Machine Service program is entered. Just prior to exit, the address is restored to cause entry to the Module/Machine Service program proper. In the abnormal case, the special subroutine is entered with registers pointing to the machine being serviced. This machine is disabled and declared inoperative. Servicing then resumes. 
     MAINLINE PROGRAM MANEA 
     Functions performed by the Mainline Program called MANEA are: communication with the general purpose host computer; inputs from the host computer are in the form of display data where the display is a particular machine and patches which affect a configuration or operation of a module by changing the data for a certain machine or machines. Another function of MANEA is J-BOX control of a module, or pushbutton box control for such operations as START, STOP, STATUS REQUEST, EMPTY and EMERGENCY STOP. 
     MANEA operates in a fully masked mode during all of its cyclic execution except about six instructions, where interrupts are allowed according to the system mask. It should be noted that both entries to the message handler portion of MANEA, MSOOO AND MSIOO provide interrupt protection by disarming all levels. Because MANEA executes on the mainline, it does not maintain the integrity of any of the registers it uses. On the other hand, MSOOO and MSIOO do maintain the integrity of all registers they use, since they execute at times as subroutine extensions of various interrupt levels. MANEA handles incoming line functions such as patches or display data subroutines. It also provides the mechanics for readying messages for output to the general purpose host computer or optionally to a teletype. Once during each thousand passes through MANEA, the CRU is strobed for inputs calling for START, STOP, STATUS REQUEST, EMERGENCY STOP or EMPTY action on the module. MANEA currently looks at CRU addresses  03 C 0  through  03 D 8  and interprets these findings as requests regarding the five possible modules represented in these CRU addresses. Findings are passed to Module Service program through a command flag COMFG for each module to inform Module Service program of the request. COMFG is set as indicated in TABLE IXb. 
     Response messages are sent back to the general purpose host computer on each request. The module number is tacked on to any such messages. 
     Buffer OTBUF is the focal point of message traffic from the 2540M computer to the general purpose host computer. A second buffer OTBF 2  is managed primarily by the Message Handler MSIOO and MSOOO entry points. A call to the Message Handler results in a message being inserted into buffer OTBF 2 . The contents of OTBF 2  are then moved into buffer OTBUF by MANEA. Buffer OTBUF is polled in the present embodiment by the host computer once a second. Buffer INBUF is used for messages from the host computer to the 2540M computer. 
     Each of the buffers utilized is 200 words in length. This length is controlled by the term CMLGH in the MODE  1  system symbol table for segmented operation. Buffers INBUF and OUTBUF contain as the first word a check sum, as the second word a word count, and then the remainder of the buffer words contain data. The check sum is computed as the sum, with overflow discarded, of all input data words and the word count. A checksum word is compared on transmissions against the value set from the host computer, or in the host computer, against the value sent from the 2540M computer. The word count word is a count of all the data words in the buffer. Buffer OTBF 2  uses its first word as a pointer and the remainder for data. The first word or pointer points to the next available location into which MSOOO or MSIOO may insert messages. 
     DISCUSSION OF THE FLOW CHARTS FOR MANEA AND SUBROUTINES 
     Referring to FIG. 6A, program MANEA is entered and all interrupt levels are masked  500 . The input buffer word count is looked at  501  to determine presence of input commands. If it is non-zero, INBUF is tested for BUSY  502 . A checksum check is made  503 , and if it matches the host generated checksum,  504  the validity of the message is tested  506 . If validity is established, a branch to the appropriate routine  501  to handle the input message is taken. If the checksum is bad, the entire buffer of input messages is discarded. In this case, the checksum error message is sent back to the host computer  505  and control passes to step  520 . If an invalid message is input  506 , it is ignored but it is sent back to the host computer for printout  508 . Remaining messages in INBUF are processed  510  in spite of the invalid one. Then the total counter TOTAL  511  is reset to zero. 
     Referring to FIG. 6B, the INBUF word count word is set to zero  512 . A check is made to see if the host has polled the output buffer OTBUF  513 ; if not, control passes to  510 . If the busy flag OBUSY is active  514  or if OTBF 2  is empty  515 , control passes to step  510 . If the output buffer is not busy and OTBF 2  is not empty, data is transferred from OTBF 2  into OTBUF  516 . The checksum is computed on the buffer contents  517 ; the checksum and word count are placed in OTBUF  518 . The next available location pointer of OTBF 2  is reset  519  to indicate empty. Control passes to step  510 . 
     Referring to FIG. 6C (including FIG.  6 C- 1 ), a counter CNTRZ is incremented  521  once per pass through MANEA until  520  in the present embodiment it reaches 1,000. Then it is set to zero  522  and the MDB and CRB registers are set  523 . Pushbutton control box or J-BOX for the first module is set  524  at  03 C 0 . A counter is initialized to point to the first module  525 . The J-BOX for that module is read  526 . If the START button was pushed  527 , subroutine MSG 4 X is called  528  and control passes to step  537 . If the STOP button was pushed  529 , subroutine MSG 5 X is called  530  and control passes to step  537 . If the STATUS REQUEST button was pushed  531 , subroutine MSG 8 X is called  532  and control passes to step  537 . If the EMERGENCY STOP button was pushed  533 , subroutine MSG 7 X is called  534  and control passes to step  537 . If the EMPTY pushbutton was pushed  535 , subroutine MSG 6 X is called  536  and control passes to step  537 . At step  537 , a counter is tested to see if each module&#39;s pushbutton box has been examined. If the counter is greater than or equal to five, control passes to step  512 . If not, the counter is incremented  538  the CRU address is incremented to the next module&#39;s J-BOX  539  and control passes to step  526 . 
     Referring to FIG. 6D, subroutine MSG 4 X is described. On entry, the command is acknowledged by sending message “start feeding workpieces” to the host  550  and the flag STRT 2  is queried  551 . IF the flag is zero, control passes to step  553 . If the flag is not zero, control passes to step  552  where the STRT 2  is set to zero and the command flag COMFG is set  555  to 1. At step  553 , the question is asked “Is the module already running?”. If not, control passes to step  555 . If so, the message “module already running” is sent back to the host computer  554  and control passes to step  556 , where control returns to the caller. 
     Referring to FIG. 6E, subroutine MSG 5 X is described which responds to STOP command. On entry, the command is acknowledged by the message “Stop feeding workpieces” sent to the host. The module is tested for offline status  561 . If the module is not offline, control passes to step  563 . If it is already online, control passes to step  562  where the message “module offline” is returned to the host and control passes to step  566 . At step  563 , if the module is already stopped, the message “module already stopped” is returned to the host computer  564  and control passes to step  566  or if the module is not already stopped, a command flag is set to 2 to Command Module Service to stop feeding workpieces  565 . At step  566  control is returned to the caller. 
     Referring to FIG. 6F subroutine MSG 6 X is described which is called to empty a module. On entry, the command is acknowledged by the message “Empty Module” being returned to the host  570 . The module is queried for offline  571 . If it is not offline, control passes to  573 . If it is already offline, the message “Module Offline” is returned to the host computer  572  and control passes to step  576 . At step  573 , if the module is already emptying, the message “Module Already Emptying” is returned to the host computer  574  and control passes to step  576 . If the module is not already emptying, the command flag is set to 3 to tell Module Service to empty the module  575 . At step  576 , control returns to the caller. 
     Referring to FIG. 6G, subroutine MSG 7 X is described, which responds to the EMERGENCY STOP command. On entry, the command is acknowledged by the message “Emergency Shutdown” going to the host computer  580  and the command flag set to 4 to tell Module Service to shut down the module  581 . Control is then returned to the caller  582 . 
     Referring to FIG. 6H subroutine MSG 8 X is described which responds to the STATUS CHECK command. On entry, the command is acknowledged by the message “Begin Status Check” going to the host computer  590  and the command flag is set to 5 to tell Module Service a status request has been entered  591 . Control returns to the caller at step  592 . 
     The message handler subroutines serve the purpose of picking up messages from a user on his request and inserting them into buffer OTBF 2 . Two entries are provided MSOOO and MSIoo to accommodate two different arguments. Subroutine call MSOOO is accompanied by three following arguments, the first of which is the code number for the message type code and word count of the message; subsequent arguments depend on the message type. The other entry, MSIOO is provided for the case where one argument follows the call to the subroutine which points to the address where the message is described with the same three segments; that is, a message type and word count argument and other arguments depending on the type of message. To distinguish between messages from normal users and messages in relation to the pushbutton J-BOX control, an alternate mode of calling the subroutine is provided. Calls from within the MANEA program itself relating to a J-BOX command acknowledgment use a BLM instruction with an R field of one and an immediate address of MSOOO entry point. The R field of one distinguishes between those messages related to J-BOX and if this field is zero, as in a normal call, the messages are sensed to be from a normal user. 
     Referring to FIG. 6L, the message handler subroutine is described. On entry through entry point MSIOO, an indicator is set  600  at location SCRAT+2. Control passes to the same point as the entry from MSOOO where registers  0 ,  1  and  2  are saved  601 . Then the argument is tested  602  to see if the call is from a J-BOX. If so, register  2  contains the module number for this message and is saved as the first argument  604 . Control then goes to step  605 . If the call is not from a J-BOX  602 , the contents of word MODNO set by Module Service are set as the first argument of the message  603 . Outbuffer OTBF 2  is tested  605  to see if there is room for the message. If not, then the message is ignored and control passes to step  608 . If there is room in the buffer, the message is moved into OTBF 2   606  and the next available location pointer is moved to accommodate the message  607 . At step  608 , the indicator at location SCRAT+2 is tested. If the indicator is zero, the buffer word count is tested  611  to determine if it is even or odd. If it is even, the return address is incremented by the word count of the message so that return to the caller may be set appropriately. If the word count is odd  611 , the return pointer is incremented by the word count of the message and one more  613 . Control then passes to step  614 . If the indicator was not zero  608 , the return address is incremented by 2  609  and the indicator at location SCRAT+2 is set to zero  610 . Control goes to step  614  where registers  0 ,  1  and  2  are restored and control returns to the caller  615 . 
     MESSAGES FROM THE GENERAL PURPOSE HOST COMPUTER 
     In the present embodiment there are two messages recognized by the program MANEA. These are display and patch. The display message refers to data which is to be displayed on a particular device. The patch message refers to one or more sets of input data for machines in a module. In both cases, the current input data block for the machine or machines is overlaid with the new data. As a result, the next execution of the machine&#39;s data contains new information. 
     Referring to FIG. 6I, subroutine DSPEC is described. This subroutine is called to respond to display message. On entry, registers  0 ,  1  and  3  are set to arguments needed  650 . The starting location for the machine&#39;s MDATA is computed  651 . The region of the MDATA to be overlaid is computed and data moved from the message to the machine&#39;s MDATA area  652 . Control then returns to MANEA. 
     Referring to FIG. 6J subroutine PATCH responds to patch messages. On entry, the message word count and module number are saved  660 . The accumulated word count variable ACUWC is set to zero  661 . Register  3  is pointed to the first word in the message  662 . Register zero is set to the machine&#39;s header array  663 . The starting location of the machine&#39;s MDATA is computed  664 . A start of the overlay is computed  665 . PATCH data is moved from the INBUF message into the MDATA overlay area  666  and the question is asked “Does this machine have an abnormal neighbor?”  667 . If not, control passes to step  673 . If it does have an abnormal neighbor, the pointer to this machine&#39;s header is saved  668 . 
     Referring to FIG. 6K, the abnormal successors for this machine are set to indicate empty commands  669 . The abnormal predecessors of the machine are set to go to shutdown  670 . The current active predecessor is determined and its run flag set  671  to 1. The current active successor&#39;s run flag is set  672  to 1. When all blocks of data in the message area have been moved into their respective machine&#39;s MDATA  673 , control passes to step  675 . If any data blocks remain in the message, register  3  is pointed to the next machine number  674  and control returns to step  663 . At step  675 , if any machines with abnormal neighbors were involved, the run flags for all predecessor and successor machines are set back to 1  676  and control then returns to MANEA. 
     The purpose of LEVEL 1 , LEVEL 3  and LEVEL 4  (the communication package) is to provide communication between the host and a 2540 on a cycle steal basis. This exchange of data is of course handled through the REMOTE COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER in a manner which minimizes interference with 2540 process programs. 
     The basic philosophy of communications is that the 2540 acts in response to requests from the 1800. Communications does not initiate with the 2540. 
     The three interrupt routines of the communications package work together in transferring data between 2540 and host. As a result, there is heavy dependence of each one on the others. This interface between LEVL 1 , LEVL 3 , and LEVL 4  is carried out through four flags: TOC, FLAGX, LWCOM, and FLAGY. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 FLAGX 
                 1800/2540 - data - transfer - started 
               
               
                   
                   
                 flag 
               
               
                   
                 FLAGY 
                 1800/2540 - data - transfer - complete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 flag 
               
               
                   
                 LWCOM 
                 list - word - overlay - complete flag 
               
               
                   
                 TOC 
                 1800/2540 - data - transfer - timeout 
               
               
                   
                   
                 counter 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Because parity checking is not done between the RCIU (REMOTE COMPUTER INTERFACE UNIT) and the 2540, a parity check is run on the list words. Odd parity is maintained. 
     Due to the requirements of the RCCA all data transfers are done in burst mode. 
     Superimposed list word information is shown in TABLE Xa. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE Xa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Parity is generated and inserted into bit zero of both words by the host. 
     Bit  1  of location  21  is used to inform the 2540 whether the transfer is a read or write. 
     1=READ 
     0=WRITE 
     Bit  2  of location  21  is used to inform the AUTONOMOUS TRANSFER CONTROLLER (ATC) of the mode of the transfer. This bit is put in by 2540 and is set for burst mode. 
     1=BURST MODE 
     0=WORD MODE 
     CRU interrupt status card (starting address of  03 F 0 ) is used with LEVL 1  to permit masking and status saving on the associated interrupt level. This is shown in TABLE Xb. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE Xb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Bits  0  is used for the ATC COMPLETE interrupt. 
     ILSW 1  refers to bits  0  through  3  of the above card. 
     The first 8 bits on the card are masked by the second 8 bits. 
     For LEVEL 1  only bits  0  and  8  are utilized. 
     ILSW 2  refers to bits  8  through  10 . 
     The bits are sensed and reset by LEVL 1 . 
     LEVL 1 —LEVEL ONE INTERRUPT ROUTINE 
     LEVL 1  serves the basic function of determining when list word transfer is complete, and also to determine when the subsequent data transfer is complete. The method comprises saying that the first level one ATC channel interrupt after activating channel  7  indicates completion of list word transfer; and the second such interrupt means the data transfer is complete. 
     Referring to FIG. 7A, execution starts at LEVL 1  where register  0 , the MDB, and the CRB are saved  700 . The MDB and CRB are saved off because LEVL 1  executes INPUT FIELD and OUTPUT FIELD instructions. To further comply with the needs of INPF and OUTPF instructions the MDR is set equal to the starting location of LEVL 1 , and the CRB is set to zero  702 . 
     An interrupt status card for LEVL 1  is read into memory  703 . 
     A test is made to see if the ATC caused the interrupt  704 . If so, the ATC TRANSFER COMPLETE STATUS REGISTER is looked at  765  to determine if the interrupt was due to channel  7  ATC complete  706 . 
     If the ATC complete interrupt was not due to channel  7 , or the ATC did not cause the interrupt, execution proceeds to step  711  where preparation is made to return control to the mainline. 
     After transfer of list words FLAGX should be zero  707 . LWCOM would be set non-zero to indicate completion of list word transfer  710 . LWCOM tells level  3  of the arrival of list words. 
     At the start of data transfer (other than list words) FLAGX is set to a one by LEVL 3 . Hence, on completion of transfer  707 , FLAGY is set to one  708 , indicating completion of LEVL 3 . 
     NBUSY or OBUSY was set to the starting I/O address by LEVL 3 . These are intended for use by MANEA, and are non-zero only during actual transfer interval. It is here in LEVL 1  that they are reset to zero  709 . 
     At ATCRN register  0 , MDB, CRB and interrupt mask are restored to their value before LEVL 1  execution  711 . Control returns to the interrupted program (usually MANEA)  712 . 
     It should be noted that FLAGX, FLAGY, and LWCOM are zeroed by LEVL 4  on the initial response to an interrupt from the 1800 general purpose computer. 
     LEVL 4   
     LEVL 4  provides the initial response to an interrupt from the host. Its purpose is to initialize list words, initialize communication package interface flags, and to handle interface with RCCA to affect list word transfer. 
     When the host wants to talk to a 2540 it sets a bit in the REMOTE INTERRUPT REGISTER in the RCCA. This results in an interrupt on interrupt level  4 . 
     Referring to FIG. 7B, on entry register  0  is saved  715 . A test is made to determine the state of channel  7   716 . If it is active, it is shut off  717 . 
     The RIR bit is reset by issuing an INPUT ACKNOWLEDGE  719 . 
     Communication interface flags LWCOM, FLAGX, FLAGY, and TOC are zeroed here before start of data transfers  720 . 
     Because of constraints imposed by hardware mechanization of the external function with force, location  21  is set to 2  721  before the interrupt response is sent back to the host  722 . 
     The list words are set up  723 . Location  21  indicates two word transfer (list words) in the burst mode. 
     Because EXTERNAL FUNCTION WITH FORCE and channel  7  activities utilize common hardware, it is necessary to check for completion of EXTERNAL FUNCTION  724  before activating channel  7   725 . Control returns to the interrupted program  726 . 
     LEVL 3   
     LEVL 3  serves several functions for 1800/2540 communications. 
     1. Activate channel  7  for read or write. 
     2. Check list words for odd parity. 
     3. Deactivate channel  7  in case a transfer is not complete within 4.2 seconds. 
     4. Pass I/O address to MANEA. 
     LEVL 3  is run off the REAL TIME CLOCK which ticks at two milliseconds intervals. 
     Under quiescent conditions between communications transfers LWCOM, FLAGX, and FLAGY would be non-zero. 
     During a transfer of data the program tests list word complete. After list word overlay is complete, as indicated by LWCOM being set non-zero by LEVL 1 , execution proceeds to parity check. If list word parity is odd, the burst mode bit is OR&#39;ed into the address list word. A one bit indicates read. (Date to the 1800). 
     For read the I/O starting address is put into OBUSY; for write, into NBUSY. Then channel  7  is activated. 
     FLAGX is set to 1 to indicate the start of data transfer, and to tell LEVL 1  to interpret the next level  1  interrupt as completion of data transfer. 
     The time out function gives the transfer a total of 4.2 seconds to complete. Time starts on first pass through LEVEL 3  after channel  7  is activated for list word overlay, and continues until transfer is complete or 4.2 second limit is reached. 
     Referring to FIG. 7C, on entry to subroutine LEVL 3 , registers  0 ,  1  and  2  are saved  730 . List word overlay complete is tested  731 . If not complete, the time out counter TOC is incremented  736  and compared to a time interval of 4.2 seconds  737 . If the time counter is less than the maximum time allowed (4.2 seconds) control passes to step  741 . If it is more than allowed, control passes to step  738 . When list word overlay is complete  731 , the flag x word FLAGX is queried to see if transfer has already started  732 . If it has, transfer passes to step  740 . If not, control passes to step  733  where a parity of words is checked. If parity is bad or wrong, control passes to step  741 . If parity is correct, a burst mode bit is inserted into the word count list word  734  and the 1800 read or write indicator is queried  735 . If the function is read, control passes to step  742 . If the function is write, control passes to step  745 . 
     Referring to FIG. 7D (including FIG. 7D-1 and  7 D- 2 ) a shutdown or abortion of the transfer is performed by forcing a non-burst mode  738 , deactivated channel  7   739  and proceeding to exit at step  741 . If the transfer has been started, a transfer check is made or data transfer complete text is made at step  740 . Data transfer incomplete passes control to step  736 . When data transfer is complete, control passes to step  741  where registers  0 ,  1  and  2  are restored and the program exits at step  748 . 
     Referring to FIGS.  7 E and  7 E- 1 , a read function is accomplished by placing the start address of the output transfer into word OBUSY  742 . Channel  7  is activated  743  and FLAGX set to 1,  744 . Control passes to step  741  for exit. The write function is accomplished by placing the start address of the input transfer into NBUSY  745 . The Channel  7  is activated for transfer  746  and FLAGX is set to 1,  747 . Control is passed to step  741  for exit. 
     THE COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM 
     The first part of the following sections describes the total computer control system and identifies each major component. It describes the major components of software and shows how these components fit together to serve the purposes of the total system. On completion of this portion of the document, the reader should have a thorough understanding of the total system, the major equipment components comprising it, the functional software program components which are used to operate the system, the purpose and method of use of each component, and some insight into the job of operating the total system. 
     The remaining sections are devoted to detailed descriptions, including logical flow charts (a widely accepted method for describing programs) of all the programs and subroutines which comprise the software for this control system. These sections are organized by category where the categories represent system functions, as described in the first part of the following sections. 
     The COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM is the worker and host computers, together with all of the software programs which help make the worker computers control modules. The primary purpose of the worker computers is to control the individual machines which make up the modules, and also to control the module. 
     The primary purpose of the host computer is to build “core loads” for the worker computers. “Core load” has two meanings. Related to the worker computers, a core load means an image of the memory contents (instructions and data) containing all the programs needed to operate the worker computer, the module machines attached to it, and any attached peripherals (communication with the host is in this category). 
     A secondary purpose of the host computer is to allow communication of all of the computers with each other. The communication takes two forms: 
     (1) Starting a worker computer (loading its core load into it and beginning execution) is quickly and easily accomplished by having direct communication between the host and worker; and 
     (2) After the worker is loaded and in operation, messages keep the host informed of the status of every machine, every module, and workpiece movement throughout the assembly line. It can exercise “supervisory” control over the assembly line based on this information and pass any desired information back to the worker computers. 
     The COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM offers a good mix of practical features. Starting with the general purpose computer (in this embodiment, an IBM 1800) and an IBM supplied operating system (TSX) having a number of tested utility programs and testing features, support programs are described in the following sections. 
     The primary consideration in software design is the convenience of the system user. Fast response to changing requirements necessitated a modular and logical system which the user could be made to understand easily. 
     Program development time was compressed by careful planning, by an insistence on organizational simplicity, and by exacting test procedures. Usage of punched cards as the software development media proved very convenient and time-saving. 
     Features of the software implemented in the system are: 
     (1) Separation of instructions and data. This permits the process control requirements of the controlled machines to be parametrically and uniquely expressed via the one-to-one correspondence of data blocks and machines; and 
     (2) List control operations as the media for data structure definition and content manipulation. This makes it possible flexibly to define and manipulate lists relating the physical assembly line to the data required to operate each machine. 
     In accordance with the methods of the present invention, it becomes a simple matter to imitate in a software description the type and degree of organization of the assembly line. Imitation of the physical assembly line in software allows modification that is logically equivalent and therefore simple to understand and manipulate. 
     The user performs the following steps to bring a module under computer control: 
     Create data areas for storage of: 
     1. Each machine PROCEDURE 
     2. Each machine data block MDATA 
     3. Each machine INFO list 
     4. Each module configuration CONFIG 
     5. Each computer 
     6. Each supervisory program SUPR 
     I. Use MACLF program to create all files on 2311 disk and to store contents of INFO, CONFIG and COMPUTER list. Non-process job executed via control cards. 
     II. Use ASSEMBLER to store object modules for PROCEDURE and MDATA blocks and all SUPR supervisory programs, interrupt service subroutines and other general purpose subroutines. Non-process job executed via control cards. 
     III. Use CORE LOAD BUILDER to build the MODE  1  portion of a core load to be executed in a particular 2540 computer. The programs required are converted to absolute addressing if they are relocatable. Memory mapping and allocation are managed by the CORE LOAD BUILDER. Non-process job executed by control cards. 
     IV. Use the DATA BASE BUILDER to build the MODE  2  portion of a core load to be executed in a particular 2540 computer. Headers are created and initialized for all machines in each module controlled by that 2540 computer, and the required MDATA blocks and PROCEDUREs are included. Non-process job executed by control cards. 
     V. Use SEGMENTED CORE LOAD BUILDER to integrate the MODE  1  and MODE  2  portions into a single core load. Addresses required in machine headers are computed and stored in the headers. A few addresses required to link the MODE  1  and MODE  2  portions together are stored in a fixed table referenced by the supervisory MODE  1  programs. The resulting core load is fully initialized and ready for execution in a 2540 computer. It is saved on disk storage. Executed by console data switch entry and pushbutton interrupt or recognized by entry of keywords on typewriter. 
     VI. Load the 2540 computer. Use the 2540 segmented loader to load an operational 2540 computer. To be operational, the 2540 must be capable of communication with the host computer. The 2540 BOOTSTRAP LOADER must be executing, or normal communications programs from some previous core load. Executed by console data switch entry and pushbutton interrupt, or recognized by entry of keywords on typewriter. 
     An alternative method of loading is to punch cards with the core load contents from the 1800. The 2540 may be initialized with a card reader program, have a card reader attached to it, and the punched card deck read into its memory. Paper tape equipment is also available, and is, in fact, the medium for introducing the card reader program into the computer. 
     SOURCE LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION SET 
     SOURCE LANGUAGE is a set of computer instructions where the instruction as written down on the coding form is meaningful to the programmer and represents some specific action which he wishes the computer to take. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the instruction codes written by the programmer and the instructions executed by the machine  12 . 
     The lines of code written by the programmer fall into three major categories; comments, assembler directives, and instructions. 
     Comments—Any line of code with an asterisk in Column 1 is treated as a comment. Comments are used to improve legibility and clarity of the program as written. Comment lines are printed by the assembler but no further action is taken on them. 
     Assembler Directives—As assembler directive tells the assembler to take some specific action needful or helpful for the assembly process, but it does not result in a machine instruction. One example of an assembler directive is the “END” statement that informs the assembler that there are no more cards to be processed in a given assembly. Other examples will be given later. 
     Instructions—Instructions are those lines of code which result in a specific instruction for the computer to take some action. 
     CODING CONVENTIONS 
     In writing programs to be executed by the computer, certain conventions are established. Except for comment cards, which have any format past the required initial asterisk, each line of code contains four major fields; label field, operation code field, operand field, and comment field. 
     Label Field—The label field is optional. If there is no need for a particular statement to be labeled, the label field is left blank. If used, the label is left justified in the field and consists of any combination of from one to five letters and numerals, except that the first character must be a letter. A given label is used only once in a given assembly. Once a statement has been labeled, all references to that statement are made by name. For the ASSEMBLER, the label field starts in Column 1. 
     Operation Code Field—The op code field contains either an assembler directive or a machine instruction. It is a directive of “what to do”. Only a limited number of operation codes have been defined and only these predetermined codes are used. Any valid op code may be used as many times as necessary and, except for a few special cases, in any desired sequence. For the ASSEMBLER, the op code field starts in Column 10. 
     Operand Field—The operand field contains either the data to be acted upon or the location of the data to be acted upon. Where the label field and the op code field are restricted to a fixed syntax, a variable syntax is permitted in the operand field. There are 1, 2, 3 or 4 parts to this field or it is blank, depending on the op code. These four parts are delimited by parentheses or commas and, except in one special case, do not contain embedded blanks. For the ASSEMBLER, the operand field starts in Column 16. 
     Comment Field—Any unused part of the card up to Column 72 may be used for comments to aid in understanding of the program. At least one blank is used to separate the end of the operand field from the beginning of the comment field. The content of the comment field has no effect on the assembly. 
     CODING FORMS 
     No special coding forms are required, since the ASSEMBLER accepts free form inputs. For convenience, the following punched card format is used for both MODE  1  and MODE  2  programming: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Columns  1-5 
                 Label, if any 
               
               
                   
                 Columns  6-9 
                 Blank 
               
               
                   
                 Columns 10-14 
                 Mnemonic for instruction or assembler directive 
               
               
                   
                 Column  15 
                 Blank 
               
               
                   
                 Columns 16-72 
                 Variable field; operands separated by commas, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or in some cases, parentheses 
               
               
                   
                 Columns 35-72 
                 Comments field used extensively where variable 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field does not exceed Column 33 
               
               
                   
                 Columns 73-80 
                 Ignored by ASSEMBLER; may be used for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 sequencing or comments if desired. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     REPRESENTATION OF 2540 COMPUTER MEMORY LAYOUT 
     This representation depicts the memory layout of 2540 computers as implemented in the COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM. 
     Also indicated are the preparatory steps required to build and load such a 2540 computer for prestored programs on the host computer of the system. 
     This representation may be used as a guide to the operation of the computer in control of an assembly line module (or modules). 
     This representation is parametrically described in the symbol tables SGTAB (for MODE  1  supervisory programs, interrupt response, and special inclusion subroutines) and SGMD 2  (for MODE  2  procedures and MDATA blocks). In general, the programmer need not worry about specific address or bit assignments, as he may symbolically reference these values through use of the appropriate symbol table. 
     The 2540 COMPUTER MEMORY LAYOUT is summarized in TABLE XI. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XI 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     INTERRUPT LEVEL ASSIGNMENTS 
     The 2540 computers have 16 priority interrupt levels designated 0, 1, 2, . . . , 15, which reference core addresses 00000, 00002, 00004, . . . , 00030, respectively. The assignments in use in the described embodiment are shown in TABLE XII. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XII 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Interrupt Level 
                 Program Function 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                  0 
                 Power Failure 
               
               
                  1 
                 ATC Complete (any channel, 4-7) 
               
               
                  2 
                 Arithmetic Fault and Internal Errors 
               
               
                  3 
                 Real Time Clock (interval timer) 
               
               
                  4 
                 I/O Channel 7 - RCCA Communications Network 
               
               
                  5 
                 I/O Channel 6 - Unused 
               
               
                  6 
                 I/O Channel 5 - Unused 
               
               
                  7 
                 I/O Channel 4 - Card Reader (alternative initial 
               
               
                   
                 load) 
               
               
                  8 
                 Interval Timer 1 - Module/Machine Service 
               
               
                  9 
                 Interval Timer 2 - 1800-RCCA Polling 
               
               
                 10 
                 Interval Timer 3 - Workpiece Reader 
               
               
                 11 
                 Unused 
               
               
                 12 
                 Unused 
               
               
                 13 
                 Unused - Core Parity Failure 
               
               
                 14 
                 TTY Attention Alternative Alarm Message 
               
               
                 15 
                 TTY Data Transfer Complete Output 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     MODE  1  programs are generated for response to each of these interrupts. They are mentioned by name on control cards recognized by the CORE LOAD BUILDER; otherwise, they are not included in a core load. 
     PROGRAMMING THE 2540 COMPUTER 
     In the COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM, the emphasis is on speed of program development including program testing. This is facilitated by the use of punched cards as the program media by extensive use of de-bugging facilities and the program assembler and by extensive use of de-bugging facilities on the 2540 itself. 
     The design of the programming system and the modularity which is inherent in this design contributes to successful program development. Since it is easy to isolate functionally the requirements of control, it is possible to organize programs to imitate logically these functions. 
     The programmer&#39;s responsibility is to utilize the tools offered in this programming system to describe the functions required. 
     The tools available to the programmer are: 
     1. The instruction set implemented in the assembler. The instruction set may be grouped as follows: 
     a. Special Basic Instructions—This set includes the bit pushing and MODE  2  type instructions. It is used primarily for development of MODE  2  programs. 
     b. 2540 MODE  1  Instructions—In this group, the original unmodified 2540 computer instructions are employed and reflect the true architecture of the computer. These instructions supplement the special basic instructions which, in general, are executable in MODE  1 . This class of instructions is used primarily for development of supervisory programs in the 2540 computer. 
     c. 1800 Computer Instructions—For convenience in converting programs which are operational on the 1800, an extended set of mnemonics is available which imitate the 1800 computer architecture and instruction set. 
     d. Special Instruction Simulation—An important feature of the COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM is the ability to experimentally write and implement subroutines which imitate hardware instructions prior to implementation in hardware via a programmable ROM in the 2540 computer. A portion of core memory in the 2540 computer is set aside and dedicated as a branch table. Branch instructions in the branch table provide the link to the appropriate subroutine. Special mnemonics are defined as change mode instructions referencing locations in the branch table. 
     2. Definition of instruction sets. In the event that the programmer discovers a functional relationship not implemented in the instruction set, he may redefine the set to implement best the function he requires. 
     3. Multiple symbol tables. The ASSEMBLER may be used to support symbol tables tailored specifically to program requirements; for instance, the ASSEMBLER may be used to define a symbol table containing the special basic instruction set and those symbols required to describe workpiece transfer between segments and some special functions required to implement special features required by MODE  2  machine control procedures. 
     4. Assembler Pseudo-Instructions and Keywords—The ASSEMBLER itself recognizes a typical set of pseudo-instructions for definition of program constants, definition of entry points to subroutines, mode declaration statements, and the like. Also, a special group of keywords applicable and architecture of the 2540 computer are implemented in the assembler. 
     SPECIAL (BASIC) INSTRUCTIONS 
     The special group of instructions is described on the following pages. These instructions are valid in both MODE  1  and MODE  2  as given in TABLE XIII. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XIII 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 MNEMONIC 
                 MODE 1 
                 MODE 2 
                 DESCRIPTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 STOR 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Store MODE 2 Register 
               
               
                 LOAD 
                 X 
                   
                 Load MODE 2 Register 
               
               
                 JUMP 
                   
                 X 
                 Unconditional Jump 
               
               
                 SENSE 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Test Digital Input 
               
               
                 TURN 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Digital Output 
               
               
                 SET 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Set Software Flag 
               
               
                 SJNE 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Digital Input Compare/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Conditional Jump 
               
               
                 DIDO 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Digital Input Compare/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Conditional Digital Output 
               
               
                 TEST 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Test Software Flag 
               
               
                 WAIT 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Wait 
               
               
                 CHMD 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Change Mode 
               
               
                 COMP 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Compare Data 
               
               
                 TWTL 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Test Within 2 Limits 
               
               
                 TJNE 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Software Flag Compare/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Conditional Jump 
               
               
                 CHNG 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Change Memory Location 
               
               
                 INPF 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Input Fixed Number of Bits 
               
               
                 OUTPF 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Analog Output 
               
               
                 DELAY 
                   
                 X 
                 Time Delay (see CHNG 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 description) 
               
               
                 LDMP 
                 X 
                   
                 Load Memory Protect Register 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (see LOAD description) 
               
               
                 JUMPI 
                   
                 X 
                 Jump Indirect (see JUMP 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 description) 
               
               
                 INCR 
                 X 
                 X 
                 Increment Memory 
               
               
                 NOOP 
                   
                 X 
                 No Operation (see WAIT 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 description) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The basic set of special instructions may be expanded as desired. 
     The notation for the description of the special instruction executions is given in TABLE XIIIa. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XIIIa 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 MDB 
                 Machine Data Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 MPB 
                 Machine Procedure Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 CRB 
                 Communications Register Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 SFB 
                 Software Flags Base Register 
               
               
                   
                 EC 
                 Event Counter (MODE 2) 
               
               
                   
                 PC 
                 Program Counter (MODE 1) 
               
               
                   
                 CAR 
                 Communications Address Register 
               
               
                   
                 DIR 
                 Direction of I/O 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 - output from computer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 - input to computer 
               
               
                   
                 SC 
                 Sequential Bit Counter 
               
               
                   
                 SR 
                 Sequential Register 
               
               
                   
                 CDR 
                 Communications Data Register 
               
               
                   
                 R BP   
                 Bit Pushing Register (MODE 2) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     INSTRUCTION: STOR—Store Register, FIG.  8 A. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MODE 1 
                 MODE 2 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ((R BP ))→ ((N)) 
                 ((R BP )))→ ((N)) + (MDB)) 
               
               
                   
                 (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 (EC) + 2 (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     MODE  1   
     The contents of register R BP  is stored into memory location N. 
     MODE  2   
     The contents of register R BP  is stored into the memory location specified by (N)+(MDB). 
     In this mode, only the least significant 10 bits of N are utilized. 
     INSTRUCTION: LOAD—Load Register, FIG.  8 B. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MODE 1 
                   
               
               
                   
                 (P) = 0 
                 (P) = 1 
               
               
                   
                 ((N))→ ((R BP )) 
                 ((N)) → (MPR) 
               
               
                   
                 (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2 
               
               
                   
                 ((N) + (MDB)) → ((R BP )) 
               
               
                   
                 (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     MODE  1   
     When P=0, the contents of memory location N is loaded into the register specified by R BP . 
     When P=1, the contents of memory location N is loaded into the Memory Protect Register (MPR). 
     MODE  2   
     The contents of memory location (N)+(MDB) is loaded into the register specified by R BP . 
     In this mode only the 10 least significant bits of N are utilized. Either the program counter or the event counter is incremented by two, depending on the mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: JUMP—Unconditional Jump, FIG.  8 C. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MODE 1 
                 MODE 2 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (N) → (PC) 
                 T1 = 1 
                 T1 = 0 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (N) → (EC) 
                 ((N) + (MDB)) → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     MODE  1   
     Bits  16 - 31  of the instruction word are loaded into the program counter. 
     MODE  2   
     If(T 1 )=1 the contents of N field is loaded into the Event Counter. 
     If(T 1 )=0 the contents of the memory location specified by (N)+(MDB) is loaded into the Event Counter. 
     Special comment is required for JUMP and JUMP 1 ; the ASSEMBLER inserts (T 1 )=0 for the JUMP 1  and (T 1 )=1 for the JUMP instructions. 
     INSTRUCTION: SENSE—Test Digital Input, FIG.  8 D. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (M) + (CRB) → (CAR) 
                   
               
               
                   
                 1 → (DIR) 
               
               
                   
                 CRU DATA → (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 (T2) = (CDR) 
                 (T2) ≠ (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 4 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
                 MODE 2  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 → (MODE) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     The contents of the M field is added algebraically to the contents of the CRB to obtain the effective address of the communications register. An input digital data transfer is initiated (CRU DATA→(CDR)) and the contents of the CDR is compared with the contents of the T 2  field. When in MODE  1 , if the data are equal the program counter is incremented by two; if not equal, it is incremented by four. When in MODE  2 , if the data are equal the event counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the program counter is incremented by two and the operating mode switched to MODE  1 . 
     INSTRUCTION: TURN—Digital Output, FIG.  8 E. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (N) + (CRB) → (CAR) 
               
               
                   
                 (T1) → (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                 0 → (DIR) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     The contents of the N field is added algebraically to the contents of the CRB to obtain the effective address of the communications register. The CDR is loaded with the content of the T 1  field and an output digital data transfer is initiated. Either the program counter or the event counter is incremented by two, depending on the mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: SET—Set Software Flag, FIG.  8 F. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (T1) → ((N) + (SFB)) (B)   
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     The contents of the N field is added algebraically to the contents of the SFB to obtain the effective address of the memory word containing the bit to be altered. The contents of the T 1  field is stored into the memory word at the bit position specified by the contents of the B field, B=0000 indicating bit position ‘0’. Either the program counter or the event counter is incremented by two, depending on the mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: SJNE—Digital Input Comparison/Conditional Jump, FIG.  8 G. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (M) + (CRB) → (CAR) 
                   
               
               
                   
                 1 → (DIR) 
               
               
                   
                 CRU DATA → (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 (T2) = (CDR) 
                 (T2) ≠ (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 MODE 1  (N) → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
                 MODE 2  (N) → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     The contents of the M field is added algebraically to the contents of the CRB to obtain the effective address of the communications register. An input digital data transfer is initiated (CRU DATA→(CDR)) and the contents of the CDR is compared with the contents of the T 2  field. When in MODE  1 , if the data are equal the program counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the program counter is loaded with the contents of the N field. When in MODE  2 , if the data are equal the event counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the event counter is loaded with the contents of the N field. 
     INSTRUCTION: DIDO—Digital Input Comparison/Conditional Digital Output FIG.  8 H. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (M) + (CRB) → (CAR) 
                   
               
               
                   
                 1 → (DIR) 
               
               
                   
                 CRU DATA → (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 (T2) = (CDR) 
                 (T2) ≠ (CDR) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 (N) + (CRB) → (CAR) 
                 MODE 1 (PC) + 4 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 0 → (DIR) 
                 MODE 2 (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 (T1) → (CDR) 
                 1 → (MODE) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1 (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2 (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION: 
     The contents of the M field is added algebraically to the contents of the CRB to obtain the effective address of the communications register. An input digital data transfer is initiated (CRU DATA→(CDR)) and the contents of the CDR is compared with the contents of the T 2  field. When in MODE  1 , if the data are not equal the program counter is incremented by four; if equal, the CDR is loaded with the content of the T 1  field, an output digital data transfer to the communications register at the effective address specified by the N field and the CRB is initiated, and the program counter is incremented by two. When in MODE  2 , if the data are not equal the program counter is incremented by two and the operating mode switched to MODE  1 ; if equal, the above output digital data transfer is initiated and the event counter is incremented by two. 
     INSTRUCTION: TEST—Test Software Flag, FIG. 8I 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 ((M) + (SFB)) (B)  = (T2) 
                 ((M) + (SFB)) (B)  ≠ (T2) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 4 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
                 MODE 2  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 → (MODE) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The contents of the M field is added algebraically to the contents of the SFB to obtain the effective address of the memory word containing the bit to be tested. The contents of the T2 field is compared with the contents of the memory word at the bit position specified by the contents of the B field, =0000 indicating bit position ‘0’. When in MODE 1, if the contents are equal, the program counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the program counter is incremented by four. When in MODE 2, if the contents are equal, the event counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the program counter is incremented by two and the operating mode is switched to MODE 1. 
     INSTRUCTION: WAIT—Wait for NO-OP, FIG. 8J 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (T1) = 0 + RESUME = 1 
                 (T1) = 1 · RESUME = 0 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 0 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 0 → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     If (T1)=0 this instruction acts as a NO-OP. 
     If (T1)=1, instruction execution will be repeated until the Resume Switch is depressed. When the Resume Switch is depressed either the program counter or the event counter will be incremented by two, depending on the mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: CHMD—Change Mode, FIG. 8K 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MODE 1 → 
                 0  (MODE) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2 
                 (N) → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 → (MODE) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The contents of the N field is loaded into the program counter when in MODE 2. The operating mode is changed to the opposite mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: COMP—Compare Data, FIG. 8L 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 If 
                 (T1) = 0 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ((N) + (MDB)) = test value 
               
               
                 If 
                 (T1) = 1 
               
               
                   
                 (N) signed extended  = test value 
               
             
          
           
               
                 data value = ((M) + (MDB)) 
               
             
          
           
               
                 If 
                 MODE 1 
                 MODE 2 
                   
               
               
                   
                 data &lt; test value 
                 PC + 2 → PC 
                 EC + 2 → EC 
               
               
                   
                 data &gt; test value 
                 PC + 4 → PC 
                 EC + 4 → EC 
               
               
                   
                 data = test value 
                 PC + 6 → PC 
                 EC + 6 → EC 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     A data word contained in memory is algebraically compared with a test value specified by the instruction, and the counter in control, either the PC or the EC is incremented to reflect the result of the comparison. 
     The data word is the contents of the 16 bit memory word at the address given by the sum of the M field of the instruction and the MDB. 
     The test value may be immediate data (i.e., contained in the instruction itself) or contained in memory. If (T1)=1, then the test value is the 10 bits of the N field with the S field propagated to the left to form a signed 16 bit number. If (T1)=0, then the test value is the 16 bit memory word at the address given by the sum of the N field and the MDB. 
     The counter in control is incremented to reflect the result of the comparison. In MODE 1, the program counter is incremented; in MODE 2, the event counter is incremented. 
     If the data value is greater than the test value, the counter in control is incremented by 4. If the data value is equal to the test value, the appropriate counter is incremented by 6. If the data value is less than the test value, the counter is incremented by 2. 
     INSTRUCTION: TWTL—Test Within Two Limits, FIG. 8M 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 data value = ((M) + (MDB)) 
                   
                   
               
               
                 upper limit = ((N) + (MDB)) odd 
               
               
                 lower limit = ((N) + (MDB)) even 
               
               
                 data &lt; lower limit 
                 PC + 2 → PC 
                 EC + 2 → EC 
               
               
                 data &gt; upper limit 
                 PC + 4 → PC 
                 EC + 4 → EC 
               
               
                 lower limit ≦ data ≦ upper limit 
                 PC + 6 → PC 
                 EC + 6 → EC 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     A data word contained in memory is algebraically compared with two limits in memory, and the counter in control, either the PC or the EC, is incremented to reflect the result of the comparisons. 
     The data word is the contents of the 16 bit memory word at the address given by the sum of the M field of the instruction and the MDB. 
     The two limits for the comparison are contained in a consecutive even address-odd address pair of 16 bit words in memory. The address given by the sum of the N field and the MDB is forced even by ignoring the LSB. The 16 bit word at the resulting even address is the lower limit. The contents of the next higher odd addressed word is the upper limit. 
     The counter in control is incremented to reflect the comparison. In MODE 1, the program counter is incremented; in MODE 2, the event counter is incremented. 
     If the data word is more positive than the upper limit, the counter in control is incremented by 4. If the data value is equal to or between the limits, the counter is incremented by 6. If the data value is less positive than the lower limit, the counter is incremented by 2. 
     INSTRUCTION: TJNE—Software Flag Comparison/Conditional Jump, FIG. 8N 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (T2) = ((M) + (SPB)) (B)   
                 (T2) ≠ ((M) + (SFB)) (B)   
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 MODE 1  (N) → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
                 MODE 2  (N) → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The contents of the M field is added algebraically to the contents of the SFB to obtain the effective address of the memory word containing the bit to be compared. The contents of the T2 field is compared with the contents of the memory word at the bit position specified by the contents of the B field, B=0000 indicating bit position ‘0’. When in MODE 1, if the contents are equal, the program counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the program counter is loaded with the contents of the N field. When in MODE 2, if the contents are equal, the event counter is incremented by two; if not equal, the event counter is loaded with the contents of the N field. 
     INSTRUCTION: CHNG—Change Memory Location, FIG. 8O 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 T1 = 0 
                 T1 = 1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ((N) + (MDB)) → ((M) + (MDB)) 
                 (N) (SIGNED)  → ((M) + (MDB)) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 (J) = 0 
                 (J) = 1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
                 MODE 2  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The memory location specified by the algebraic sum of the M field and the MDB is loaded with the contents of the memory location specified by the algebraic sum of the N field and the MDB. 
     If (T1)=1, then the ten bits of the N field are treated as immediate data, the S field being propagated to the left to provide a signed, 16 bit data word. 
     When in MODE 1, the program counter is incremented by two. 
     When in MODE 2, and (J)=0, the event counter is incremented by two; if (J)=1, the program counter and the event counter are each incremented by two and the operating mode switched to MODE 1. 
     A comment is in order concerning the DELAY instruction. The DELAY is essentially a CHNG with (J)=1 and (T1)=1 with the ASSEMBLER supplying the M field. Thus, there is a dedicated location in each machine data area for the delay count. 
     INSTRUCTION: INPF—Input Fixed Number of Bits, FIG. 8P 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The number of bits (up to a maximum of 16) specified by the G field (G=0001 indicating one bit) are transferred sequentially from the CRU. The data from the effective CRU address specified by the algebraic sum of the contents of the M field and the CRB shall be transferred to the core memory word addressed by the algebraic sum of the N field and the MDB. The data from CRU address (M)+(CRB)+1−(G) shall be transferred to bit position  16 −(G). Either the program counter or the event counter is incremented by two, depending on the mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: OUTPF—Output A Field, FIG. 8Q 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The number of bits specified by the G field (G=00001 indicating one bit) are transferred sequentially to the CRU up to a maximum of 16 bits. The data to be transferred is located at the core memory address specified by the algebraic sum of the N field and the MDB. Bit position  15  is transferred to the CRU at CRU address (M)+(CRB). Bit position  16 −(G) is transferred to CRU address (M)+(CRB)+1−(G). 
     If G=00000, then the 10 bits of the N field are treated as immediate data and transferred sequentially, bit  31  to CRU address (M)+(CRB) through bit  22  to CRU address (M)+(CRB)−9. 
     Either the program counter or the event counter is incremented by two, depending on the mode. 
     INSTRUCTION: INCR—Increment Memory Location, FIG. 8R 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 T1 = 0 
               
               
                   
                 ((N) + (MDB)) + ((M) + (MDB)) → ((M) + (MDB)) 
               
               
                   
                 T1 = 1 
               
               
                   
                 (N) (SIGNED)  → ((M) + (MDB)) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 1  (PC) + 2 → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 MODE 2  (EC) + 2 → (EC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The memory location specified by the algebraic sum of the M field and the MDB is loaded with the sum of the contents of itself and the contents of the memory location specified by the algebraic sum of the N field and the MDB. 
     If T1=1, then the 10 bits of the N field are treated as immediate data, the S field being propagated to the left to provide a signed, 16 bit data word. 
     When the MODE 1, the program counter is incremented by two. When in MODE 2, the event counter is incremented by two. 
     VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX 
     The formal syntax for the special instruction set is somewhat simpler than that of the standard instruction set. The notation used is BNF (Baccus Normal Form). 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 VAR FIELD 
                 ::=&lt;A&gt;|&lt;R&gt;|&lt;R&gt;,&lt;A&gt;|&lt;A&gt;,&lt;A&gt;|&lt;A&gt;(&lt;V&gt;)| 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;A&gt;(&lt;V&gt;),&lt;A&gt;|&lt;A&gt;,=&lt;ID&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;A&gt; 
                 ::=&lt;CORE ADDRESS&gt;|&lt;I/O ADDRESS&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;R&gt; 
                 ::=&lt;REGISTER NUMBER&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;V&gt; 
                 ::=&lt;BIT VALUE&gt;|&lt;SOFTWARE FLAG VALUE&gt;| 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;BIT COUNT&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;ID&gt; 
                 ::=&lt;IMMEDIATE DATA&gt; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Several general rules are applied in forming the variable field: 
     1. Parentheses are used to group an I/O value with its CRU address. 
     EXAMPLE 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 DIDO 
                 50(0), 100(1) 
                 Send a 1 on CRU output 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 address 100 if CRU input 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 address 50 is 0 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     2. In general, the left to right order reflects the operation taken in the hardware instruction decoding. 
     EXAMPLES 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 SFCJ 
                 500(1), FALSE 
                 If software flag 500 is 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 continue, else jump to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 address FALSE 
               
               
                   
                 TWTL 
                 DATA,LIMIT 
                 Compare the data in location 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 DATA against the two limits 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 given in location LIMIT. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Jump to: 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 *+2 &lt; data lower limit 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 *+4 &gt; data upper limit 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 *+6    data within limits 
               
               
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =500 
                 Create a time delay of 500 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     3. Immediate data is preceded by an ‘=’. 
     EXAMPLE 
     
       
         COMP ADDR,=3 Compare the contents of ADDR with 3 
       
     
     2540 MODE 1 INSTRUCTIONS 
     This group of instructions supplements the Special (Basic) Instructions are represent the originally implemented 2540 computer&#39;s instruction set. These supplementary instructions are given in TABLE XIV. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XIV 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MNEMONIC 
                 DESCRIPTION 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 AH 
                 Add Half 
               
               
                   
                 CH 
                 Compare Half 
               
               
                   
                 DH 
                 Divide Half 
               
               
                   
                 MH 
                 Multiply Half 
               
               
                   
                 AMH 
                 Add to Memory Half 
               
               
                   
                 SH 
                 Subtract Half 
               
               
                   
                 SFT 
                 Basic Shift Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 BC 
                 Basic Conditional Branch Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 BLM 
                 Branch and Link to Memory 
               
               
                   
                 IOBN 
                 Increment by One and Branch if Negative 
               
               
                   
                 BAS 
                 Branch and Stop 
               
               
                   
                 STH 
                 Store Half 
               
               
                   
                 LH 
                 Load Half 
               
               
                   
                 LTCH 
                 Load Two&#39;s Complement Half 
               
               
                   
                 LOCH 
                 Load One&#39;s Complement Half 
               
               
                   
                 OH 
                 Or Logical Half 
               
               
                   
                 RIC 
                 Read Input Command 
               
               
                   
                 ROC 
                 Read Output Command 
               
               
                   
                 XSW 
                 Exchange Status Word 
               
               
                   
                 LSW 
                 Load Status Word 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The notations for Operand derivation and Instruction execution are given in TABLE XIVa. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XIVa 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 NOTATION FOR OPERAND DERIVATION 
               
               
                 AND INSTRUCTION EXECUTION 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 MOD = 
                 Modification. 
               
               
                 PC = 
                 Program Counter Register. 
               
               
                 DC = 
                 Derived Operand. 
               
               
                 DA = 
                 Derived Address. 
               
               
                 IR = 
                 Instruction Register. 
               
               
                 CA = 
                 Command Address. 
               
               
                 CR = 
                 Condition Code Register. 
               
               
                 OFR = 
                 Overflow Register. 
               
               
                 IM = 
                 Interrupt Mask Register. 
               
               
                 SW = 
                 Status Word. 
               
               
                 r = 
                 Content of the R-field of an instruction. 
               
               
                 t = 
                 Content of the T-field of an instruction. 
               
               
                 A = 
                 Content of the A-field of an instruction. 
               
               
                 a = 
                 Register specified by the A-field of an instruction in register 
               
               
                   
                 modification. 
               
               
                 (X) = 
                 Content of the memory location X. 
               
               
                 (r) = 
                 The content of the register r. 
               
               
                 (r,r + 1) = 
                 The content of the double registers concatenated with 
               
               
                   
                 r + 1. 
               
               
                 (t) = 
                 The content of the register specified by the T-field of an 
               
               
                   
                 instruction. 
               
               
                 (A) o  = 
                 Full memory word specified by the content of the A-field 
               
               
                   
                 of an instruction. The content of the A-field is forced even by 
               
               
                   
                 ignoring the least significant bit. 
               
               
                 [ (A) o ] = 
                 Indicates any level of indirect addressing. The final operand is 
               
               
                   
                 a 16 bit word. 
               
               
                 [ (A) o ] o  = 
                 Indicates any level of indirect addressing. The final operand 
               
               
                   
                 is a 32 bit word. 
               
               
                 OP = 
                 Operation. 
               
               
                 (a) = 
                 The content of the register specified by the low order 3 bits of 
               
               
                   
                 the A-field of an instruction. 
               
               
                 (A) = 
                 Half memory word specified by the content of the A-field of 
               
               
                   
                 an instruction. 
               
               
                 {overscore (X)}= 
                 The ones complement of X. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     OPERAND DERIVATION 1 
     Memory Modification Instructions: AMH, STH 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Assembly Code 
                 Instruction 
                 Derived 
                   
               
               
                 Instruction 
                 Modification 
                 Address 
                 Comment 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 IMMEDIATE 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 AMH  = r,A 
                 NO MOD 
                 A 
               
               
                 AMH  = r,A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 A + (t) 
               
               
                 AMH  = r,A,C(t) 
                 MASK,CLEAR 
                 A 
               
               
                 AMH  = r,A,S(t) 
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 A 
               
               
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                 AMH  r,A 
                 NO MOD 
                 A 
               
               
                 AMH  r,A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 A + (t) 
               
               
                 AMH  r,A,C(t) 
                 MASK,CLEAR 
                 A 
               
               
                 AMH  r,A,S(t) 
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 A 
               
               
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                 AMH  r,A,* 
                 NO MOD 
                 [ (A) o ] 
                 1 
               
               
                 AMH  r,A,X(t),* 
                 INDEXED 
                 [ (A + (t) o ] 
                 1 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     1. The derived operand is the first stage of operand derivation. Operand derivation is reinitiated with A, T, and M-fields obtained from the last derived operand. 
     INSTRUCTION: AMH, ADD TO MEMORY HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 IMMEDIATE 
                   
               
               
                 NO MOD 
                 r + (DA) → (DA) 
               
               
                 INDEXED 
                 r + (DA) → (DA) 
               
               
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 [ [ r AND(t)] + [ (DA)AND(t)] ]AND(t) → (DA) 
               
               
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ [ [ r AND (t)] + [ (DA) AND (t)] ] AND(t)]OR 
               
               
                   
                 [ (DA) AND (t)] → (DA) 
               
               
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                 NO MOD 
                 (r) + (DA) → (DA) 
               
               
                 INDEXED 
                 (r) + (DA) → (DA) 
               
               
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 [ [ (r)AND(t)] + [ (DA)AND(t)] ]AND(t) → (DA) 
               
               
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ [ [ (r)AND(t) + (DA)AND(t)] ] AND(t)] OR 
               
               
                   
                 [ (DA)AND(t)] → (DA) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     For immediate modifications, the sum of the content of the R-field of the instruction expanded to 16 bits by left filling with zeros, and the content of the derived address replaces the content of the derived address. For direct modifications the sum of the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction and the content of the 16 bit derived address replaces the content of the derived address. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the content of the derived address are not altered. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is not altered. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: STH, STORE HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 IMMEDIATE 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 r → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 r → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 r AND (t) → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ r AND (t)] OR[ (DA) and {overscore ((t))}] → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 (r) → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 (r) → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 (r) AND (t) → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ (r) AND (t)] OR[ (DA)AND {overscore ((t))}] → (DA) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     For immediate modifications the content of the R-field of the instruction, expanded to 16 bits by left filling with zeros, replaces the content of the derived address. For direct modifications the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction replaces the content of the derived address. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the derived address are not altered. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is not altered. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     OPERAND DERIVATION 2 
     Arithmetic Instructions: MH, DH 
     Branch Instructions: BC, BLM, BAS 
     Input/Output Instructions: RIC, ROC 
     Loop Instructions: IOBN 
     Shift Instructions: SFT 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Derived 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Assembly Code 
                 Instruction 
                 Operand 
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Modification 
                 or Address 
                 Comment 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 IMMEDIATE 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 M  r,=A 
                 NO MOD 
                 A 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 M  r,=A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 A + (t) 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 REGISTER 
               
               
                   
                 M  r,R(t) 
                 NO MOD 
                 (a) 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 M  r,A 
                 NO MOD 
                 (A) 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 M  r,A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 (A + (t)) 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 M  r,A,* 
                 NO MOD 
                 [ (A) o ] 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 M  r,A,X(t),* 
                 INDEXED 
                 [ (A + (t)) o ] 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     1. For the Shift Instructions, the five most significant bits of the operand specify the type of shift and the five least significant bits specify the shift count. 
     2. The derived operand is the first stage of operand derivation. Operand derivation is reinitiated with A, T and M-fields obtained from the last derived operand. 
     INSTRUCTION: MH, MULTIPLY HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DO*(r + 1) → (r,r + 1) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DO*(r + 1) → (r,r + 1) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The derived operand (multiplicand) is algebraically multiplied by the 16 bit register r+1 (multiplier) specified by the R-field of the instruction and the product is placed into r and r+1. The most significant half of the product is placed in register r and the least significant half in r+1. The signs of r and R+1 are set equal according to the rules for multiplication. Masking is not a defined modification. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Result is greater than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Result is equal to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Result is less than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     FAULTING: Overflow. Caused only by the multiplier and multiplicand combination of 8000 16 ·8000 16 . The condition code is set to 100 2  while registers r and r+1 retain their old value. 
     INSTRUCTIONS: DH, DIVIDE HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 (r,r + 1)/DO → (r + 1);REMAINDER → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 (r,r + 1)/DO → (r + 1);REMAINDER → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The contents of the registers (r, r+1) specified by the R-field of the instruction are divided by the derived operand. The quotient replaces the content of the 16 bit register r+1 and the remainder replaces the content of the 16 bit register r. The sign of the quotient is set according to the rules of division. The sign of the remainder is set equal to the most significant sign of the dividend unless the remainder is all zeros. The sign of the most significant half of the divident (r register) is used as the sign of the dividend. The sign of least significant half of divident (r+1 register) is ignored. Masking is not a defined modification. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Quotient is greater than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Quotient is equal to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Quotient is less than zero 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     FAULTING: Divide Fault: Divide fault occurs when the quotient cannot be represented correctly in 16 bits. A quotient of 8000 16  with a remainder whose absolute value is less than the absolute value of the divisor is representable. 
     INSTRUCTION: BC, BRANCH ON CONDITION 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 If r AND (CR) ≠ 0, then DA → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 If r AND (CR) ≠ 0, then DA → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     If the logical AND of the content of the R-field of the instruction and content of the condition code register is not zero, then the derived address replaces the content of the program counter register. If the logical AND is zero, then the next sequential instruction is executed. See TABLE for the extended mnemonics for the branch instruction. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is not altered. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     NOTE: An unconditional transfer (R=7 8 ) is executed in exactly the same manner as described above. Since the condition register always contains a 4 8 , 2 8 , or 1 8 , the branch is always taken. 
     INSTRUCTION: BLM, BRANCH AND LINK TO MEMORY 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 (PC) + 2 → (DA); 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 DA + 2 → (PC)  
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 (PC) + 2 → (DA); 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DA + 2 → (PC)  
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The content of the program counter register incremented by two replaces the content of the derived address. The derived address incremented by two replaces the content of the program counter register (the (PC) is always even. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is not altered. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: BAS, BRANCH AND STOP 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 If(CR) AND r ≠ 0 then DA → (PC),STOP 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 If(CR) AND r ≠ 0 then DA → (PC),STOP 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     If the Mode switch on the compute front control panel is in the JUMP STOP mode, and if the logical AND of the content of the R-field of the instruction and the content of the condition code register is not zero, then the derived address replaces the content of the program counter register and the system clock is stopped. If the logical AND is all zeros, then the next sequential instruction is executed. If the Mode switch is not on JUMP STOP, the above results are still valid except the system clock is not stopped. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code is not altered. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: RIC, REGISTER INPUT COMMAND 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DA → CA,DATA → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DA → CA,DATA → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The 16 bit derived address is furnished to the Command Address (CA) lines to determine what input is enabled. The input data replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction. Masking is not a defined modification. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is always set to 100 2 . 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: ROC, REGISTER OUTPUT COMMAND 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DA → CA,(r) → OUTPUT 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DA → CA,(r) → OUTPUT 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The 16 bit derived address is furnished to the Command Address (CA) lines to determine what output is enabled, and the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction is furnished to the I/O. Masking is not a defined modification. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is always set to 100 2 . 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: IOBN, INCREMENT BY ONE AND BRANCH IF NEGATIVE 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 (r)+1 → (r);IF(r) &lt; 0, THEN DA → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 (r)+1 → (r);IF(r) &lt; 0, THEN DA → (PC) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The 16 bit register, r, specified by the R-field of the instruction is incremented by one. If the resulting content of r is negative, the derived address replaces the content of the program counter register. If the resulting content of r is not negative, the next sequential instruction is executed. 
     CONDITION CODE; The condition code register is not altered. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: SFT, SHIFT 
     EXECUTION 
     The derived operand is divided into two fields as illustrated in FIG.  9 A. The “shift descriptor” field describes the type of shift to be performed. The “count” field is used to determine how many bit positions are to be shifted. The bits in the shift descriptor field are defined as follows: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Bit 0: 
                 = 
                  0; Right shift 
               
               
                   
                 = 
                  1; Left shift 
               
               
                 Bit 1-2: 
                 = 
                 00; Rotate 
               
               
                   
                 = 
                 01; Arithmetic shift 
               
               
                   
                 = 
                 10; Logical shift 
               
               
                 Bit 3-4: 
                 = 
                 00; Full word (a 32 bit word is used for rotate and 
               
               
                   
                 = 
                    logical shifts when a half word is not indicated). 
               
               
                   
                 = 
                 01; Half word 
               
               
                   
                 = 
                 11; Double half word 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     MASKING: Masking is not a defined modification for any of the shift instructions. 
     CONDITION CODE: The condition code register is not altered by any of the shift instructions. 
     FAULTING: Overflow can occur on the arithmetic left shifts (SHL and SLDH). 
     OPERAND DERIVATION 3 
     Arithmetic Instructions: LH, LTCH, AH, SH, CH 
     Logical Instructions: LOCH, OH 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Assembly Code 
                 Instruction 
                 Derived 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Modification 
                 Operand 
                 Comment 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 IMMEDIATE 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 LH r,=A 
                 NO MOD 
                 A 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,=A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 A + (t) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,=A,C 
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 A AND (t) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,=A 
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 A AND (t) 
               
               
                   
                 REGISTER 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,R(t) 
                 NO MOD 
                 (a) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,RC(A,t) 
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 (a) AND (t) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,RS(A,t) 
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 (a) AND (t) 
               
               
                   
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,A 
                 NO MOD 
                 (A) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 (A + (t)) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,A,C(t) 
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 (A) AND (t) 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,A,S(t) 
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 (A) AND (t) 
               
               
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,A,* 
                 NO MOD 
                 [ (A) o ] 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 LH r,A,X(t),* 
                 INDEXED 
                 [ (A + (t)) o ] 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     1. The derived operand is first stage of operand derivation. Operand derivation is reinitiated with new A, T, and M-fields obtained from the last derived operand. 
     INSTRUCTION: LH, LOAD HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DO → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DO → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 DO AND (t)  (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 DO OR [ (r) AND (t)] → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The derived operand replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the destination register are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Result is greater than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Result is equal to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Result is less than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When masking occurs, the condition code is set for masked bits only. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: LTCH, LOAD TWO&#39;S COMPLEMENT HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 {overscore (DO)} + 1 → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 {overscore (DO)} + 1 → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 [ {overscore (DO)} + 1]AND (t) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ [ {overscore (DO)} + 1] AND (t)] OR [ (r) AND(t)] → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The two&#39;s complement of the derived operand replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the destination register are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Result is greater than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Result is equal to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Result is less than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When masking occurs, the condition code is set for masked bits only. 
     FAULTING: Overflow. The two&#39;s complement of 8000 16  causes overflow. 
     INSTRUCTION: AH, ADD HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DO + (r) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DO + (r) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 [ DO + (r) AND (t)]] AND (t) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ [DO + [ (r) AND(t)]] AND (t)] OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 [ (r) AND (t)] → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The algebraic sum of the derived operand the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the destination register are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Results are greater than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Results are equal to zero 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Results are less than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When masking occurs the condition code is set for masked bits only. 
     FAULTING: Overflow. When two numbers are added whose sum is not representable in a 16 bit word, then overflow is indicated. 
     INSTRUCTION: SH, SUBTRACT HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 (r) − DO → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 (r) − DO → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 [ [ (r)AND(t)] − DO]AND(t) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ [ [ (r)AND(t)] − DO]AND(t)]OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 [ (r)AND(t)] → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The algebraic difference between the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction and the derived operand replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the destination register are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Result is greater than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Result is greater than zero 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Result is less than zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When masking occurs the condition code is set for masked bits only. 
     FAULTING: Overflow. When two numbers whose difference is not representable in a 16 bit word are subtracted, overflow is indicated. 
     INSTRUCTION: CH, COMPARE HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DO: (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DO: (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 DO: [ (r) AND (t)] 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 DO: [ (r) AND (t)] 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The derived operand the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction are compared algebraically. When masking occurs, only those bits which are masked are compared. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Content of register is greater 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Quantities are equal 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Content of register is less 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: LOCH, LOAD ONE&#39;S COMPLEMENT HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 {overscore (DO)} → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 {overscore (DO)} → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 {overscore (DO)} AND (t) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ {overscore (DO)} AND (t)] OR [ (r) AND (t)] → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The one&#39;s complement of the derived operand replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the destination register are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Result is mixed ones and zeros. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Result is all zeros. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Result is all ones. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When masking occurs, the condition code is set by the masked bits only. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     INSTRUCTION: OH, OR LOGICAL HALF 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Instruction 
               
               
                   
                 Modification 
                 Execution 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NO MOD 
                 DO OR (r) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 INDEXED 
                 DO OR (r) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
                 [ DO OR (r)] AND (t) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
                 [ [ DO OR (r)] AND (t)] OR [ (r) AND 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (t)] = DO OR (r) → (r) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXECUTION 
     The logical sum (OR) of the derived operand and the content of the 16 bit register specified by the R-field of the instruction replaces the content of the 16 bit register specified by the content of the R-field of the instruction. In the case of MASK, SAVE the unmasked bits of the destination register are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CONDITION CODE: 
                 001 
                 Result is mixed ones and zeros 
               
               
                   
                   
                 010 
                 Result is all zeros.  
               
               
                   
                   
                 100 
                 Result is all ones. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When masking occurs, the condition code is set by the masked bits only. 
     FAULTING: None. 
     OPERAND DERIVATION 4 
     Status Word Instruction: XSW, LSW 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Assembly Code 
                 Instruction 
                 Derived 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Instruction 
                 Modification 
                 Operand 
                 Comment 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 DIRECT 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 XSW  r,A 
                 NO MOD 
                 (A) o   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 XSW  r,A,X(t) 
                 INDEXED 
                 (A+(t)) o   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 XSW  r,A,* 
                 NO MOD 
                 [ (A) o ] o   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 XSW  r,A,X(t),* 
                 INDEXED 
                 [ (A+(t)) o ] o   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     1. The derived operand is two 16 bit words located at [DA] and [DA+1]. 
     2. The derived operand is first stage in operand derivation. Operand derivation is reinitiated with new A, M, and T-fields obtained from the last derived operand. 
     INSTRUCTION: XSW: EXCHANGE STATUS WORD 
     EXECUTION 
     The derived operand is two 16 bit halfwords which contain two pointers, P 1  and P 2 . P 2 =(DA), P 1 =(DA+1). P 2  must be on an even boundary as illustrated in FIG.  9 B. 
     P 1  is used to define where the present SW information is to be stored and P 2  is used to define where the new SW information is to be found. The variations for XSW are: 
     a. r=0 
     The content of SW, words  1 ,  2 ,  3  and  4 , replaces the content of the four consecutive memory locations beginning at the memory location defined by P 1 . The content of the four consecutive locations beginning at the memory location defined by P 2  replaces the content of SW, words  1 ,  2 ,  3  and  4 . 
     b. r=1 
     The content of words  1  and  2  of SW replace the content of word  1  and  2  at memory location defined by P 1 . The content of the two words at the memory location defined by P 2  replaces the SW words  1  and  2 . Words  3  and  4  are neither stored nor altered. 
     Masking is not a defined modification. 
     INSTRUCTION: LSW: LOAD STATUS WORD 
     EXECUTION 
     The derived operand is two 16 bit halfwords which contain a pointer P 1  in the second word. The first word must start on an even boundary as illustrated in FIG.  9 C. 
     The P 1  pointer is used to define the memory location where the new SW information is to be found. The variations for LSW are: 
     a. r=0 
     The content of the four consecutive 16 bit data words beginning at the memory location defined by P 1  replaces the content of the SW, words  1  through  4 . 
     b. r=1 
     The content of the two consecutive words at the memory location defined by P 1  replaces the content of the words  1  and  2  of SW. Words  3  and  4  are not altered. 
     Masking is not a defined modification. 
     VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX 
     The left to right order of the variable field reflects the order in which the 2540 performs the operand fetch and instruction execution. 
     The formal syntax as specified in BNF is as follows: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 &lt;VAR FIELD&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 &lt;REG&gt;,&lt;OPERAND&gt;[ ,&lt;MOD&gt;] [ ,&lt;INDIRECT&gt;] 
               
               
                 &lt;REG&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 destination register number 
               
               
                 &lt;OPERAND&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 &lt;a&gt; = &lt;a&gt; 
               
               
                 &lt;MOD&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 X(&lt;t&gt;) C(&lt;t&gt;) S(&lt;t&gt;) RC(&lt;a&gt;,&lt;t&gt;) RS(&lt;a&gt;,&lt;t&gt;) 
               
               
                 &lt;INDIRECT&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 * 
               
               
                 &lt;a&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 core location, data, or source register number 
               
               
                 &lt;t&gt; 
                 ::= 
                 modifying register number 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Where [ ] implies a syntactic option. 
     Several basic rules are followed in specifying the variable field. 
     Consider for the standard instruction set: 
     1. Commas are used to partition the variable field. 
     2. The destination register is specified first, the operand second, modifiers third, and indirect addressing fourth. Note that this is the order in which the hardware decodes and executes the instruction. 
     EXAMPLE 
     
       
           LD  1,500 Load register 1 from location 500 
       
     
     3. The following modifiers are generally applicable to the standard instruction set. 
     X—Indexed 
     C—Mask, Clear 
     S—Mask, Save 
     R—Register 
     RC—Register Mask, Clear 
     RS—Register Mask, Save 
     EXAMPLES 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 LD 
                 1,500,X(2) 
                 Load register 1 from location 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 500 indexed off register 2 
               
               
                   
                 CMP 
                 1,R(2) 
                 Compare register 1 with 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 register 2 
               
               
                   
                 ADD 
                 1,RC(2, 3) 
                 Add register 2 to register 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 using register 3 as a mask 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     4. To specify an indirect operand fetch the ‘*’ is used. 
     EXAMPLE 
     
       
           BC  1, END,  X (2),* Branch if condition code is high to END indexed off register 2 and indirect (reinitiate operand derivation) 
       
     
     Note (as is also indicated in the syntax) that when indirect indexed is specified, indexing occurs first (preindexing). 
     Special attention should be given the branch instructions and shift instructions. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BC 
                 7,=LAB1 
                 Unconditional branch to LAB1 
               
               
                   
                 BC 
                 7,LAB1 
                 Unconditional branch to address 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 contained in LAB 1 
               
               
                   
                 IOBN 
                 2,=LAB2 
                 Incr. reg. 2 and branch not 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 negative to LAB2 
               
               
                 LAB3 
                 BAS 
                 7,=* 
                 Unconditional branch to LAB3 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 and stop 
               
               
                 LAB4 
                 BAS 
                 7,*+2,* 
                 Unconditional indirect branch 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 through LAB 4 + 2 and stop 
               
               
                   
                 SFT 
                 1,DESC 
                 Shift reg. 1 as specified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 contents of DESC 
               
               
                   
                 SFT 
                 0,=DUM 
                 Shift immediate reg. 0 
               
               
                 DUM 
                 EQU 
                 /A805 
                 Shift left arithmetic 5 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     SIMULATION OF THE 1800 COMPUTER BY THE 2540 COMPUTER 
     The COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM can be made to look like an 1800 computer by using the following instruction set. The 1800 can be thought of as having the following hardware: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 1800 
                 2540 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Accumulator 
                 Reg. 
                 7 
               
               
                   
                 Extension 
                   
                 0 
               
               
                   
                 XR1 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 XR2 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 XR3 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 XR4 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 XR5 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 XR6 
                   
                 6 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Index registers  4 ,  5 ,  6  may or may not be used depending on the desired compatibility with the 1800, which uses only three registers. 
     
       
           TRAX  3 Transfer A-reg. to index reg. 3 
       
     
     Special consideration should be given the conditional branch. The condition tested is the condition code and not the A-register, and the user must be sure to perform an operation on the A-register that sets the condition code before writing a conditional branch. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 A 
                 MEMBER 
                 Add contents of member to accumulator 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 and 
               
               
                   
                 BP 
                 EXIT 
                 Branch to EXIT if positive. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Similarly for condition branch where an index register is implied: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 MDX 
                 2,=1 
                 Add 1 to XR2 and 
               
               
                   
                 BXZ 
                 EXIT 
                 Branch to EXIT if zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The instructions that set the condition code are as follows: 
     LD 
     LDX 
     A 
     SUB 
     M 
     D 
     The instruction set of the  1800  computer as simulated on the  2540  computer is shown in TABLE XV. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XV 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MNEMONIC 
                 INSTRUCTION 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 LD 
                 LOAD ACCUMULATOR 
               
               
                   
                 LDX 
                 LOAD INDEX 
               
               
                   
                 STO 
                 STORE ACCUMULATOR 
               
               
                   
                 STX 
                 STORE INDEX 
               
               
                   
                 A 
                 ADD 
               
               
                   
                 SUB 
                 SUBTRACT 
               
               
                   
                 M 
                 MULTIPLY 
               
               
                   
                 D 
                 DIVIDE 
               
               
                   
                 AND 
                 LOGICAL AND 
               
               
                   
                 OR 
                 LOGICAL OR 
               
               
                   
                 MDX 
                 MODIFY INDEX 
               
               
                   
                 MIN 
                 MODIFY CORE LOCATION 
               
               
                   
                 BSI 
                 BRANCH AND STORE PC 
               
               
                   
                 B 
                 UNCONDITIONAL BRANCH 
               
               
                   
                 BE 
                 BRANCH EQUAL 
               
               
                   
                 BH 
                 BRANCH HIGH 
               
               
                   
                 BL 
                 BRANCH LOW 
               
               
                   
                 BM 
                 BRANCH MIXED 
               
               
                   
                 BN 
                 BRANCH NEGATIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BNE 
                 BRANCH NOT EQUAL 
               
               
                   
                 BNH 
                 BRANCH NOT HIGH 
               
               
                   
                 BNL 
                 BRANCH NOT LOW 
               
               
                   
                 BNM 
                 BRANCH NOT MIXED 
               
               
                   
                 BNN 
                 BRANCH NOT NEGATIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BNO 
                 NOT ALL ONES 
               
               
                   
                 BNP 
                 BRANCH NOT POSITIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BNZ 
                 BRANCH NOT ZERO 
               
               
                   
                 BO 
                 BRANCH ALL ONES 
               
               
                   
                 BP 
                 BRANCH POSITIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BZ 
                 BRANCH ZERO 
               
               
                   
                 BXP 
                 BRANCH INDEX POSITIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BXZ 
                 BRANCH INDEX ZERO 
               
               
                   
                 BXN 
                 BRANCH INDEX NEGATIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BXNN 
                 BRANCH INDEX NOT NEGATIVE 
               
               
                   
                 BXNP 
                 BRANCH INDEX NOT POSITIVE 
               
               
                   
                 SLA 
                 SHIFT LEFT ACCUMULATOR 
               
               
                   
                 SLT 
                 SHIFT LEFT ACC AND EXTENSION 
               
               
                   
                 SRA 
                 SHIFT RIGHT ACCUMULATOR 
               
               
                   
                 SRT 
                 SHIFT RIGHT ACC AND EXTENSION 
               
               
                   
                 RTE 
                 ROTATE RIGHT ACC AND EXTENSION 
               
               
                   
                 NOP 
                 NO OPERATION 
               
               
                   
                 TRAX 
                 TRANSFER ACCUMULATOR TO INDEX 
               
               
                   
                 TRXA 
                 TRANSFER INDEX TO ACCUMULATOR 
               
               
                   
                 LDQ 
                 LOAD ACCUMULATOR EXTENSION 
               
               
                   
                 STQ 
                 STORE ACCUMULATOR EXTENSION 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX 
     The pure  2540  syntax rules apply to variable field for the  1800  computer but the interpretation of the various elements in the fields is similar to that of the  1800  computer. This fact may be illustrated through the use of examples: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 LD 
                 LOC 
                 Load A-reg. from LOC 
               
               
                 LD 
                 LOC,X(1) 
                 Load A-reg. indexed 
               
               
                 LD 
                 LOC,* 
                 Load A-reg. indirect 
               
               
                 LD 
                 LOC,X(1),* 
                 Load A-reg. indexed indirect 
               
               
                 LDX 
                 1,=1 
                 Load XR1 immediate with 1 
               
               
                 LDX 
                 1,=LOC 
                 Load XR1 with address of LOC 
               
               
                 LDX 
                 1,LOC 
                 Load XR1 with contents of LOC 
               
               
                 STO 
                 Same as LD 
               
               
                 STX 
                 1,LOC 
                 Store XR1 in LOC 
               
               
                 STX 
                 1,LOC,* 
                 Store XR1 indirect 
               
               
                 A 
                 Same as LD 
               
               
                 S 
                 Same as LD 
               
               
                 M 
                 Same as LD 
               
               
                 D 
                 Same as LD 
               
               
                 AND 
                 LOC 
                 ‘AND‘ may not be indexed or indirect 
               
               
                 OR 
                 Same as LD 
               
               
                 IOBN 
                 1,LOC 
                 Increment XR1 by 1, jump zero to LOC 
               
               
                 MDX 
                 1,=1 
                 Modify XR1 by 1 
               
               
                 MIN 
                 LOC,=1 
                 Modify LOC by 1 allowed values are 1-7 
               
               
                 BSI 
                 LOC 
                 Branch and save to LOC 
               
               
                 BSI 
                 LOC,* 
                 Branch and save to ADDR contained in LOC 
               
               
                 SLA 
                 3 
                 Shift A-reg. left 3 places 
               
               
                 SLT 
                 Same as SLA 
               
               
                 SRA 
                 Same as SLA 
               
               
                 SRT 
                 Same as SLA 
               
               
                 RTE 
                 Same as SLA 
               
               
                 NOP 
                   
                 No operation 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     SPECIAL IMPLEMENTATION OF INSTRUCTIONS 
     This category of instructions was originally conceived to facilitate simulation of hardware instructions prior to implementation. A dedicated portion of memory serves as a branch table. These special mnemonics are implemented as CHMD instructions (see SPECIAL (BASIC) INSTRUCTIONS), which changes mode (to MODE  1 ) and branch to the appropriate location in the branch table, where a branch instruction transfers control to an appropriate subroutine. The subroutine is generated as a MODE  1  program and must be included in the  2540  core load according to the CORE LOAD BUILDER section. 
     It should be pointed out that the GLOBAL SUBROUTINES are implemented in this fashion, as well as a number of special purpose functions for specific machines. The mnemonic and purpose are listed in TABLE XVI. All those listed are called from and return to MODE  2  procedures. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XVI 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 MNEMONIC 
                 PURPOSE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 SUBR 
                 Execution of subroutine local to a procedure. 
               
               
                   
                 RETRN 
                 Return from subroutine local to a procedure. 
               
               
                   
                 SEND 
                 Queue a message for output. 
               
               
                   
                 READ 
                 Read a workpiece identification number. 
               
               
                   
                 FKEY 
                 Input status of function key on CRT display. 
               
               
                   
                 WCHR 
                 Write character to CRT display. 
               
               
                   
                 RCHR 
                 Read character from keyboard of CRT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 REQST 
                 Global subr. - request a workpiece from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 upstream segment. 
               
               
                   
                 ACKN 
                 Global subr. - acknowledge receipt of work- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 piece from upstream segment. 
               
               
                   
                 READY 
                 Global subr. - notify downstream segment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of workpiece ready to transmit. 
               
               
                   
                 ASSUR 
                 Global subr. - notify downstream segment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 workpiece is transmitted clear of this 
               
               
                   
                   
                 segment. 
               
               
                   
                 CHKOK 
                 Restrict to a specified maximum the count 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of workpieces present in a specified number 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of contiguous segments. 
               
               
                   
                 HUAMI 
                 Identify thc procedure segment currently 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in execution. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     WRITING PROCEDURES FOR MACHINE CONTROL 
     The assembler directive “equate”: 
     
       
         VALVE EQU 1  
       
     
     This line of code tells the ASSEMBLER to assign the value “1” to the label “VALVE”. In generating machine code, the ASSEMBLER inserts the value “1” wherever it encounters the label “VALVE”. Other examples of the “equate” directive are given below: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 PC1 
                 EQU 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 MOTOR 
                 EQU 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 BRAKE 
                 EQU 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     There are some common labels that have been predefined which may be used whenever needed, but must not appear in the label field. These standard labels are listed below: 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Standard Bit Flags 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 GATEA 
                 EQU 
                 1 
                   
               
               
                   
                 GATEB 
                 EQU 
                 16  
               
               
                   
                 GATEC 
                 EQU 
                 17  
               
               
                   
                 GATED 
                 EQU 
                 32  
               
               
                   
                 TRACK 
                 EQU 
                 18  
               
               
                   
                 IMAGF 
                 EQU 
                 19  
               
               
                   
                 RSTRT 
                 EQU 
                 21  
               
               
                   
                 PRCSS 
                 EQU 
                 23  
               
             
          
           
               
                 Standard Machine Data Words 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 TIMER 
                 EQU 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 MONTR 
                 EQU 
                 0 
               
               
                   
                 RUN 
                 EQU 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 BUSY 
                 EQU 
                 3 
               
             
          
           
               
                 States 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 LIGHT 
                 EQU 
                 0 
                   
               
               
                   
                 DARK 
                 EQU 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 OPEN 
                 EQU 
                 0 
               
               
                   
                 CLOSE 
                 EQU 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 OFF 
                 EQU 
                 0 
               
               
                   
                 ON 
                 EQU 
                 1 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Global Subroutine Symbols 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 SLICE 
                 EQU 
                 0 
                   
               
               
                   
                 RECPT 
                 EQU 
                 0 
               
               
                   
                 SAFE 
                 EQU 
                 0 
               
               
                   
                 UNSAF 
                 EQU 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 EXIT 
                 EQU 
                 0 
               
             
          
           
               
                 MDATA Standard Labels 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 HWMM 
                 EQU 
                 6 
                 Machine work area length 
               
               
                   
                 HWMS 
                 EQU 
                 9 
                 Segment work area length 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     INSTRUCTIONS DEALING WITH INPUT OR OUTPUT BIT LINES 
     
       
         TURN MOTOR (ON)  
       
     
     This line of code instructs the computer to transmit a binary “1” to output line number  5 . Note that the same coding is generated by the instruction using absolute values instead of symbols. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 TURN 
                 5 (1) 
               
               
                   
                 SENSE 
                 PC1 (LIGHT) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     This line of code instructs the computer to examine input line  1  and determine if it is a binary “0”. If the line is “0”, the computer goes on to the next instruction; if it is not “0”, the computer returns control to the supervisor or MODE  1  program. After each polling period, the same instruction is executed until the line contains a “0” or the machine monitor runs down. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 HERE 
                 SJNE 
                 PC1 (LIGHT), THERE 
               
               
                   
                 THERE 
                 JUMP 
                 HOME 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The SJNE instruction means “sense and jump if not equal”. In this case, the computer is to jump to “THERE” in PC 1 , a photocell sensor, is dark. If PC 1  is light, it will continue with the next instruction. Note that in this example the computer will go to “THERE” in any case and then to “HOME”. 
     A special instruction will combine a digital input and a digital output. 
     
       
         DIDO PC 1  (LIGHT), MOTOR (ON)  
       
     
     This instruction means “digital input-digital output” and instructs the computer to wait until PC 1  is light and then turn the motor on. As long as PC 1  is dark, the same instruction is executed once each polling period and the motor is not turned on. 
     INSTRUCTIONS DEALING WITH SOFTWARE BIT FLAGS 
     
       
         SET GATEA (ON)  
       
     
     This instruction is analogous to the “TURN” instruction except that a bit flag is effected instead of an output line. 
     
       
         TEST GATEA (ON)  
       
     
     This instruction is analogous to the “SENSE” instruction except that a bit flag is examined instead of an input line. 
     
       
         TJNE GATEA (ON), THERE  
       
     
     The TJNE instruction means “test and jump if not equal” and is analogous to the SJNE instruction, but these instructions deal with I/O lines. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 TURN 
                 MOTOR (ON) 
               
               
                   
                 SENSE 
                 PC1 (LIGHT) 
               
               
                   
                 SJNE 
                 PC1 (LIGHT), THERE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The following instructions deal with bit flags: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 SET 
                 GATEA (ON) 
               
               
                   
                 TEST 
                 GATEA (ON) 
               
               
                   
                 TJNE 
                 GATEA (ON), THERE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The instructions dealing with I/O lines and bit flags should not be confused. 
     The following instructions deal with data manipulation within the computer: 
     
       
         CHNG DATA 1 , DATA 2   
       
     
     This instruction tells the computer to move the contents of DATA 2  into DATA 1 . Another form of the instruction is shown below: 
     
       
         CHNG DATA 1 ,=10  
       
     
     This instruction tells the computer to place the value “10” into DATA 1 . 
     
       
         INCR DATA 1 , DATA 2   
       
     
     This instruction tells the computer to add the contents of DATA 2  to the contents of DATA 1  and place the sum in DATA 1 . It can also use immediate data. 
     
       
         INCR DATA 1 ,=10  
       
     
     This adds the value “10” to the contents of DATA 1 . 
     
       
         COMP DATA 1 , DATA 2   
       
     
     This instruction tells the computer to compare the contents of DATA 1  with the contents of DATA 2 . This instruction changes the program execution flow depending on the results of the comparison. 
     If DATA 1  is less than DATA 2 , the next instruction is executed; 
     If DATA 1  is greater than DATA 2 , one instruction is skipped; 
     If DATA 1  is equal to DATA 2 , two instructions are skipped. 
     This instruction can use immediate data. 
     
       
         COMP DATA 1 ,=10  
       
     
     The same comparison results are obtained. 
     
       
         DELAY MTIME  
       
     
     This instruction introduces a delay in the execution of the program. The length of the delay is determined by the value of MTIME and is an integral number of tenths of a second. 
     
       
         DELAY=20 SECS  
       
     
     Immediate data may be specified as above and the keyword “SECS” illustrates the only case in which a blank may be embedded in the operand field. A few other keywords, such as “MSECS” may be used in the same manner. 
     
       
         JUMP THERE  
       
     
     The “JUMP” instruction has been used above, which causes the proper sequence of program execution to be altered. The next instruction to be executed will be at location “THERE” instead of the next instruction in line. 
     The next four instructions are the supervisor calls that invoke the global subroutines for workpiece transport between machines and between segments. 
     
       
         REQST SLICE (PC 1 )  
       
     
     This call is used when a segment is ready to accept a new workpiece for processing. It also informs the computer that it is to use sensor PC 1  to determine when a workpiece is present. Two different returns are used from the subroutine. If an unexpected workpiece appears at the sensor, such as a photocell, the routine returns to the first instruction following the call. If the upstream segment has indicated that it is ready to send a workpiece, the routine returns to the second instruction following the call so that proper preparation may be made for the expected workpiece. 
     If there is no photocell or other sensor available for sensing the presence of a workpiece, the calling sequence is as follows: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 REQST 
                 SLICE (0) 
               
               
                   
                 NOOP 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Here, the zero indicates to the subroutine that no photocell is available. Since an unexpected workpiece could not be detected even if it was present, the routine will never return to the first instruction following the call. The “NOOP” instruction, which stands for “no operation”, provides a dummy instruction for the first return. 
     
       
         ACKN RECPT (PC 1 )  
       
     
     This call is used to acknowledge that the expected workpiece has arrived safely. Upon safe arrival, the routine returns to the first instruction following the call. If, however, the upstream segment informs the routine that the workpiece has been lost, the routine returns to the second instruction following the call so that the input preparations can be reset. 
     “Acknowledge receipt” also uses an argument of zero to indicate that no sensor is available, but its return conventions are not altered. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 ACKN 
                 RECPT (0) 
               
               
                   
                 READY 
                 SAFE RELEASE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     This call is used after a workpiece is finished with its processing in a given segment. It informs the downstream segment that a workpiece is waiting for it. The routine returns to the first instruction following the call when the downstream segment indicates that it is ready to accept the workpiece. Preparations to ship the workpiece can then be made. 
     The “ready safe release” call indicates that the station doing the slice processing is a safe one. The workpiece can wait there after processing as long as necessary with no danger. Some stations, however, are not safe. The workpiece must be released as soon as its processing is finished or it will be damaged. In this case, a different call is used. 
     
       
         READY UNSAF RELEASE  
       
     
     If the workpiece is not successfully released within the time span provided by the monitor, the machine will fail. 
     
       
         ASSUR EXIT (PC 1 )  
       
     
     This routine is used to assure that the workpiece does, in fact, leave normally. After the workpiece has left, the routine returns to the first instruction following the call. If no photocell is available, a zero argument is used. 
     
       
         ASSUR EXIT (0)  
       
     
     The routine now can only assume that the workpiece left properly. It makes this assumption and returns to the calling program. 
     Mode  2  subroutines may also be used with the following two instructions: 
     
       
         SUBR A  
       
     
     where “A: is the location of the desired subroutine, and 
     
       
         RETRN  
       
     
     This instruction is used to return to the main part of the program at the completion of the subroutine. Subroutines may not be nested—that is, one subroutine may not call another subroutine. 
     The next instruction is an assembler directive and tells the assembler that the lines of code following it are a template of the machine data. 
     
       
         MDUMY HWMM+2*HWMS  
       
     
     It also tells the assembler to reserve a block of core large enough for the machine and segment work areas for a machine with two segments. The number in the operand field is equal to the number of segments. 
     The data words referenced above are also included. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 DATA1 
                 DC 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 DATA2 
                 DC 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 MTIME 
                 DC 
                 20 SECS 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The last line of code in any program is the assembler directive “END”. 
     EXAMPLE OF THE OPERATION OF A SPECIFIC MACHINE 
     The Loader machine, utilized, for example, to load semiconductor slices (as the workpieces) into a carrier illustrates a number of diverse features of the present system. It is a multi-work station machine (four work stations with four corresponding work station program segments); it is a terminal machine in a module (there is no downstream neighbor work station for last work station); the pneumatic transport mechanism is common to the machine&#39;s work stations (shared among them); and it features a removable workpiece carrier which is manually replaced with an empty. 
     Referring to FIG. 10, the first two work stations  1000  and  1001  are queues, each comprising a bed section  1002  large enough to hold a workpiece  1003 , a photocell and sensor  1004  for detecting workpiece presence, a brake  1005  for keeping the workpiece in place, and pneumatic transport mechanism  1006 . A first program segment, shown in TABLE XVa, controls the first work station  1000 . A second program segment, shown in TABLE XVb, controls the second work station  1001 . 
     The third work station  1008  is comprised of a workpiece carrier platform  1007  which can be moved vertically up and down, a tongue extension  1019  on the bed section on which the workpiece travels with a brake  1009  at the tongue to stop and position a workpiece precisely in a carrier  1010 , the shared pneumatic transport mechanism  1006  and photocell sensors for detection of carrier presence  1011 , carrier empty  1012 , platform at top position  1013 , platform at bottom position  1014 , and each incremental position of carrier  1015 . Carrier  1010  itself is slotted  1016  so that it holds one workpiece  1003  in each slot. When an empty carrier  1010  is placed on platform  1007 , the platform is driven to bottom. As each workpiece is loaded, platform  1007  is raised one increment to the next empty slot. When the carrier is filled, the platform is in the top position. In operation, the queue work stations  1000  and  1001  are normally empty, except when the time required for operator replacement of a full carrier is longer than the time it takes a new workpiece to reach the machine. A third program segment, TABLE XVc, corresponds to this third work station  1008 . 
     A fourth program segment, TABLE XVd, is used to monitor carrier  1010  presence, and receive a new carrier when one is removed. This is a departure from normal practice, since there is no corresponding fourth work station and illustrates the flexibility of the modular functional use of the system components. A light  1017  on the machine is turned on to indicate to the operator that an empty carrier is required. 
     A subroutine CHECK AIR of TABLE XVe, is used by the first three segments to facilitate use of the shared pneumatic transport mechanism. A data word is incremented by each segment as it turns on the transport, and decremented by calling this subroutine. When all segments are finished with transport, the data word is decremented to zero and the transport mechanism turned off. 
     The first three segments, TABLES XVa-c, follow the general segment flow chart depicted in FIG.  1 . Note that no processing control, TABLE XVa, is required at the first work station, since only workpiece movement is involved. The second segment involves communication with the fourth segment to prevent workpiece movement during carrier replacement, and this requirement is reflected in the flow chart of TABLE XVb. The third work station is a terminal station for an entire module, so that transport of the workpiece out of the work station is not required. Processing in the third segment, TABLE XVc, comprises driving the carrier platform up one notch. 
     The pneumatic transport mechanism  1006  consists of a plurality of holes in the bed section  1002  of the loader extending from the entry of the loader to the end of the tongue section  1008 . The entire pneumatic transport mechanism  1006  is actuated at one time, so that if no brakes were applied along the track bed, a workpiece entering the workpiece entry in the loader will move along the track bed until it reaches a position on the track bed where a brake is applied. The brakes  1005  shown are also pneumatic devices with a suction applied through the holes shown in the track bed. There is sufficient suction to stop and hold a workpiece when the workpiece in the form of a semiconductor slice reaches and covers the air brake holes. The pneumatic transport mechanism and the individual brakes are actuated separately. Thus, for instance, to position a workpiece  1003  at work station  1000 , the brake  1005  for the first work station  1000  will be actuated and then the pneumatic transport mechanism  1006  will be actuated. A workpiece entering the loader will be stopped by the brake  1005  at the first work station. The workpiece at work station  1000  will remain there until the brake  1005  at the first work station is deactivated and the pneumatic transport mechanism actuated. If the brake at the second work station  1001  is activated, the pneumatic transport mechanism will transport the workpiece to the second work station where it will be stopped by the activated brake at that work station. 
     The pneumatic transport mechanism  1006  is activated by opening an air cylinder. The opening and closing of the air cylinder controlling the pneumatic transport mechanism is controlled by connecting the solenoid input of the air cylinder to a bit position in the communication register in the bit pusher computer. In a corresponding manner, each of the brakes for the work stations  1000 ,  1001  and  1008  are individually activated to apply a suction to the brakes to hold the workpieces. The solenoids controlling the brakes are also connected to individual bit positions in the communication register. The photocell sensors are also connected to individual bit positions in the communication register where the information indicated by the photocell sensors can be sensed by the program in the computer to determine the control to be applied. The elevator platform  1007  of the loader is moved up and down to position one groove  1016  of the carrier in line with the track bed one position at a time. The elevator platform  1007  is moved by the actuation of a motor to rotate a screw. The photocell sensor  1015  senses one revolution of the screw moving the elevator platform one position up or down. The motor driving the screw which moves the elevator platform  1007  is connected to bit positions in the communication register which are addressed to turn the motor on and off and to move the motor in either a forward or reverse position, depending upon the desired movement of the elevator platform  1007 . 
     The bit positions in the communication register are addressed to sense conditions sensed by the photocell sensors and either activate or deactivate the pneumatic transport mechanism, the brakes and the motor to perform the transfer operations and positioning operations desired and controlled by the program. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XVa 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XXc 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVd 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVf 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ASSEMBLY FOUR SEGMENT LOADER 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 INSTRUC- 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 HLDC 
                 TION 
                 LINE 
                 ERR    SOURCE   TEXT 
                 EVENT 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  0001 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0002 
                 * FOUR SEGMENT LOADER PROCEDURE 
               
               
                   
                 0003 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0004 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0005 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0006 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0007 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0008 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0009 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0010 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0011 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0012 
                 * 
               
               
                   
                 0013 
                 * DIGITAL INPUTS 
               
               
                   
                 0014 
                 * 
               
             
          
           
               
                 0000 
                 0015 
                 ENABL 
                 EQU 
                 2 
                 ENABLE SWITCH 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0016 
                 TOP 
                 EQU 
                 3 
                 ELEVATOR AT TOP 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0017 
                 BOTH 
                 EQU 
                 4 
                 ELEVATOR AT BOTTOM 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0018 
                 HOME 
                 EQU 
                 5 
                 MOTOR HOME (NOT RUNNING) 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0019 
                 CARNP 
                 EQU 
                 6 
                 CARRIER IN PLACE 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0020 
                 SPCAR 
                 EQU 
                 7 
                 SLIDE IN CARRIER 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0021 
                 PC1 
                 EQU 
                 8 
                 1ST QUEUE PHOTOCELL 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0022 
                 PC2 
                 EQU 
                 9 
                 2ND QUEUE PHOTOCELL 
                 0000 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0023 
                  * 
                  0000 
               
               
                   
                 0024 
                 * DIGITAL OUTPUTS 
                 0000 
               
               
                   
                 0025 
                 * 
                 0000 
               
             
          
           
               
                 0000 
                 0026 
                 UP 
                 EQU 
                 2 
                 ELEVATOR DIRECTION 
                    0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0027 
                 RNMTR 
                 EQU 
                 3 
                 RUN MOTOR 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0028 
                 YELIT 
                 EQU 
                 4 
                 WARNING LIGHT 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0029 
                 AIR 
                 EQU 
                 5 
                 TRACK AIR 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0030 
                 BRK1 
                 EQU 
                 6 
                 1ST QUEUE BRAKE 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0031 
                 BRK2 
                 EQU 
                 7 
                 2ND QUEUE BRAKE 
                 0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0032 
                 BRK3 
                 EQU 
                 8 
                 TOUNGE BRAKE 
                 0000 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0033 
                 * 
                 0000 
               
               
                   
                 0034 
                 * BIT FLAGS 
                 0000 
               
               
                   
                 0035 
                 * 
                 0000 
               
             
          
           
               
                 0000 
                 0036 
                 FEED2 
                 EQU 
                 58 
                 FEED FLAG SEGMENT 2 
                   0000 
               
               
                 0000 
                 0037 
                 FEED4 
                 EQU 
                 26 
                 FEED FLAG SEGMENT 4 
                 0000 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0038 
                 * 
                 0000 
               
               
                   
                 0039 
                 * DEFINE ENTRY POINTS 
                 0000 
               
               
                   
                 0040 
                 * 
                 0000 
               
             
          
           
               
                 0000 
                 0004 
                 0041 
                 DC 
                 SEG1 
                  0000 
               
               
                 0001 
                 0030 
                 0042 
                 DC 
                 SEG2 
                 0001 
               
               
                 0002 
                 006A 
                 0043 
                 DC 
                 SEG3 
                 0002 
               
               
                 0003 
                 008F 
                 0044 
                 DC 
                 SEG4 
                 0003 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0045 
                 * 
                 0003 
               
               
                   
                 0046 
                 * SEGMENT 1 - FIRST QUEUE 
                 0003 
               
               
                   
                 0047 
                 * 
                 0003 
               
             
          
           
               
                 0004 
                 8808004C 
                 0048 
                 SEG1 
                 REQST 
                 SLICE(PC1) 
                   
                 2 
                 0004 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0049 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 0004 
               
               
                 0006 
                 80008018 
                 0050 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 SL020 
                 ONE HERE ALREADY 
                   
                 0006 
               
               
                 0008 
                 8428A991 
                 0051 
                   
                 INCR 
                 ABUSY,=1 
                 PREPARE FOR SLICE 
                 2 
                 0008 
               
               
                 000A 
                 88008005 
                 0052 
                   
                 TURN 
                 AIR(ON) 
                   
                   
                 0010 
               
               
                 000C 
                 88008006 
                 0053 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK1(ON) 
                 TURN ON BRAKE 
                 2 
                 0012 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 0054 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                    0012 
               
               
                 0008 
                 8808004F 
                 0055 
                   
                 ACKN 
                 RECPT(PC1) 
                   
                 0014 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0056 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0014 
               
               
                 0010 
                 8000801C 
                 0057 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S1030 
                 GO PROCESS 
                 0016 
               
               
                 0012 
                 88000006 
                 0058 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK1(OFF) 
                 NOT COMING - TRY AGAIN 
                 0018 
               
               
                 0014 
                 88080030 
                 0059 
                   
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                 CHECK AIR 
                 0020 
               
               
                 0016 
                 80008004 
                 0060 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 SEG1 
                   
                 0022 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0061 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0022 
               
               
                 0018 
                 88008006 
                 0062 
                 S1020 
                 TURN 
                 BRK1(ON) 
                 SURPRISE SLICE - HOLD IT 
                 0024 
               
               
                 001A 
                 8000801E 
                 0063 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S1040 
                   
                 0026 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0064 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0026 
               
               
                 001C 
                 88D80030 
                 0065 
                 S1030 
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                   
                 0028 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0066 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0028 
               
               
                 001E 
                 88000050 
                 0067 
                 S1040 
                 READY 
                 SAFE RELEASE 
                   
                 0030 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0068 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0030 
               
               
                 0020 
                 88000006 
                 0069 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK1(OFF) 
                   
                 0032 
               
               
                 0022 
                 88008007 
                 0070 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK2(ON) 
                 PREPARE SEGMENT 2 
                 0034 
               
               
                 0024 
                 84288001 
                 0071 
                   
                 INCR 
                 ABUSY,=1 
                   
                 0036 
               
               
                 0026 
                 88008005 
                 0072 
                   
                 TURN 
                 AIR(ON) 
                   
                 0038 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0073 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0038 
               
               
                 0028 
                 88080052 
                 0074 
                   
                 ASSUR 
                 EXIT(PC1) 
                   
                 0040 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0075 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0040 
               
               
                 002A 
                 AC00C005 
                 0076 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =5 
                   
                 0042 
               
               
                 002C 
                 B8070030 
                 0077 
                   
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                   
                 0044 
               
               
                 002F 
                 80008004 
                 0078 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 SEG1 
                   
                 0046 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0079 
                 * 
                 0046 
               
               
                   
                 0080 
                 * SEGMENT 2 - SECOND QUEUE 
                 0046 
               
               
                   
                 0081 
                 * 
                 0046 
               
             
          
           
               
                 0030 
                 8809004C 
                 0082 
                 SEG2 
                 REQST 
                 SLICE(PC2) 
                   
                     0048 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0083 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0048 
               
               
                 0032 
                 80008040 
                 0084 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S2000 
                 ONE ALREADY HERE 
                 0050 
               
               
                 0034 
                 E4288001 
                 0085 
                   
                 INCR 
                 ABUSY,=1 
                 PREPARE - BRAKE ALREADY ON 
                 0052 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0086 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0052 
               
               
                 0036 
                 8809004E 
                 0087 
                   
                 ACKN 
                 RECPT(PC2) 
                   
                 0054 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0088 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0054 
               
               
                 0038 
                 80008044 
                 0089 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S2010 
                 GO PROCESS 
                 0056 
               
               
                 003A 
                 88000007 
                 0090 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK2(OFF) 
                 NOT COMING 
                 0058 
               
               
                 003C 
                 88080030 
                 0091 
                   
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                   
                 0060 
               
               
                 003F 
                 80008030 
                 0092 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 SEG2 
                 TRY AGAIN 
                 0062 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0093 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0062 
               
               
                 0040 
                 88008007 
                 0094 
                 S2000 
                 TURN 
                 BRK2(ON) 
                 SURPRISE SLICE - HOLD IT 
                 0064 
               
               
                 0042 
                 80008046 
                 0095 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S2020 
                   
                 0066 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0096 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0066 
               
               
                 0044 
                 88080030 
                 0097 
                 S2010 
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                   
                 0068 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0098 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0068 
               
               
                 0046 
                 E40387FF 
                 0099 
                 S2020 
                 INCR 
                 BUSY,=1 
                 SET MYSELF NOT BUSY FOR THIS TEST 
                 0070 
               
               
                 0048 
                 AC01800A 
                 0100 
                 S2030 
                 CHNG 
                 MONTR,=10 
                 SEE IF OK TO FEED SLICE 
                 0072 
               
               
                 004A 
                 AC00C001 
                 0101 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =1 
                   
                 0074 
               
               
                 004C 
                 A4035448 
                 0102 
                   
                 TJNE 
                 FEED2(ON),S2030 
                   
                 0076 
               
               
                 004E 
                 E4038001 
                 0103 
                   
                 INCR 
                 BUSY,=1 
                 THROUGH WITH LOOP-SET BUSY AGAIN 
                 0078 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0104 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0078 
               
               
                 0050 
                 88000050 
                 0105 
                   
                 READY 
                 SAFE RELEASE 
                   
                 0080 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0106 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0080 
               
               
                 0052 
                 A403505A 
                 0107 
                   
                 TJME 
                 FEED2(OFF), S2040 
                 CHECK AGAIN 
                 0082 
               
               
                 0054 
                 94004002 
                 0108 
                   
                 SET 
                 GATED(CLOSE) 
                 TELL SEGB SLICE NOT COMING NOW 
                 0084 
               
               
                 0056 
                 48006801 
                 0109 
                   
                 SET 
                 GATED(CLOSE) 
                   
                 0086 
               
               
                 0058 
                 80008046 
                 0110 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S2020 
                   
                 0088 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0111 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0088 
               
               
                 005A 
                 80008018 
                 0112 
                 S2040 
                 TURN 
                 BRK3(ON) 
                 PREPARE SEG3 
                 0090 
               
               
                 005C 
                 80000007 
                 0113 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK2(OFF) 
                   
                 0092 
               
               
                 005E 
                 14218011 
                 0114 
                   
                 INCR 
                 ABUSY,=1 
                   
                 0094 
               
               
                 0060 
                 14008005 
                 0115 
                   
                 TURN 
                 AIR(ON) 
                   
                 0096 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0116 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0096 
               
               
                 0062 
                 88090052 
                 0117 
                   
                 ASSUR 
                 EXIT(PC2) 
                   
                 0098 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0118 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0098 
               
               
                 0064 
                 A800C005 
                 0119 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =5 
                   
                 0100 
               
               
                 0066 
                 88000030 
                 0120 
                   
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                   
                 0102 
               
               
                 0068 
                 80008030 
                 0121 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 SEG2 
                 RECYCLE 
                 0104 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0122 
                 * 
                 0104 
               
               
                   
                 0123 
                 * SEGMENT 3 - ELEVATOR &amp; TOUNGE BRAKE 
                 0104 
               
               
                   
                 0124 
                 * 
                 0104 
               
             
          
           
               
                 006A 
                 8806004C 
                 0125 
                 SEG3 
                 REQST 
                 SLICE(0) 
                 NO SENSOR AVAILABLE HERE 
                     0106 
               
               
                 006C 
                 88000000 
                 0126 
                   
                 NOOP 
                   
                   
                 0108 
               
               
                 006E 
                 84288001 
                 0127 
                   
                 INCR 
                 ABUSY,=1 
                 PREPARE - BRAKE ALREADY ON 
                 0110 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0128 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0110 
               
               
                 0070 
                 88000048 
                 0129 
                   
                 ACKN 
                 RECPT(0) 
                 NO SENSOR AVAILABLE HERE 
                 0112 
               
               
                 0072 
                 88000000 
                 0130 
                   
                 NOOP 
                   
                   
                 0114 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0131 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0114 
               
               
                 0074 
                 A8018016 
                 0132 
                   
                 CPHG 
                 MOMTR,=15 SECS 
                   
                 0116 
               
               
                 0076 
                 AC00C014 
                 0133 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =2 SECS 
                   
                 0118 
               
               
                 0078 
                 88000008 
                 0134 
                   
                 TURN 
                 BRK3(OFF) 
                   
                 0120 
               
               
                 007A 
                 AC00C003 
                 0135 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =3 
                   
                 0122 
               
               
                 007C 
                 88080030 
                 0136 
                   
                 SUBR 
                 CKAIR 
                   
                 0124 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0137 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0124 
               
               
                 007E 
                 F4288001 
                 0138 
                   
                 INCR 
                 COUNT,=1 
                 ADD SLICE TO COUNT 
                 0126 
               
               
                 0080 
                 88008002 
                 0139 
                   
                 TURN 
                 UP(ON) 
                 STEP ELEVATOR UP 
                 0128 
               
               
                 0082 
                 88008003 
                 0140 
                   
                 TURN 
                 RNMTR(ON) 
                   
                 0130 
               
               
                 0084 
                 AC00C002 
                 0141 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =2 
                   
                 0132 
               
               
                 0086 
                 94050003 
                 0142 
                   
                 DIDO 
                 HOME(OFF),RNMTR(OFF) 
                   
                 0134 
               
               
                 0088 
                 AC050400 
                 0143 
                   
                 SENSE 
                 HOME(ON) 
                 WAIT TILL THE STEP IS COMPLETED 
                 0136 
               
             
          
           
               
                 008A 
                 98003801 
                 0144 
                          SET 
                 PRCSS(OFF) 
                 TURN OFF PROCESS BIT - RETURN TO IDLE 
                 2 
                 0138 
               
               
                 008C 
                 8C00706A 
                 0145 
                 JUMP 
                 SEG3 
                   
                   
                 0140 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0146 
                 * 
                 0140 
               
               
                   
                 0147 
                 * SEGMENT 4 - CARRIER MANAGEMENT 
                 0140 
               
               
                   
                 0148 
                 * 
                 0140 
               
             
          
           
               
                 008F 
                 E4038788 
                 0149 
                 SEG4 
                 INCR 
                 BUSY,=1 
                  SET MYSELF NOT BUSY 
                 0142 
               
               
                 0090 
                 AC288010 
                 0150 
                   
                 CHNG 
                 ABUSY,=0 
                 INITIALIZE AIR  BUSY 
                 0144 
               
               
                 0092 
                 AC288000 
                 0151 
                   
                 CHNG 
                 COUNT,=0 
                 ADD SLICE COUNTER 
                 0146 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0152 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0146 
               
               
                 0094 
                 AC01800A 
                 0153 
                 S4000 
                 CHNG 
                 MONTR,=10 
                 SET MONITOR 
                 0148 
               
               
                 0096 
                 AC00C001 
                 0154 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =1 
                   
                 0150 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0155 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0150 
               
               
                 0098 
                 90060006 
                 0156 
                 S4010 
                 SJMG 
                 CARNP(OFF),S4030 
                 CHECK ON CARRIER 
                 0152 
               
               
                 009A 
                 90060004 
                 0157 
                   
                 TURN 
                 YEILD(ON) 
                 CARRIER GONE - TURN ON LIGHT 
                 0154 
               
               
                 009C 
                 90060001 
                 0158 
                   
                 SET 
                 FEED4(OFF) 
                 STOP FEEDING 
                 0156 
               
               
                 009E 
                 9003000C 
                 0159 
                   
                 SJDE 
                 TOP(OFF), S4020 
                 SEE IF ELEVATOR IS AT TOP 
                 0158 
               
               
                 00A0 
                 AC0180C8 
                 0160 
                   
                 CHNG 
                 MONTR,=20 SECS 
                 ALLOW TIME TO RAISE ELEVATOR 
                 0160 
               
             
          
           
               
                 00A2 
                 AC00C001 
                 0161 
                 S4015 
                 DELAY 
                 =1 
                 KEEP DRIVE ON IN SPITE OF SEG3 
                 1 
                 0162 
               
               
                 00A4 
                 AC008012 
                 0162 
                   
                 TURN 
                 UP(ON) 
                   
                   
                 0164 
               
               
                 00A6 
                 AC008003 
                 0163 
                   
                 TURN 
                 RNMTR(ON) 
                   
                   
                 0166 
               
               
                 00A8 
                 AC030412 
                 0164 
                   
                 SJNE 
                 TOP(ON),S4015 
                   
                 1 
                 0168 
               
               
                 00AA 
                 88000003 
                 0165 
                   
                 TURN 
                 RNMTR(OFF) 
                   
                 1 
                 0170 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 0166 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0170 
               
               
                 00AC 
                 AC01800A 
                 0167 
                 S4020 
                 CHNG 
                 MONTR,=10 
                 WAIT FOR BUTTON TO BE PUSHED 
                 0172 
               
               
                 00AE 
                 AC00C001 
                 0168 
                   
                 DELAY 
                 =1 
                   
                 0174 
               
               
                 00B0 
                 900204AC 
                 0169 
                   
                 SJNE 
                 ENABL(ON),S4020 
                   
                 0176 
               
               
                 00B2 
                 88000004 
                 0170 
                   
                 TURN 
                 YELIT(OFF) 
                   
                 0178 
               
               
                 00B4 
                 8000809B 
                 0171 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S4010 
                 SEE IF CARRIER IS THERE 
                 0180 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0172 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0180 
               
               
                 00B6 
                 900700C8 
                 0173 
                 S4030 
                 SJNE 
                 SFCAR(OFF),S4050 
                 SEE IF ANY SLICES IN CARRIER 
                 0182 
               
               
                 00B8 
                 90040002 
                 0174 
                   
                 SJNE 
                 BOTH(OFF),S4040 
                 SEE IF ELEVATOR AT BOTTOM 
                 0184 
               
               
                 00BA 
                 AC0180C8 
                 0175 
                   
                 CHNG 
                 MONTR,=20 SECS 
                 ALLOW TIME TO DRIVE HOME 
                 0186 
               
               
                 00BC 
                 80000002 
                 0176 
                   
                 TURN 
                 UP(OFF) 
                 SET ELEVATOR TO GO DOWN 
                 0188 
               
               
                 00BF 
                 88008003 
                 0177 
                   
                 TURN 
                 RMMTR(ON) 
                   
                 0190 
               
               
                 00C0 
                 94040403 
                 0178 
                   
                 DIDO 
                 BOTH(ON), RNMTR(OFF) 
                 STOP DRIVE HOME 
                 0192 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0179 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0192 
               
               
                 00C2 
                 90000001 
                 0180 
                 S4040 
                 SFT 
                 FEED4(ON) 
                 START FEEDING TO CARRIER 
                 0194 
               
               
                 00C4 
                 AC208080 
                 0181 
                   
                 CHNG 
                 COUNT,=0 
                 ZERO SLICE COUNT 
                 0196 
               
               
                 00C6 
                 80008094 
                 0182 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S4000 
                 RECYCLE 
                 0198 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0183 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0198 
               
               
                 00C8 
                 802A8011 
                 0184 
                 S4050 
                 COMP 
                 COUNT,=17 
                 CHECK ON SLICE COUNT 
                 0200 
               
               
                 00CA 
                 80006000 
                 0185 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S4060 
                 .LT. 
                 0202 
               
               
                 00CB 
                 80008010 
                 0186 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S4060 
                 .GT. 
                 0204 
               
               
                 00CE 
                 88008004 
                 0187 
                   
                 TURN 
                 YELIT(ON) 
                 .EQ. TURN WARNING LIGHT ON 
                 0206 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0188 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0206 
               
               
                 00D0 
                 90030494 
                 0189 
                 S4060 
                 SJNE 
                 TOP(ON),S4000 
                   
                 0208 
               
               
                 00D2 
                 90005001 
                 0190 
                   
                 SET 
                 FEED4(OFF) 
                 CARRIER AT TOP - START FEEDING 
                 0210 
               
               
                 00D4 
                 80008004 
                 0191 
                   
                 TURN 
                 YELIT(ON) 
                 TURN LIGHT ON ANYWAY 
                 0212 
               
               
                 00D6 
                 80008044 
                 0192 
                   
                 JUMP 
                 S4000 
                 RECYCLE 
                 0214 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0193 
                 * 
                   0214 
               
               
                   
                 0194 
                 * SUBROUTINE CHECK ON AIR TRACK 
                 0214 
               
               
                   
                 0195 
                 * 
                 0214 
               
             
          
           
               
                 00D8 
                 84288788 
                 0196 
                 SKAIR 
                 IMCR 
                 ABUSY,=−1 
                 DECREMENT AIR BUSY FULL 
                 0216 
               
               
                 00DA 
                 80288001 
                 0197 
                   
                 COMP 
                 ABUSY,=1 
                 SEE IF AIR IS STILL BUSY 
                 0218 
               
               
                 00DC 
                 88000015 
                 0198 
                   
                 TURN 
                 AIR(OFF) 
                 .LT. NOT BUSY - TURN OFF AIR 
                 0220 
               
               
                 00DE 
                 88000034 
                 0199 
                   
                 RETRN 
                   
                 .GT. EXIT 
                 0222 
               
               
                 00E0 
                 88000034 
                 0200 
                   
                 RETRN 
                   
                 .EQ. EXIT 
                 0224 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 0201 
                 * 
                 0224 
               
               
                   
                 0202 
                 * MACHINE DATA SECTION 
                 0224 
               
               
                   
                 0203 
                 * 
                 0224 
               
             
          
           
               
                 002A 
                   
                 0204 
                   
                 MDDMY 
                 HWMN+4*HWMS 
                 STANDARD DATA WORKS 
                 0042 
               
               
                 002A 
                 0000 
                 0205 
                 COUNT 
                 DC 
                 0 
                 SLICE COUNT IN CARRIER 
                 0042 
               
               
                 002B 
                 0000 
                 0206 
                 ABUSY 
                 DC 
                 0 
                 AIR TRACK BUSY FLAG 
                 0043 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0207 
                 * 
                   
                   
                   
                 0043 
               
               
                 002C 
                   
                 0208 
                   
                 END 
                   
                   
                 0044 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     PARTITIONING—GLOBAL SUBROUTINE MODIFICATION FOR SLUGGISH MACHINES 
     Computer control of machines which are comprised of electro-mechanical devices depends on the response time required by the devices. In order to allow a longer time interval for more sluggish machines to respond to the computer commands, the global subroutines REQUEST WORKPIECE, illustrated in FIGS. 3A-D, and ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT, illustrated in FIGS. 3E and F, are modified. In the modified embodiment, some of the flag testing done in REQUEST WORKPIECE is moved into ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT, as illustrated in FIGS. 11A-F, respectively. This allows the segment to issue the commands to prepare for receipt of a workpiece earlier in time than in the normal case. The result is slightly faster and more reliable transport between work stations, due to the earlier time in the transport sequence for commanding the machine&#39;s electro-mechanical devices to prepare for processing. 
     UNSAFE MACHINES WITHOUT SAFE POSITIONS 
     Some machines in the assembly line are inherently “unsafe” to the workpieces which enter them for processing if the workpiece remains in the machine for an extended length of time. For example, in a semiconductor wafer manufacturing assembly line, at certain work stations chemical applications on semiconductor slices (workpieces) are heat cured or baked. It is detrimental to the wafer to cure the slice for too long or too short a time. Broken or failed machines downstream may cause workpiece stoppages, for indefinitely long periods and hence if the workpiece had to remain at the curing station for lack of “safe” place to go downstream, it would be damaged. 
     One method of correcting this situation would be to provide a “safe” position in each “unsafe” machine so that workpieces would have a “safe” place to go if a downstream machine were tied up for an extended period of time. This method is not always practical: firstly, safe stations take up physical space on the assembly line without contributing a positive work step to the workpiece and secondly, the assembly line may be constructed and then at some later date it is realized that a machine which was considered safe at the outset turns out in fact to be an unsafe machine. 
     In the latter case, correction of the problem may be extremely costly and require disassembly and reassembly of the entire assembly line. 
     In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a computer routine is utilized to prevent a workpiece from entering an “unsafe” work station until the closest “safe” work station downstream is vacant; the “safe” work station is not necessarily a specially provided “safe” position as described above. In this manner, the workpiece is processed at the “unsafe” work station for an exact time and then proceeds to the “safe” station regardless of downstream conditions. The “unsafe” station will then remain empty until any bottleneck conditions are removed. The routine fits the organization of the already described system and can be used selectively so that only certain machines need be affected by this special case. 
     Accordingly, a contiguous string of work stations is defined with “unsafe” followed by “safe” work stations so that the number of “safe” work stations is at least equal the number of “unsafe” work stations. Each machine procedure accumulates the number of workpieces presently contained in the machine; the machine&#39;s procedure segments may share this task. Before allowing a new workpiece to enter the first “unsafe” station, wait until the number of workpieces in the string is less than the number of “safe” stations. 
     CONVENTIONS 
     All machines involved allocate the first three words of MDATA, in the COMMON area (after the last segments work area and before any other common data or variable data). 
     Word  1  is used to accumulate the machine&#39;s current inventory of workpieces (incremented as a workpiece enters the machine, decremented as a workpiece exits the machine). 
     Word  2  (non zero only for upstream machine in the string) specifies acceptable number of safe stations in the string. 
     Word  3  (non zero only for upstream machine in the set). 
     HWMNY specifies the number of machines in the set. 
     Each segment corresponding to the work stations in the string calls the subroutine before entering REQST WORKPIECE GLOBAL SUBROUTINE (or equivalent). 
     One segment of each machine counts by sensing the number of workpieces present in the machine. Each segment of the procedure either increments the number on receipt of a workpiece, or decrements on release of a workpiece. 
     The subroutine does nothing for all calling segments of machines other than the first one in the string, but returns control to the caller through Module Service. 
     When called from the first machine, it searches the MDATA of downstream machines, according to the number specified, accumulating a total count of workpieces present by summing the number of workpieces in each of the machines. It also checks that each machine is on-line. 
     If any machine in the string is off-line, or if the total count is greater than or equal to the specified safe number, the program forces a wait condition. 
     When there is space to safely introduce a new workpiece, as indicated by all machines on-line and total number of workpieces less than the safe number, control returns to Module Service program and thence to the procedure segment. The procedure segment may safely accept a new workpiece. 
     Referring to FIG. 12, on entry, the COMMON area data word  3  is obtained  900  and tested for zero  901 . If zero, control returns to point MODCM in Module Service for return to the calling procedure segment. If non-zero (indicating the first machine in the string), the segment work are GLADR and GLPLA are set to indicate this subroutine and interrupts are masked  902 . The number of machines in the string is retained as a counter and a branch instruction into the subroutine executed  903 . The machine BUSY flag is decremented  904  and control goes to point EXIT in Module Service  905 . This EXIT returns control to the next step on the next polling interval. The machine&#39;s MOMR is set  906  for a reasonable time and the TIMER tested for negative  907  indicating machine off-line. An off-line condition passes control back to step  905 , comprising a delay of one interval. When the machine is on-line  907 , the machine&#39;s workpiece count is added to a total and the registers are set to the downstream machine  908 . The count of machines is incremented and tested  909 ; until the count is zero control returns to step  907 . When all specified machines have been examined  909 , the accumulated total is compared to the specified safe number. If the total is greater than or equal to the safe number, control returns to step  905  for another one interval delay. When the total is less than the safe number, the machine&#39;s BUSY flag is incremented, the work areas GLADR and GLPLA are reset to zero  911 , and control passes to Module Service at point MODCM  912  for return to the calling procedure segment. 
     ASSEMBLER DEFINITION 
     FILE PREPARATION 
     One file consisting of two major parts composes the heart of the 
     ASSEMBLER: 
     1. Symbol table build area; and 
     2. Instruction definition area. 
     This one file contains ASSEMBLER information pertaining to the specific definition of input source language and output object code. The symbol table prebuild area describes the OP codes and assembler directives recognized by the ASSEMBLER, and a copy of this particular area constitutes a preload of the symbol table at assembly time. The instruction definition area contains information pertaining to syntax and instruction subfield definitions. 
     The first step toward assembler definition (required only for the first definition) is to allocate space for the ASSEMBLER DEFINITION FILE on the  2310  disk. Use the IBM TSX DUP function ‘STOREDATA’ to allocate 11 sectors in the fixed area with name ‘DEFIL’ (see IBM 1800 Time-Sharing Executive System, Operating Procedures, Form C26-3754-3 for specifics). After this task is accomplished, the next step is to prepare the data for assembler definition; i.e., fabricate card decks for 
     1. Symbol table build; and 
     2. Instruction definition build. 
     The symbol table build is required to preload the symbol table with OP code mnemonics and other key words while the instruction definition build provides the data required to ‘assemble’ each instruction. 
     SYMBOL TABLE BUILD 
     The ASSEMBLER uses the concept of a generalized symbol table; i.e., OP codes and assembler directives will reside in the symbol table along with all program symbolic variables and constants. This approach requires only one access method to identify and locate all symbols, and is in contrast to having a separate table (and access method) for labels, another for OP codes, another for references, etc . . . 
     The generalized symbol table also fulfills the flexibility requirements imposed upon the ASSEMBLER more easily than the multitable approach. A definition of special symbols such as OP code mnemonics, assembler directives, etc. merely requires that they reside in the symbol table at the time the assembly is initiated. Thus, a preloading of these ‘specidl keywords’ into the symbol table provides a flexible recognition scheme. Note that these keywords are not forbidden symbols to the user. At assembly time a preload of the symbol table from disk file DEFIL is executed before processing source text. To build a preload of the symbol table requires for each instruction a mnemonic and a number: 
     a. OP code mnemonic—Maximum length is five (5) alphanumeric characters, the first of which is non-blank alphabetic. 
     b. OP code number—The OP code number is associated with the user defined mnemonic and must be restricted to a positive non-zero integer in the range  1  OP code number  128  (numbers 128 and greater are reserved for assembler directives). OP code numbers must begin with one (1) and be assigned sequentially. 
     Since assembler directives are permanently programmed into the ASSEMBLER, the following assignment is generated internally by the ASSEMBLER. The list in TABLE XVI is given as reference. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVI 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 ASM Direct Mnemonic 
                 Op Code Number 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ORG 
                 128 
                 Origin 
               
               
                 MODE 
                 129 
                 Program mode 
               
               
                 EQU 
                 130 
                 Symbolic equate 
               
               
                 DC 
                 131 
                 Define constant 
               
               
                 LIST 
                 132 
                 List control 
               
               
                 HDNG 
                 133 
                 List control 
               
               
                 BSS 
                 134 
                 Block starting storage 
               
               
                 BES 
                 135 
                 Block ending storage 
               
               
                 BSSE 
                 136 
                 Block starting even storage 
               
               
                 BSSO 
                 137 
                 Block starting odd storage 
               
               
                 END 
                 138 
                 End of source text 
               
               
                 ENT 
                 139 
                 Enter point description 
               
               
                 ABS 
                 140 
                 Absolute relocation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 description 
               
               
                 MDATA 
                 141 
                 Machine data block 
               
               
                   
                   
                 identification 
               
               
                 MDUMY 
                 142 
                 Machine dummy data block 
               
               
                 CALL 
                 143 
                 MODE 1 subroutine call 
               
               
                 REF 
                 152 
                 Declares a symbol as 
               
               
                   
                   
                 externally defined 
               
               
                 DEF 
                 153 
                 Declares a symbol as 
               
               
                   
                   
                 an external definition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 KEY WORDS FOR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 PARSING 
               
               
                 R 
                 144 
                 Register 
               
               
                 C 
                 145 
                 Mask, clear 
               
               
                 S 
                 146 
                 Mask, save 
               
               
                 RC 
                 147 
                 Register, mask, clear 
               
               
                 RS 
                 148 
                 Register, mask, save 
               
               
                 ON 
                 149 
               
               
                 OFF 
                 150 
               
               
                 X 
                 151 
                 Indexing 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     To prepare the card deck for symbol table build, determine all OP code mnemonics that are desired in the source language and assign them sequential numbers starting with 1. Punch the deck according to the following format noting that comments may be appended in columns 21-80 to enhance documentation. Behind this deck place one (1) blank card. Note that the ASSEMBLER checks for the proper sequence of OP code numbers. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Mnemonic 
                 Op Code Number 
                 Comments  
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 CARD FORMATS FOR SYMBOL TABLE BUILD 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Cols 1-6 
                 8-10 
                 21-80 
               
               
                   
                 Format A2 
                 I3 
                 A2 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 EXAMPLE OF SYMBOL TABLE BUILD 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (1) 
                 (10) 
                 (21)  
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 LOAD 
                 1 
                 Load register 
               
               
                   
                 STORE 
                 2 
                 Store register 
               
               
                   
                 ADD 
                 3 
                 Add to register 
               
               
                   
                 SUB 
                 4 
                 Subtract from register 
               
             
          
           
               
                 BLANK  CARD  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The above example shows the make-up of a source language of four (4) instructions; load, store, add and subtract. Note the proper sequence of the OP code numbers. 
     The next step for assembler definition is to prepare the card deck for instruction definition build. 
     INSTRUCTION DEFINITION BUILD 
     In the ASSEMBLER flexibility in recognition is accomplished by the generalized symbol table approach. Following recognition machine language instruction must be composed. The information required to ‘assemble’ the instruction resides in the Instruction Definition Area (IDA). 
     The IDA is built following symbol table build and remains unchanged until a redefinition is executed. Two types of cards are required to accomplish IDA build: 
     1. Instruction composition header card; and 
     2. Instruction composition data card. 
     The following information appears on the instruction composition header card and will be defined in INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPOSING CARD DECKS: 
     a. Mnemonic—The mnemonic must correspond to the one specified in Symbol Table Build. 
     b. OP Code Number—The OP code number must agree with the OP code number specified in the Symbol Table Build. 
     c. OP Code—This is a positive integer number in the range 0&lt;OP code≦63 which is to be assembled into the instruction as the operation code. 
     d. Mode Specification—Indicates in which mode the instruction is valid. The valid range is 1≦Mode spec≦3. 
     e. Relocation Test Type—Specifies relocation type information required to accompany the assembled instruction in a relocatable object module. Valid codes range 0-1. 
     f. Instruction Core Allocation—Specifies the number of 16 bit words required by the machine instruction. The valid range is 0-4. 
     g. P 2  Text Flag—Describes the required processing of the instruction in pass  2 . The valid range is 0≦P 2  TF≦2. 
     h. Syntactic Type—Specifies a standard syntax type (parse routine number) to which the variable field must conform. 
     i. Number of Fields in Instruction Composition—This is a count of the number of subfields which make up the instruction. Valid range is 1≦count≦9. 
     Other information contained in IDA pertains to the format and immediate information to be assembled into the instruction; these parameters belong to the Instruction Composition Data Cards and are listed below: 
     a. Mode Number—Specifies that the following information is to be used when the instruction is assembled in this mode. Valid range: 1≦mode #≦3. 
     b. Number of Bits in the Subfield—Valid range: must be less than the number of bits in the instruction. A summation of all subfield lengths plus the OP code field is checked to be equivalent to the instruction core allocation. 
     c. Field Code—Specifies that the following data is either an operand number or immediate data to be assembled into the instruction. Valid range: 1≦code≦8. 
     d. Operand Number or Data—A positive non-zero integer constant specifying the operand number, which is the link between the data in the instruction variable field and the format for that field (number of bits in the subfield), or an integer constant to be interpreted as immediate data. 
     Note the card formats for instruction definition build that follows. A description of the items shown on the card images also follows so as to provide a basis for composing the deck. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 CARD FORMATS FOR INSTRUCTION DEFINITION BUILD 
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION COMPOSITION HEADER CARD  
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Mode 
                 Relocation 
                 Instr. 
               
               
                 Mnemonic 
                 Op Code # 
                 Op Code 
                 Spec 
                 Test Type 
                 Core Alloc.  
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Cols 1-6 
                 8-10 
                 18-20 
                 30 
                 40 
                 50 
               
               
                 Format A2 
                 I3 
                 I3 
                 I1 
                 I1 
                 I2  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Syntactic Type 
                 # Field in Instruction Composition  
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 68-70 
                 80 
               
               
                   
                 I3 
                 I1  
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION COMPOSITION DATA CARD 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Mode 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Field 
                   
               
               
                 Num 
                 # Bits 
                 Field Code 
                 Data 
                 # Bits 
                 Code 
                 Data  
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Cols 1 
                 4-5 
                 10 
                 11-15 
                 19-20 
                 25 
                 26-30 
               
               
                 Format I1 
                 I2 
                 I1 
                 I5 
                 I2 
                 I1 
                 I5  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Note data groups of three are repeated through column 75 then continuation to the next card starting in column 5 is valid when more than 5 subfields are described. 
     INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPOSING DATA DECKS 
     The following steps should be followed in composing the card deck for instruction definition build: 
     Step 1 
     Fill in mnemonic and OP code number (these two fields are exact copies of the first two fields in symbol table build). 
     Mnemonic—The mnemonic is the symbol in the source test that is recognized as and translated into the operation code. 
     OP Code Number—The OP code number is NOT the OP code but is used to provide the link between the mnemonic (in symbol table) and data for generating the object code (in IDA) for that mnemonic. 
     Step 2 
     Fill in the OP code, mode specification, relocation test type, instruction core allocation, and P 2  text flag. 
     OP Code—The operation code is specified as a decimal number and is associated with the above mnemonic. 
     Mode Specification—The mode spec denotes in which mode(s) of operation the instruction is valid. (See discussion of mode under assembler directive MODE in Assembler Usage). 
     1 instruction valid in MODE  1  only 
     2 instruction valid in MODE  2  only 
     3 instruction valid in both MODE  1  and  2 . 
     Relocation Test Type—The relocation test type is used by the object code generator in pass  2 . It specifies for MODE  1  relocatable programs what test is to be applied to the instruction to determine whether the operand should be marked as requiring relocation or not requiring relocation. 
     0 Test relocatable operand flag (set during parsing): If on, mark as relocatable If off, mark as absolute 
     1 unconditionally mark as absolute 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Parse Routine 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Number 
                 Use 
                 Syntax 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Special Instructions: 
                 &lt;D&gt; | &lt;B&gt;, &lt;B&gt; | &lt;A&gt; (&lt;V&gt;) | 
               
               
                   
                 DOUT, DIDO, DICJ, 
                 &lt;A&gt; (&lt;V&gt;), &lt;B&gt; | &lt;A&gt;(&lt;C&gt;), &lt;B&gt; | 
               
               
                   
                 SETF, TSFF, TDIN, 
                 &lt;A&gt; (&lt;V&gt;), &lt;A&gt; (&lt;V&gt;) | &lt;D&gt;, &lt;D&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 SFCJ, INPF, LOAD, 
                 where 
               
               
                   
                 STOR, TWTL, JUMP, 
                 A is a bit or I/O flag 
               
               
                   
                 DELAY, AOUT, 
                 address 
               
               
                   
                 Extended SFT Mnemonics 
                 V is a binary value to 
               
               
                   
                 Super 10 Instructions; 
                 read/write to the address 
               
               
                   
                 SLA, SLT, SRA, SRT, 
                 B core address 
               
               
                   
                 RTE 
                 C bit count 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Ddata 
               
               
                 2 
                 Special Instructions: 
                 &lt;B&gt;, &lt;B&gt; | &lt;B&gt; &lt;B&gt;, = &lt;D&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 CHNG, COMP 
                 where 
               
               
                   
                   
                 B is a core address 
               
               
                   
                   
                 D data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 = indicates immediate operand 
               
               
                 3 
                 No operand. 
               
               
                   
                 Special Instructions: 
               
               
                   
                 CHMD, WAIT 
               
               
                   
                 Super 10 Instructions: 
               
               
                   
                 NOP 
               
               
                   
                 Parse routines 4-7 are used 
               
               
                   
                 with the standard instruction 
               
               
                   
                 set. 
               
               
                 4 
                 2540 Instructions: 
                 Valid instruction modification 
               
               
                   
                 AMH, STH 
                 IMMEDIATE 
               
               
                   
                 Super 10 Instructions: 
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                 MIN 
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Instruction Core Allocation—A decimal integer is given specifying the number of 16 bit words the assembled instruction requires. A maximum value of four (4) is valid. 
     P 2  Text Flag—The pass  2  text flag specifies how the instruction is to be processed in pass  2 . 
     0 Statement requires processing by the P 2  statement process and also is to be printed. 
     1 The statement is to be printed only, it requires no processing in pass  2 . 
     2 Statement requires pass  2  processing but is not to be printed. 
     Note most statements have a code of 0; also printing is conditional upon the current status of the list flag. The list flag provides list control for the assembly as initialized by the LIST user option and as modified by any LIST ON, LIST OFF assembler directives. 
     Step 3 
     Fill in the syntactic type. 
     Syntactic Type—The syntactic type describes to the ASSEMBLER the syntax to be expected in the variable field; the syntactic type, moreover, actually represents the number of a parse routine to be called for analysis of the variable field. Determining the proper routine to parse the variable field is perhaps the most subjective portion in the assembler description because it is not only closely related to the actual hardware operand derivation but also contingent on individual preference. 
     The following descriptions pertain to the specific ASSEMBLER implementation. The standard routines may be augmented or revised as needed (see documentation under Assembler Description). 
     Eight standard parse routines are available. Routines  1 - 3  are used with the special bit pushing instruction,  4 - 7  with  2540  standard instruction set, and  8  and  9  with the super  10  instruction set. 
     EXAMPLES 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 AMH 
                 =1, LOC 
                 Memory increment location by 1 
               
               
                 AMH 
                 1, LOC 
                 Add Reg 1 to LOC, save in LOC 
               
               
                 AMH 
                 1, LOC,* 
                 Add Reg 1 indirect turn LOC, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 save indirect thru LOC 
               
               
                 6 
                 2540 Instructions: 
                 Valid instruction modification 
               
               
                   
                 MH, DH, BC, BLM 
                 IMMEDIATE 
               
               
                   
                 BAS, RIC, ROC, IDBN 
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                 SFT 
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                 Super 10 Instructions: 
                 REGISTER 
               
               
                   
                 LDX, STX 
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXAMPLES 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 BC 
                 7, = LABEL 
                 Branch to Label 
               
               
                 BC 
                 7, LABEL 
                 Branch to address contained in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Label 
               
               
                 BC 
                 7, R(2) 
                 Branch to address contained in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Reg 2 
               
               
                 BC 
                 7, LABEL, * 
                 Go to double word LABEL and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reinitiate the operand derivation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and branch to derived address 
               
               
                 SFT 
                 1, =/A805 
                 Shift left arithmetic Reg 1 five 
               
               
                   
                   
                 places 
               
               
                 SFT 
                 1, 5 
                 Shift according to the shift 
               
               
                   
                   
                 description in LOC 5 
               
               
                 6 
                 Z540 Instructions: 
                 Valid instruction modification 
               
               
                   
                 LH, LTCH, AH, SH 
                 IMMEDIATE 
               
               
                   
                 CH, LOCH, OH 
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                 Super 10 Instructions: 
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                 MDK 
                 MASK, CLEAR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 REGISTER 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, CLEAR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MASK, SAVE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXAMPLES 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 LH 
                 1, = 15 
                 Load Reg 1 with 15 
               
               
                   
                 LH 
                 1, LOC, C(1) 
                 Load Reg 1 using Reg 1 as a mask  
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The above two instructions achieve a logical AND of /000F with the contents of LOC with the result left in Register  1 . 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 LH 
                 1, RC(5, 6) 
                 Load Reg 1 from 5 with mask and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clear operation through Reg 6 
               
               
                 7 
                 2540 Instructions: 
                 Valid instruction modification 
               
               
                   
                 XSW, LSW 
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                 8 
                 Super 10 Instructions: 
               
               
                   
                 Extended BC Mnemonics 
                 IMMEDIATE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                 9 
                 Super 10 Instructions: 
                 DIRECT 
               
               
                   
                 STO, STQ, A, SUB, 
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                 M, D, AND, OR 
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDIRECT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 NO MOD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 INDEXED 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Step 4 
     Complete the instruction composition header card by indicating how many fields there are in the instruction. 
     Number of Fields in Instruction Composition—This positive non-zero integer indicates the number of fields in the instruction. This number minus one is the number of fields to be read from the succeeding instruction composition data cards. Note that any bits not used in the instruction should be included as a field and loaded with zeros. 
     Step 5 
     Fill out instruction composition data cards to complete the assembler definition. The OP code field is not to be included when describing the instruction fields because it is specified (the OP code) in the header card. 
     Mode Number—The mode number indicates for which mode the following instruction composition data applies. If the instruction is valid and has the same format in both modes, the instruction composition data need not be repeated. 
     1 data for MODE  1   
     2 data for MODE  2   
     3 data is to be used for both modes. 
     Number of Bits—This positive non-zero integer defines the field size into which the indicated operand or immediate data is to be placed. Subfields must be specified in the same order as the left to right order in which they appear in the instruction. The data to be placed in this field is checked to be in the range: 0≦data≦2(num of bits)−1. 
     Field Code—As information is extracted from the variable field of the instructions by the parse routines, it is placed in an operand list. Left to right order is preserved in the list such that operand # 1  is the information extracted from the leftmost partition in the instruction variable field, etc . . . 
     The field code is interpreted as follows: 
     1 Data is to be taken directly from the operand as specified by the operand number. 
     2 Treat as immediate data. 
     3 Data is the non-negative quotient of the operand specified by the operand number divided by 16. (operand  16 ). 
     4 Data is the remainder of the operand specified by the operand number divided by 16. (operand module  16 ). 
     5 Data is the logical OR of the left byte of the data itself with operand whose operand number resides in the right byte of the data. 
     6 Data is the value (operand #)+value (operand #+1)−1. 
     7 Data is non-negative. 
     8 Data is in range −2 N ≦Data≦2 N−1 −1. 
     Operand Number or Data—This word is interpreted by the ASSEMBLER as specified by the field code; i.e., it is either a number to be used as an index into the operand list or immediate data word to be inserted directly into the instruction, etc . . . 
     The number of triples (#Bits, field code, data) is repeated on the instruction composition data cards until the instruction has been fully defined. 
     The process may be visualized as producing the linked list data structure illustrated in FIG.  13 . 
     EXAMPLE OF INSTRUCTION DEFINITION BUILD 
     The following example is the completion of the ‘LOAD’ instruction given in the Example of Symbol Table Build. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION COMPOSITION HEADER CARD  
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 (1) 
                 (10) 
                 (20) 
                 (30) 
                 (40) 
                 (50) 
                 (60) 
                 (70) 
                 (80) 
               
               
                 LOAD 
                 1 
                 58 
                 3 
                 1 
                 2 
                 0 
                 1 
                 4  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Mnemonic 
                 LOAD  
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Op Code Num 
                 1 
                 first mnemonic defined in Symbol Table Build 
               
               
                 Op Code 
                 58 
                 operation code 
               
               
                 Mode Spec 
                 3 
                 valid in MODE 1 and 2 
               
               
                 Rel Test Type 
                 1 
                 always absolute 
               
               
                 Instr Core 
                 2 
                 two 16 bit words 
               
               
                 Alloc 
               
               
                 P2 Text Flag 
                 0 
                 require P2 process; also list 
               
               
                 Syntactic Type 
                 4 
                 3 fields will be described in instruction 
               
               
                   
                   
                 composition data  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSTRUCTION COMPOSITION DATA CARD  
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 (1) 
                 (5) 
                 (10) 
                 (15) 
                 (20) 
                 (25) 
                 (30) 
                 (35) 
                 (40) 
                 (45) 
               
               
                 3 
                 7 
                 2 
                 0 
                 3 
                 1 
                 1 
                 16 
                 1 
                 2  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Mode Num 
                 3 
                 This data is used for both MODE 1 and 2 
               
               
                 Num of Bits 
                 7 
                 First field is a dummy 
               
               
                 Field Code 
                 2 
                 take data as immediate 
               
               
                 Data 
                 0 
                 zero the 7 bits 
               
               
                 Num of Bits 
                 3 
                 Second field is for register number 
               
               
                 Field Code 
                 1 
                 use data as an operand number 
               
               
                 Data 
                 1 
                 extract data for this field from operand #1 
               
               
                 Num of Bits 
                 16 
                 Third field is for the core address 
               
               
                 Field Code 
                 1 
                 use data as an operand number 
               
               
                 Data 
                 2 
                 extract data for this field from operand #2  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Note that three fields are described. 
     ASSEMBLER DEFINITION DECK COMPOSITION 
     Composition of the ASSEMBLER card deck is illustrated in FIG.  14 . 
     After the decks have been prepared, call for an assembly definition //XEQ ASM D1 FX followed by the decks just composed. 
     As the definition proceeds, a listing is produced. If, by chance, errors are made in the assembler definition, appropriate diagnostics are inserted into the listing. A list of error codes and errors follows for convenience of reference. 
     Following the listing several statistics are listed concerning storage required, etc. Upon successful completion of the assembler definition phase, the ASSEMBLER is ready for use in the user mode. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 ERROR CODES AND ERRORS 
               
               
                 ASSEMBLER DEFINITION ERRORS 
               
               
                 PART 1  
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 D1 
                 OP CODE NUM TOO LARGE 
               
               
                 D2 
                 OP CODE NUM MUST APPEAR SEQN MONOTONE 
               
               
                   
                 INCREASING 
               
               
                 D3 
                 MNEMONIC MULTIPLY DEFINED 
               
               
                 D14 
                 MNEMONIC MORE THEN FIVE CHARACTERS 
               
               
                   
                 PART II 
               
               
                 D4 
                 NUM OF INSTRUCTIONS DEFINED NOT EQUAL NUM 
               
               
                   
                 OF MNEMONICS IN SYMBOL TABLE BUILD 
               
               
                 D5 
                 MNEMONIC UNDEFINED IN SYMBOL TABLE BUILD 
               
               
                 D6 
                 OP CODE NUM DOES NOT MATCH THAT OF SAME 
               
               
                   
                 MNEMONIC IN SYMBOL TABLE BUILD 
               
               
                 D7 
                 ILLEGAL OP CODE VALUE SPECIFIED 
               
               
                 D8 
                 ILLEGAL SYNTAX TYPE SPECIFIED 
               
               
                 D9 
                 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION CORE ALLOCATION SPECIFIED 
               
               
                 D10 
                 ILLEGAL MODE SPECIFIED 
               
               
                 D11 
                 ILLEGAL MODE NUMBER 
               
               
                 D12 
                 ILLEGAL FIELD CODE 
               
               
                 D13 
                 INSTRUCTION SUBFIELDS DO NOT SUM TO NUM OF 
               
               
                   
                 BITS IN INSTRUCTION CORE ALLOCATION  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     MULTIPLE-SYMBOL TABLES 
     Three steps lead to creation of a symbol table. First, a disk data area is created and named using the TSX dup function *STORE DATA. Second, the default symbol table, DEFIL, used by the ASSEMBLER, is initialized to the desired instruction set. Third, a program is assembled using the ASSEMBLER to add the desired symbols to the instruction set and store the result in the defined area by name. When these steps are accomplished, this symbol table may be referenced on the assembly control card by name and the desired symbols referenced in the program or programs being assembled. 
     Symbol Table SGTAB - This symbol table was created for ease of generating MODE  1  programs, in particular, the module machine service interrupt response program for segmented asynchronous operation. 
     Symbol Table SGMD 2  - This symbol table was created for ease of assembling MODE  2  programs, in particular, segmented procedures and MDATA data blocks for segmented asynchronous operation. 
     ASSEMBLER USAGE 
     JOB CONTROL AND USER OPTIONS 
     An assortment of facilities is available in the ASSEMBLER. One control card must precede each assembly and contains the following fields: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 cols  1-4 
                 Assembler control 
               
               
                   
                 cols  6-9 
                 I/O information and assembly type 
               
               
                   
                 cols 11-20 
                 Name 
               
               
                   
                 cols 21-30 
                 Name 
               
               
                   
                 cols 31-40 
                 Name 
               
               
                   
                 cols 41-80 
                 User options 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The ASSEMBLER control field must contain one of the following directives: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 @ ASM 
                 indicates an assembly control card 
               
               
                   
                 @ END 
                 indicates end of all assemblies 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The I/O information and assembly type field must contain one of the following: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 PROC 
                 Mode 2 machine program 
               
               
                   
                 DATA 
                 Mode 2 machine data 
               
               
                   
                 SUPR 
                 Supervisor or Mode 1 program 
               
               
                   
                 TEST 
                 Any other program not requiring disk storage 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     PROC, DATA, SUPR assume disk space is required for program storage, while TEST does not. TEST is used as a de-bugging facility or as support for an off-line since the only output obtainable is a program listing and a punched binary deck. 
     The Name fields are used to indicate file references within the spec system. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When assembling PROC, DATA, SUPR the assembly control cards may be stacked in any order and terminated by a @END, an example of which is illustrated in FIG.  15 A. 
     When using TEST, only one program is assembled per execution of the ASSEMBLER as illustrated in FIG.  15 B. 
     The options field is free form with the options separated by commas. The following assembly options may be chosen: 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 TEST  
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 LIST 
                 LIST PROGRAM 
               
               
                 CROSS 
                 CROSS REFERENCE SYMBOLS 
               
               
                 PRINT 
                 PRINT SYMBOL TABLE 
               
               
                 *SAVE NAME1 
                 SAVE SYMBOL TABLE AS SYSTEM SYMBOL 
               
               
                   
                 TABLE WITH NAME ‘NAME1’ 
               
               
                 *SYMTB 
                 PRELOAD SYSTEM SYMBOL TABLE ‘NAME1’ 
               
               
                 NAME1 
               
               
                 PUNCH 
                 PUNCH OBJECT DECK  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     *The system symbol table name is optional. If no name is specified the default is to ‘DEFIL’. The user may create as many files on the  2310  disk as is desired for use as multiple system symbol tables. Each file should be 3520 words long; further, it is the user&#39;s responsibility to assure that a save to the system symbol table has been executed before it is used. 
     PROC, DATA, SUPR 
     Same options as under TEST 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 STORE 
                 STORE OBJECT MODULE 
               
               
                 EDIT 
                 ASSEMBLE AND EDIT SOURCE TEXT AND STORE 
               
               
                   
                 OBJECT MODULE  
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     PROGRAM INPUT 
     Source text is input from disk if PROC, DATA or SUPR assembly types are specified, while the card reader is used as the input device if the TEST is specified. If the EDIT function is used, the update source text is read from cards and merged with the original source text from disk. 
     PROGRAM OUTPUT 
     The assembler produces three optional forms of hardcopy: 
     (a) Program listing - The source text is listed together with the assembled code, location counter in hexadecimal and decimal, and line number in decimal. Included in the listing is time and date. 
     (b) Symbol table - The final state of the symbol table is produced with symbols appearing alphabetically. Also with each symbol is its defining core location and attribute (A-absolute, B-relocatable, X-external, E-entry point, U-undefined, and M-multiply defined). 
     (c) Cross reference - Each symbol is listed alphabetically with the line number where it is defined. A list of all the line numbers where the symbol is referenced follows. Any external or undefined symbols are so indicated. 
     EDIT FUNCTION 
     The edit feature may be used only when source text input is from disk (PROC, DATA, SUPR). The update deck is read from the card reader and consists of both edit directives and source statements. An edit directive card is distinguished by an −(minus) in column 1. Three basic edit features are supported: 
     (a) Insert - The source cards are inserted following the line number specified on the edit directive card. 
     (b) Delete - The source statements inclusive of the line numbers specified on the edit directive are removed. 
     (c) Delete/Insert - The source statements inclusive of the line numbers specified are deleted, and the source statements that follow are inserted. 
     Consider the following example: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 //JOB 
                 X  X 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 //XEQ 
                 ASM 
                 FX 
               
               
                   
                 @ASM 
                 SUPR 
                 EXAMP 
                 EDIT,LIST 
               
               
                   
                 −10 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LH 
                 1,LOC 
               
               
                   
                 −15,20 
               
               
                   
                 −30,40 
               
               
                   
                   
                 STH 
                 1,LOC 
               
               
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 1,=MASK 
               
               
                   
                   
                 STH 
                 1,LOC + 1 
               
               
                   
                 −END 
               
               
                   
                 @END 
               
               
                   
                 //END 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Note that this is an assembly of a MODE  1  program with name EXAMP. User Options are EDIT and LIST. 
     The update deck begins with the card containing −10 and ends with the edit terminator −END. 
     The first edit function is to insert the load half instruction after line number 10. The second function specifies delete lines 15 through 20 (if any source cards had followed, it would have been a delete/insert function). The third function is a delete/insert. The −END terminates the edit function. 
     The  @ END specified that no more assemblies are required while the //END terminates the TSX Non Process Monitor. 
     Several rules apply to the edit function. First, all references are made by line number; these line numbers reference the original source test, not the new text that is being created. Second, the referencing of line numbers must be in ascending order; i.e., there can be no ‘backup’ over the source text to edit a portion of the source text that has already been processed. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 SYNTAX 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 CHARACTER SET 
               
               
                   
                 The allowable character set recognized by the ASSEMBLER 
               
               
                   
                 is as follows: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Numeric 
                 0-9 
               
               
                   
                 Alpha (Special) 
                 A-Z, &amp;, $, #, @ 
               
               
                   
                 Operators Delimiters 
                 ., ,, +, −, *, (,), /, ′ 
               
               
                   
                 DATA TYPES 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Four data types are utilized in the ASSEMBLER: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1 
                 decimal 
               
               
                   
                 2 
                 hexadecimal 
               
               
                   
                 3 
                 symbolic 
               
               
                   
                 4 
                 character 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     A decimal data type is represented by any combination of numeric characters (which may be preceded by sign) in the range of −32768≲ range ≲+32768. 
     A hexadecimal data type is represented by any combination of four (4) or less numb numeric or alphanumeric subset (A, B, C, D, E, F) characters preceded by a slash (/). If less than four characters appear the datum is right justified. 
     A symbolic data type is five (5) or less alphanumeric characters, the first of which being alpha (special). As used in this discussion, the word symbol is used synonomously with the word identifier. A special case of symbolic data recognized by the ASSEMBLER is the ‘*’, which is used to denote the current value of the location counter. The location counter always contains the address of the current instruction; i.e., it is incremented after the instruction is assembled. 
     A character data type is represented by two or less characters enclosed in quotes (‘). The data type causes two ASCII characters per word to be generated, and in the case that less than two characters are specified the word is filled on the right with ASCII blanks. Note that a code of zero (0) is inserted for # and  @ . Care is used when including the quote (‘) as character data. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 “ 
                 yields 
                   
               
               
                   
                 ‘ “ 
                 yields 
                   
               
               
                   
                 ‘“‘ 
                 yields 
                 “ 
               
               
                   
                 “+‘ 
                 yields 
                 ‘+ 
               
               
                   
                 “‘ 
                 yields 
                  [The quote is treated as a comment]. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     OPERATORS 
     The following binary operations are valid in the ASSEMBLER: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 + 
                 addition 
               
               
                   
                 − 
                 subtraction 
               
               
                   
                 * 
                 multiplication 
               
               
                   
                 / 
                 division 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     In addition, + and − may be used as unary operators. Note that exponentiation is undefined. 
     REWRITING RULES 
     Expressions are formed using data types, operators, and a set of rewriting rules. These rules are given below in BNF notation. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 &lt;E&gt; ::= &lt;T&gt; | &lt;E&gt; + &lt;T&gt; | &lt;E&gt; − &lt;T&gt; 
                   
               
               
                 &lt;T&gt; ::= &lt;P&gt; | &lt;T&gt; * &lt;P&gt; | &lt;T&gt; / &lt;P&gt;) 
               
               
                 &lt;P&gt; ::=&lt;λ&gt;|&lt;μ&gt; &lt;λ&gt;|(&lt;E&gt;)| μ  ( &lt;E&gt; ) where 
               
               
                   
                 λ denotes any data 
               
               
                   
                 type 
               
               
                   
                 μ denotes any unary 
               
               
                   
                 operator 
               
               
                   
                 P denotes a prime 
               
               
                   
                 T denotes a term 
               
               
                   
                 E denotes an 
               
               
                   
                 expression 
               
               
                   
                 | denotes the 
               
               
                   
                 connective OR 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXPRESSION EVALUATION 
     Expression evaluation is left canonical; i.e., 
     1 all terms are evaluated from left to right 
     2 a running total of evaluated terms is maintained to yield the expression evaluation. 
     EXAMPLES OF VALID EXPRESSIONS 
     The following are examples of legal expressions: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Example 
                 Interpretation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 /100 
                 100 16   
               
               
                   
                 100//100 
                 100 10 /100 16   
               
               
                   
                 10 * /10 
                 10 10  * 10 16   
               
               
                   
                 10 * * 
                 10 * LOC CNTR 
               
               
                   
                 10 + −5 
                 10 + (−5) = 10 − 5 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Parentheses may be nested to any level (until a table in the ASSEMBLER overflows). four levels of partntheses can be handled adequately in most cases. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 4 − (((5))) 
                 4-5 
               
               
                   
                 LABL1 − 2 * (*−3) 
                 LABL1 minus twice the value of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 location counter minus 3 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXPRESSION RELOCATION PROPERTIES 
     Expressions must be classified by type: either relocatable or absolute. The user must be certain that there is no ambiguity as to type. The following rules are used to evaluate expression type. Any alteration from these rules will be flagged as a relocation error by the ASSEMBLER. 
     The following operations are unconditional errors: 
     where 
     A—absolute 
     R—relocatable 
     (1) A/R 
     (2) R/A 
     (3) R*R 
     (4) R/R 
     The following is a description of the results of valid operations: 
     (1) R±A→R 
     (2) aR±R→(a±1)R 
     (3) A*R→aR 
     where a denotes an absolute coefficient 
     In general the end result of an expression evaluation must yield aR where 
     a=1, valid relocatable expression 
     a=0, valid absolute expression 
     a&gt;1, relocation error 
     a&lt;0, relocation error 
     The * when used to denote the location counter assumes the relocation property of the assembly itself. 
     A symbol that has been equated to an expression (by means of the EQU assembler directive) assumes the same relocation property as that of the expression. 
     Decimal or hexadecimal integers assume absolute properties. 
     INSTRUCTION FORMAT 
     The instruction format of the ASSEMBLER is free form. 
     Label Field Op Code Field Variable Field Comment Field 
     If a label is present it must appear in column 1. Thereafter fields are delimited by one or more blanks. In a left to right scan the ASSEMBLER assumes that the first blank terminates a field; thus, there can be no embedded blanks within a field. Continuation of a statement onto succeeding cards is not supported. 
     The op code and variable fields are required, while the comment field is optional. For most statements the label field is optional, but statements (assembler directives) which require a label or absence of a label will be noted appropriately throughout the discussion of assembler directives. 
     ADDRESSING 
     Addressing may take one of two forms in the ASSEMBLER—direct or relative. Once an instruction has been named by placing a symbol in its label field, it is possible for other statements to refer to that instruction by using the same symbol in their variable fields; i.e., direct addressing. It is often convenient, moreover, to reference instructions preceding or following the instruction named by indicating their position relative to that instruction; i.e., relative addressing. A very useful special case of relative addressing is addressing relative to the current value of the location counter (*+10). Note that a relative address is one explicit example of an expression. 
     ASSEMBLER DIRECTIVES 
     Assembler directives are non-executable statements that direct the ASSEMBLER to perform a special task. For example, the ASSEMBLER can define constants, allocate storage, equate symbols, control the listing, etc. The following sections describe the specific facilities of the ASSEMBLER available to the user as directives. 
     MODE REQUIREMENTS 
     Programs to be assembled by the ASSEMBLER fall into two major categories: 
     (1) MODE  1  or supervisory programs 
     (2) MODE  2  or machine procedures 
     Since certain instructions and assembler directives are not valid in both modes, the mode must be specified to the ASSEMBLER as the first statement (only comments and list control statements may precede it). 
     MODE - Mode description: to specify a MODE  1  program, for example, the user would write in the Op code and Variable fields respectively: 
     
       
         
           MODE  1   
         
       
     
     The ‘MODE’ assembler directive may not be labeled. If a label is present, a non-terminating error message is generated and the label discarded. 
     A default to MODE  2  is performed if the mode is not the first statement or if an error is made in the instruction. 
     RELOCATION REQUIREMENTS 
     The second piece of information the ASSEMBLER requires is program relocation property. Several directives are available for this purpose: 
     (1) ABS—absolute 
     (2) MDATA—absolute 
     (3) ENT—relocatable/absolute 
     ABS—Absolute relocation property: The ABS statement is used only in MODE  1 . Its function is to identify the program as absolute and also to provide the program name. The program name may be five characters in length. 
     
       
         
           ABS . NAME  
         
       
     
     Only one ABS statement is allowed per program, and labels are not allowed. 
     MDATA—Machine data description: The MDATA statement is used only in MODE  2 . Its sole purpose is to identify a program as machine data. The MDATA statement may not be labeled but all statements thereafter (excluding the END statement) require labels. Only one MDATA statement may appear per program; further, it must follow immediately the MODE statement (excluding comments and list control statements). 
     ENT—Entry point specification: The ENT statement is used in MODE  1  only to denote a relocatable assembly and also to identify the entry points. Up to 10 entry points may be defined per program. 
     OTHER DIRECTIVES 
     ORG—Origin: The location counter is set to the value of the expression in the variable field if the value resides within a specified core size. ORG is valid only in MODE  1 , and labels are not allowed. 
     EQU—Equate: The label is equated to the value of the expression in the variable field. The label assumes the same relocation property as that of the expression. The variable field must not contain forward references. A label is required. 
     DC—Define Constant: The ASSEMBLER defines a 16 bit constant as specified by the expression in the variable field. Labels are optional. 
     LIST—List control: If the variable field contains ‘ON’ the listing is turned on, if ‘OFF’ the listing is turned off. Labels are not allowed. 
     HDNG—Heading: Slew listing to top of page and print the card image as a page heading. Labels are not allowed. 
     BSS—Block Starting Storage: The number of 16 bit words as specified by the expression in the variable field is allocated. The label, if any, is assigned to the first word in the block. 
     BES—Block Ending Storage: Same as BSS, but the label, if any, is assigned to the first word immediately following the block. 
     BSSE—Block Starting Even Storage: Same as BSS but first word of the block is slewed to the next even address. 
     BSSO—Block Starting Odd Storage: Same as BSS but first word of the block is slewed to the next odd address. 
     END—End: The END directive denotes the end of the assembly. It must appear as the last statement of all assemblies and may not be labeled. The variable field is not scanned. 
     MDUMY—Machine Dummy Data: The MDUMY statement indicates the beginning of a machine dummy data block. Similar to the MDATA, which specifies an actual machine data block, all statements (except the END statement) require labels. MDUMY is valid only in MODE  2 . 
     CALL—Call Subroutine: The CALL statement is valid only in MODE  1  relocatable programs. The variable field contains the subroutine name, which may be the same as an internal symbol. 
     REF—External Symbol Reference: The REF statement is valid only in MODE  1  relocatable programs. The variable field contains a symbol which is to be treated as being defined external to this assembly. The loader will fix up the address to the externally defined symbol. 
     DEF—Define Symbol External: The DEF statement is valid only in MODE  1  relocatable programs. The variable field contains the name of an internally defined symbol which is to be known external to this assembly. The loader will use the external symbol to satisfy REF&#39;s in other assemblies. 
     The comment is denoted by placing an * in column 1. The resulting effect is to have the card image listed; no further assembler processing is performed on the card. 
     THE ASSEMBLER 
     The ASSEMBLER is a two-pass ASSEMBLER. It is designed to permit changing the instruction set on which it operates. It is designed to execute on an IBM 1800 computer with TSX operating system. It may be executed as a stand-alone program (non-process program). 
     The functions of the ASSEMBLER are: 
     1. (Option) Accept as input the description of all instructions to be recognized by the ASSEMBLER. 
     2. Convert instruction mnemonics to machine language. 
     3. Assign addresses to statement labels. 
     4. Decode and convert operand field entries according to the instruction definition. (description) 
     5. Generate object code composed of machine operation code and subfields according to the instruction definition. 
     6. Diagnose errors. 
     To disassociate the ASSEMBLER itself from the source language and object code it is to produce is a departure from standard ASSEMBLER implementation practice. The technique used is to describe both source and object texts to the ASSEMBLER through a linked list data structure (which can be easily modified). Two problems are thus posed to the ASSEMBLER: 
     1. Recognition in source language, and 
     2. After recognition, translation through the appropriate data structure to output object code. 
     Only ASSEMBLER directives are implemented in the conventional “recognition-subroutine call” approach. 
     PROGRAM ORGANIZATION 
     The ASSEMBLER is organized in five parts; an assembler definition, a control record analyzer, pass one, pass two, and an epilog. 
     The assembler definition generates and saves on disk a symbol table describing the instruction set to be implemented by the ASSEMBLER. This is a terminal path through the ASSEMBLER, control is passed back to the operating system. 
     The control record analyzer builds a control vector specifying the options selected on control cards and passes control to Prolog. 
     Pass One begins with a Prolog which initializes core memory for a normal assembly. Optionally, it will compose an edit file from the card reader. This edit file will be merged with the original source text file. 
     The remainder of Pass One adds all new symbols encountered to the symbol table. It reads in source text and scans each card image for labels and op codes. It enters each symbol in the symbol table, assigns addresses for each lavel, allocates core storage for each instruction, and generates and saves “Pass two text”. Optionally, it will add, delete or replace source text as specified in the edit file. It passes control to Pass Two. At the completion of Pass One in the symbol table is completely defined. 
     Pass Two reads in “Pass Two Text” and continues the scan of the card image for operands. It builds each instruction by combining the op code and operands, according to the description contained in the symbol table (instruction defined), and generates and saves on disk an object module. Optionally, it will write source text to disk ( 2311 ). It passes control to the Epilog. 
     The Epilog prints error messages for any errors which occurred during assembly. Optionally, it will print the symbols (labels) encountered during assembly, print a cross reference table for labels, and save the generated symbol table as the system symbol table. Execution of the Epilog terminates the assembly; control is passed back to the operating system. 
     The elementary programs (implemented as subroutines) which perform tasks for the five parts of the ASSEMBLER are described in a section on UTILITIES. 
     PROGRAM OPERATION 
     The ASSEMBLER operates basically in two modes: 
     1. Assembler definition mode, where both the source language and ASSEMBLER machine instructions are described to the ASSEMBLER, and 
     2. User operation mode, where source language programs are assembled. 
     In both categories, the input device is, in the described embodiment, restricted to a card reader (disk input not permitted) and the job must be executed as a non-process batch job. 
     Translation of the instruction: Load−1,100 by the ASSEMBLER is illustrated in FIG.  16 . 
     ASSEMBLER DEFINITION MODE 
     CORE LOAD CHAIN FOR ASSEMBLER DEFINITION 
     The core load for ASSEMBLER definition is shown in TABLE XVII below. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVII 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CORE LOAD NAME 
                 MAINLINE RELOCATABLE NAME 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ASMD1 
                 ASMD 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 ASMD2 
                 ASM2 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 ASMD3 
                 ASM2A 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 ASMD4 
                 INTZL 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 ASM3B 
                 ASM31 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 ASM3A 
                 ASM32 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 FINISH 
                 FINT 
               
               
                 ↓ 
               
               
                 EXIT to non process monitor 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     1. Execution of Assembler Definition (chain or core loads beginning with ASMD1). 
     The “assembler definition” is a collection of programs which perform the following functions. 
     a) Zero the tables, flags and counters which describe the symbol table. 
     b) Enter pre-defined keywords and ASSEMBLER directives as symbol table entries. The algorithm for entering symbols is described in TABLE STRUCTURE, A. Symbol Table B. Hash Table Entries. 
     c) Read a card defining an instruction (by mnemonic). 
     d) Test the mnemonic for five characters or less. 
     e) Test the associated op code number to be monotone sequential increasing, not to exceed 128. 
     f) Enter the mnemonic as a symbol table entry, return to c) until blank card is encountered. 
     g) Save the upper boundary of space allocated for the symbols now in the symbol table and save the count of the number of mnemonics defined. 
     h) Allocate storage for an op code list (a list of pointers, one for each op code to be defined (number of mnemonics entered). 
     i) Perform error checking on each of the following: 
     1. Multiple entries. 
     2. Sequential, monotone increasing input identical to order of mnemonics (already input). 
     3. Op code within limits. 
     4. Syntax type within limits. 
     5. Core allocation within limits. 
     j) Enter the “instruction header” in the next available space in the symbol table and enter the address of the first header word in the op code list. 
     k) Read card(s) (for each allowable mode of this instruction) describing for each field of the instruction the number of bits (field width), and field code number and data word (field composition). 
     l) Allocate and build an instruction composition list for the allowable mode(s) and set pointers for both modes in the instruction header (0 if not allowable mode). 
     m) Return to i) until blank card is detected (mode=0). 
     n) If no errors were detected, set the upper boundary of the symbol table and save it in disk storage. 
     o) Terminate program execution. 
     When assembler definition is successfully completed (no errors), the symbol table contains: 1) a table of pointers linking “similar” symbol entries into chains (see entry algorithm description); 2) entries for each keyword and assembler directive to be recognized by the ASSEMBLER; 3) a list of pointers to the instruction definition for each operation code to be implemented by the ASSEMBLER; and finally 4) entries describing the fields and subfields required, for each instruction. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ASMD 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN Mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Initialize the symbol and calls 
               
               
                   
                 for the preloading of the assembler 
               
               
                   
                 key words. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 XEQ ASMD1  FX which is the 
               
               
                   
                 core load name of which ASMD is the 
               
               
                   
                 mainline. 
               
               
                 Subprogram 
                 KEYAD 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Core loads 
                 ASMD2 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Core load ASMD1 is the first core load of 
               
               
                   
                 a chain of core loads which performs the 
               
               
                   
                 assembly definition. The core load is 
               
               
                   
                 called by the non-process monitor. 
               
               
                 FLOW 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIa. 
               
               
                 CHART 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 KEYAD 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Adds key words to the symbol table 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call KEYAD 
               
               
                 Subprogram 
                 LOAD3 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 To add new keywords to the ASSEMBLER 
               
               
                   
                 requires that a data statement containing 
               
               
                   
                 the mnemonic be added, the array IRAY 
               
               
                   
                 increased by three words per key word, and 
               
               
                   
                 the upper limit on the DO loop increased so 
               
               
                   
                 as to load the whole array IRAY. Also, 
               
               
                   
                 provisions must be added to pass 1 frame 
               
               
                   
                 and pass 2 frame 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIb 
               
               
                 LOAD 3 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Converts symbol to name code, creates a 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table entry and inserts the op code 
               
               
                   
                 number into the TYPE field of the attribute 
               
               
                   
                 word. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LOAD3 (ARRAY, INDEX, OPCODE, 
               
               
                   
                 NUM) 
               
               
                 Subprogram 
                 COMPS, HASH, FXHAS, INSYM, PRNTN 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 ARRAY and INDEX point to the keyword to 
               
               
                   
                 be inserted into the symbol table. The 
               
               
                   
                 OPCODE NUM is inserted into the TYPE 
               
               
                   
                 field of the attribute word. Multiply defined 
               
               
                   
                 symbols are detected here during ASSEM- 
               
               
                   
                 BLER definition. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ASM2 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Initiates building of the symbol table as 
               
               
                   
                 defined by the user. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LINK(ASMD2) is executed in 
               
               
                   
                 ASMD1. ASMD2 is the core load name of 
               
               
                   
                 which ASM2 is the mainline routine. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 IAND, LOAD3. 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 ASMD3 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 ASMD2 is the second core load in the chain. 
               
               
                   
                 The first core Load, ASMD1, loads the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table with the fixed key words and 
               
               
                   
                 symbols. ASMD2 reads the symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 build section of the user&#39;s deck, adds the 
               
               
                   
                 symbols, and produces the listing of the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol added. Error checking includes 
               
               
                   
                 mnemonics greater than 5 characters, 
               
               
                   
                 improper value for op code and non- 
               
               
                   
                 sequential op code number. A count of the 
               
               
                   
                 number of mnemonics read is maintained so 
               
               
                   
                 that a subsequent core load can allocate 
               
               
                   
                 storage for the op code list. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ASM2A 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN Mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Wrap up of loading of the symbol table 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL, LINK(ASMD3) is executed in core 
               
               
                   
                 load ASMD2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 None 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 ASMD4 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 A test is made to determine if any errors 
               
               
                   
                 occurred during the symbol table build, and 
               
               
                   
                 a termination of the assembler definition 
               
               
                   
                 occurs if errors were made. Finally, a 
               
               
                   
                 pointer is set at the end of the symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 so that instruction composition build may 
               
               
                   
                 begin. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIe. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 INTZL 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Prepares for instruction composition build. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL, LINK(ASMD4) is executed in core 
               
               
                   
                 load ASMD3. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ZROP 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 ASM3A 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 INTZL prints headings and calls for the 
               
               
                   
                 zeroing of the op code list. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIf 
               
               
                 ZROP 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Zeros the op code list 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ZROP 
               
               
                 Subprogram 
                 None 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ASM31 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN Mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Reads instruction definition header cards, 
               
               
                   
                 prints header card information, checks for 
               
               
                   
                 errors and calls for the header to be 
               
               
                   
                 built. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LINK (ASM3A) 
               
               
                   
                 ASM3A is the core load name 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CHECK, ISIT, BLDHD 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 FINSH 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 CHECK 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Checks if mnemonic is already in symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL CHECK (Mnemonic, op code 
               
               
                   
                 number, IGOOD 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 COMPS, HASH, FXHAS 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 IGOOD is returned 1 if symbol already 
               
               
                   
                 present 
               
               
                   
                 2 if symbol not present 
               
               
                   
                 3 if symbol present but types not equal 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIi 
               
               
                 BLDHD 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Allocates storage for the instruction 
               
               
                   
                 definition header and formats and inserts 
               
               
                   
                 data into the header. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL BLDHD (Op code number, op code, 
               
               
                   
                 relocation test type, syntactic type, core 
               
               
                   
                 allocation, P2 text flag, base address of 
               
               
                   
                 op code list, address of instruction header. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ASM32 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN Mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Reads and prints instruction composition 
               
               
                   
                 cards and calls for the instruction com- 
               
               
                   
                 position list to be created. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LINK (ASM3B) 
               
               
                   
                 ASM3B is the core load name. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ALBLD 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 ASM3A 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 ASM3A links to ASM3B which links back to 
               
               
                   
                 ASM3A. Both core loads compose the heart 
               
               
                   
                 of the assembler definition. ASM3A 
               
               
                   
                 builds the instruction composition header, 
               
               
                   
                 then links to ASM3B where the instruction 
               
               
                   
                 composition list is composed. A link back 
               
               
                   
                 to ASM3A is executed to process the next 
               
               
                   
                 instruction. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ALBLD 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Allocates storage for the Instruction Com- 
               
               
                   
                 position List, formats and inserts the data 
               
               
                   
                 into the list, and sets pointers in the 
               
               
                   
                 instruction header to the composition lists. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable Area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ALBLD (Number of fields, list of 
               
               
                   
                 number of bits in each field, list of field 
               
               
                   
                 codes, list of data, address of instruction 
               
               
                   
                 header, core allocation required, mode 
               
               
                   
                 number). 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 PRNTN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIl 
               
               
                 ISIT 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Determines type of card read 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ISIT (MNEMONIC, INK) 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 None 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 INK is returned 1 if numeric data 
               
               
                   
                 2 if blank (end) card 
               
               
                   
                 3 alpha data 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIm 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIm 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 FINT 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 FORTRAN Mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Wraps up assembler definition 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LINK (FINSH) 
               
               
                   
                 FINSH is the core load name 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 WRTFL 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Routine checks if any errors have 
               
               
                   
                 occurred and if so aborts the definition; 
               
               
                   
                 it prints statistics concerning core 
               
               
                   
                 requirements; finally it calls for the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table to be written to the 2310 
               
               
                   
                 disk file DEFIL. FINSH is called by 
               
               
                   
                 core load ASM3A. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XVIIIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XVIIIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     USER OPERATION MODE 
     CORE LOAD CHAIN FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY USING THE ASSEMBLER 
     The Core load chain for normal assembly is shown in TABLE XIX below. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XIX 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 CORE LOAD NAME 
                 MAINLINE RELOCATABLE NAME 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 MASM 
                 ASMF 
               
               
                   
                 ↓ 
               
               
                   
                 PASS1 
                 PRQL1 
               
               
                   
                 ↓ 
               
               
                   
                 ASMP2 
                 INIP2 
               
               
                   
                 ↓ 
               
               
                   
                 ASP2A 
                 P2FRM 
               
               
                   
                 ↓ 
               
               
                   
                 EPLOG 
                 EPLG 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     2. Execution of Analyzer 
     The analyzer reads a control card and builds a control vector specifying options for the ASSEMBLER. The options are as follows: 
     1. card input 
     2. disk input 
     3. listing 
     4. use system symbol table 
     5. save symbol table 
     6. punch cards (object deck) 
     7. punch tape (object deck) - Not implemented 
     8. name the program being assembled 
     9. store the program on disk 
     10. edit source text and assemble 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 CONTROL RECORD ANALYZER 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 ASMF 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Mainline Program (FORTRAN) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The program reads, prints and analyzes 
               
               
                   
                 control cards for assemblies. Detection of 
               
               
                   
                 “@END” card, or other than “@ASM” will be 
               
               
                   
                 scanned to pick out program type, program 
               
               
                   
                 name(s), and options. The four program types 
               
               
                   
                 accepted are procedure (PROC), data (DATA), 
               
               
                   
                 supervisory (SUPR), and test (TEST). For 
               
               
                   
                 procedure, data, and supervisory types, the 
               
               
                   
                 program calls subroutine FETFA to find disk 
               
               
                   
                 file and record of source and object code for 
               
               
                   
                 the named program. Subprogram OPTNS is 
               
               
                   
                 called to build a control vector describing 
               
               
                   
                 which options are specified for the assembly. 
               
               
                   
                 The program exits to Pass 1 if no fatal errors 
               
               
                   
                 are detected. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The program is entered either via // XEQ card 
               
               
                   
                 (non-process monitor), or via link from the 
               
               
                   
                 EPILOG of the ASSEMBLER. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 Call FETFA (IFLAG, NAM3(6), NAM2(6), 
               
               
                 called 
                 NAM1(6), IERR) 
               
               
                   
                 where IFLAG = 1, 2, 3 or 4, indicating pro- 
               
               
                   
                 cedure, data, supervisory or test pro- 
               
               
                   
                 gram type, respective; NAM1(6), 
               
               
                   
                 NAM2(6), NAM3(6) each point to arrays 
               
               
                   
                 containing some (10 characters, A2 
               
               
                   
                 format, in reverse array order) read 
               
               
                   
                 from the control card; 
               
               
                   
                 IERR is an error indicator returned by 
               
               
                   
                 the subprogram. 
               
               
                   
                 Call OPTNS (IFLAG, IOPTN, IERR) 
               
               
                   
                 where IFLAG, IERR are described above; 
               
               
                   
                 IOPTN is an array containing the option 
               
               
                   
                 list read from the control card. 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 PASS 1 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 EPILOG links to this program to permit 
               
               
                   
                 batching of assemblies in a job stream. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXa 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 OPTNS 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine (FORTRAN) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine scans an array of options read 
               
               
                   
                 from a control card. The options are in A2 
               
               
                   
                 format, separated by commas, and the option 
               
               
                   
                 field ends with a blank character. The pro- 
               
               
                   
                 gram builds the control vector CONTL used by 
               
               
                   
                 the ASSEMBLBR by setting bits corresponding 
               
               
                   
                 to each option in the option list. If system 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table options appear in the list, the pro- 
               
               
                   
                 gram calls subprogram FINDN to find the file 
               
               
                   
                 and record number corresponding to the symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table name designated in the option list. Error 
               
               
                   
                 conditions detected cause the subroutine to 
               
               
                   
                 return an error flag to the calling program. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The calling sequence is 
               
               
                   
                 Call OPTNS (IFLAG, IOPTN, IERR) 
               
               
                   
                 where IFLAG = 1, 2, 3 or 4, indicating pro- 
               
               
                   
                 cedure, data, supervisory or test pro- 
               
               
                   
                 gram type; 
               
               
                   
                 IOPTN is an array containing the option 
               
               
                   
                 list; 
               
               
                   
                 IERR is an error indicator returned by 
               
               
                   
                 the subroutine. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 Call COMPS (NAME(3), XNAME) 
               
               
                 called 
                 where NAME is an array containing the disk 
               
               
                   
                 file name “DEFlL” and XNAME is 
               
               
                   
                 returned as the truncated packed 
               
               
                   
                 EBCDIC equivalent. 
               
               
                   
                 Call FLISH (XNAME, IDAT(3)) 
               
               
                   
                 where XNAME is described above, and IDAT 
               
               
                   
                 is the three word FLET entry corres- 
               
               
                   
                 ponding to XNAME. 
               
               
                   
                 Call FINDN (IOPTN, I, IWCV, ISAV) 
               
               
                   
                 where IOPTN is described above; I points to a 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table named in the option list; 
               
               
                   
                 IWCV and ISAV are the word count and 
               
               
                   
                 sector address returned by FINDN, 
               
               
                   
                 corresponding to the symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 named in the option list. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The option list is limited to 40 characters. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 FETFA 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine searches the 2311 file access system to 
               
               
                   
                 obtain the file and record number of source text and 
               
               
                   
                 object code for programs named in the calling sequence. 
               
               
                   
                 The file and record numbers, as well as the program 
               
               
                   
                 name, are stored in a fixed area in INSKEL/COMMON. 
               
               
                   
                 Error messages are typed and an error indicator 
               
               
                   
                 returned when errors are detected. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call FETFA, (IFLAG, NAM3(6), NAM2(6), NAM1(6), 
               
               
                   
                 IERR) 
               
               
                   
                 where IFLAG = 1, 2, 3 or 4 for procedure, data, 
               
               
                   
                 supervisory, or test program type, respectively; 
               
               
                   
                 NAM1, NAM2, NAM3 are arrays containing 
               
               
                   
                 program names (A2 format, 10 characters, 
               
               
                   
                 reversed order, plus one word); 
               
               
                   
                 IERR is an error indicator returned by the sub- 
               
               
                   
                 routine. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL ISRCH 
               
             
          
           
               
                 called 
                 DC PNTR 
                 location of index block 
               
               
                   
                 DC BLOCK 
                 points to index block to search 
               
               
                   
                 DC ENTRY 
                 desired entry in block 
               
               
                   
                 DC F 
                 file number of entry 
               
               
                   
                 DC R 
                 record number of entry 
               
               
                   
                 CALL RDRC 
               
               
                   
                 DC LIST 
                 identification of disk I/O area 
               
               
                   
                 DC F 
                 file number 
               
               
                   
                 DC R 
                 record number 
               
               
                   
                 CALL KDISK 
               
               
                   
                 DC LIST 
                 identification of disk I/O area 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 returns value in A-register; zero for busy, negative 
               
               
                   
                 for error. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 For information regarding file structure see  2311   
               
               
                   
                   FILE ACCESS SYSTEM.  (Barbour/Fox) For infor- 
               
               
                   
                 mation regarding FLOPS list structures, see  FLOPS.   
               
               
                   
                 (Barbour/Fox). 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The subroutine is intended for use with the 2311 FILE 
               
               
                   
                 ACCESS SYSTEM, using lists compatible with FLOPS. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXc 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 FIEND (DFALT) 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine. 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To find the word count and sector address named in 
               
               
                   
                 the calling sequence. If the named file cannot be found 
               
               
                   
                 in FLET, the program defaults to the word count and 
               
               
                   
                 sector address for “DEFIL”. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL FIEND (IBUFR(5), IWC, ISA) 
               
               
                   
                 where IBUFR is an array containing the name of a file 
               
               
                   
                 to be found in FLET (A1 format, five characters); 
               
               
                   
                 IWC is the word count for the file; 
               
               
                   
                 ISA is the sector address for the file 
               
               
                   
                 or (Alternate Entry Point) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL DFALT (IBUFR(5), IWC, ISA) 
               
               
                   
                 where IWC, ISA are returned with the word count and 
               
               
                   
                 sector address for “DEFIL”. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL COMPS (NAME1, NAME2) 
               
               
                 Called 
                 where NAME1 is a five character name in A2 format 
               
               
                   
                 NAME2 is returned as the truncated packed 
               
               
                   
                 EBCDIC equivalent of the name. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL FLTSH (NAME, DSA) 
               
               
                   
                 where NAME contains a FLET entry (truncated 
               
               
                   
                 packed EBCIDC) 
               
               
                   
                 and DSA is returned as the three word FLET 
               
               
                   
                 entry for NAME 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXd 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXd 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 FINDN 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive subroutine (FORTRAN) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine finds and returns a word count and 
               
               
                   
                 sector address for a program named in an option list. 
               
               
                   
                 The address of the option list (array) and a pointer 
               
               
                   
                 (array subscript) to the name appear in the calling 
               
               
                   
                 sequence. The pointer points to either a “SAVE” or 
               
               
                   
                 “SYMTAB” and the program looks for a name, a 
               
               
                   
                 comma (no name mentioned), or the end of the array. 
               
               
                   
                 If no name is found, the program defaults to the symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table named “DEFIL”. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL FINDN (IOPTN, I, IWC, ISA) 
               
               
                   
                 where IOPTN is the array containing the option list; 
               
               
                   
                 I is the array subscript denoting the symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 option specified; 
               
               
                   
                 IWC, ISA are the word count and sector address 
               
               
                   
                 corresponding to the designated symbol table file. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL FIEND (IBUFR(5), IWC, ISA) 
               
               
                 Called 
                 where IBUFR is an array containing the name of a 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table file; 
               
               
                   
                 IWC, ISA are the word count and sector address 
               
               
                   
                 corresponding to the file. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL DFALT, (IBUFR(5), IWC, ISA) 
               
               
                   
                 where IBUFR, IWC, ISA are described above. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXe 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 DFALT 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Gets the file and sector address of the DEFIL symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL DFALT 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 DEFIL is used as default option, if no symbol table is 
               
               
                   
                 specified in ASSEMBLER control cards. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXf 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     3. Execution of Prolog (Pass One) 
     The Prolog is entered from the Analyzer. It performs the following functions: 
     a) Read in the initialized symbol table from disk (restricted to keywords and instruction definitions, plus system symbols if requested). 
     b) Zero the flags, stacks and pointers used by PASS  1  and PASS  2 . 
     c) Initialize the Pass  2  text buffer (maintained by Pass  1 ). 
     d) If Edit option was specified, read control and data records from cards, build an edit file, and initialize the edit control vector. 
     e) Transfer control to PIDIR, the Pass  1  directive program. 
     4. Execution of Pass One 
     Pass One is a collection of programs which perform the following functions: 
     a) Read and process each card image (one at a time from card stream, disk source file, or edit file as specified. 
     b) Scan to the first field on the card image (ignore leading blanks). This field may be a label or an asterisk, if the field begins in column one of the card; or the op code, in which case it must begin after column one. 
     c) If the first field encountered is a label, enter it in the symbol table, assigning the next available location to it, and scan to the next field on the card image. 
     d) Test for op code or assembler directive. Process appropriately, as described below. Error detection results generally in no further processing of the card. The following assembler directives are processed in Pass One: 
     1) MODE n 
     This should be the first non-list-control card. Set Mode  1  or  2  as specified. If no mode is specified, default to Mode  2 . Er 
     Error condition detected: Illegal mode specified. 
     2) ENT and DEF 
     Set program type to relocatable, if Mode  1 . Increment the number of entries. 
     Error condition detected: Permitted only n Mode  1 ; conflict in type specification; exceeds maximum number of entries. 
     3) ABS 
     Set program type absolute. 
     Error conditions detected; Permitted only in Mode  1 . conflict in type specification. 
     4) MDATA 
     Set flag: all further statements must be labelled, up to END statement. 
     Error conditions detected: Permitted only in Mode  2 ; conflict in type specification. 
     5) END 
     Set END flag to terminate Pass One. 
     6) HDNG 
     No processing, set flag for Pass Two processing. 
     7) LIST 
     No Processing, set flag for Pass Two processing. 
     8) BSS, BES, BSSE, BSSO 
     Update location assignment as specified. 
     Error conditions detected: Variable field syntax error; relocation type error. 
     9) EQU 
     Evaluate operand field and assign value to label. 
     No forward reference allowed. 
     Error conditions detected: Statement must be labelled; relocation error. 
     10) ORG 
     Evaluate operand field and set location counter as specified. 
     No forward reference allowed. 
     Error conditions detected: Permitted in Mode  1  only; relocation error due to specified origin; Negative location due to specified origin. 
     11) DC 
     No processing, set flag for Pass Two processing. 
     12) MDUMY n 
     Evaluate operand field and assign to location counter. 
     Set flag that all further statements must be labelled data statements, up to END statement. 
     Error conditions detected: Permitted only in Mode  2 ; only one MDUMY statement per assembly; relocation error on specified origin; negative location due to specified origin. 
     13) CALL AND REF 
     Evaluate operand field and enter symbol in variable field in the symbol table. Mark as defined, external symbol. Save external reference in external reference list. Error conditions detected: Permitted only in Mode  1 , relocatable programs; variable field syntax error. 
     Note that no further processing is required for MODE, MDATA, BSS, BES, BSSE, BSSO, EQU, ORG statements. 
     14) instructions 
     For all op codes, allocate the next available core location(s) beginning on an even address as specified in the instruction definition from the symbol table. Error conditions detected: Unrecognizable op code; op code not allowed in this mode. 
     e) Build the “Pass Two Text” by combining current values of 
     1) Location assignment counter 
     2) Error indicator 
     3) Op code number (or assembler directive number). 
     4) “Pass Two Text flag”, specifying type of processing required in Pass Two. 
     5) Pointer to the next column to be scanned in the source record (for card scan). 
     6) Source text (card image, alpa humeric string). 
     f) Write the “Pass Two text” to disk non-process work storage. 
     g) Transfer control to Pass Two. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 PROLI 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Mainline 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Initializes tables, pointers, stacks, flags, etc. for 
               
               
                   
                 assembly. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call LINK (PROLI) 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 DISKN, CUTB, STRIK, UPDAT, RDBIN, READC, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 UPDAT, PIDIR, TYPEN. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 PROLI is called from the control record analyzer. 
               
               
                   
                 After initialization, Pass 1 processing begins by 
               
               
                   
                 calling PIDIR. 
               
               
                   
                 Control never returns to PROLI. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIa 
               
               
                 PIDIR 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Routine absorbs initial assembler directives 
               
               
                   
                 MODE, ENT, MDATA, ABS. 
               
               
                   
                 It also processes any initial comments or list 
               
               
                   
                 control directives. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call PIDIR 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 NCODE, MOD1, INSP2, WRTP2, READC, ENT1, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 ABS1, MDAT1, ERRIN, FRAM1. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 FRAM1/FRA1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Basic framework for Pass 1. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call FRAM1 or Call FRA1 
               
               
                 Co-routines 
                 ORG1, EQU1, DC1, LIST1, HDNG1, BSS1, BES1, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 BSSE1, BSSO1, END1, MDUMI1, CALL1, OPCD1. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 LABPR, INSP2, WRTP2, READC, DISKN, ERRIN, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 CHEKC, GETNF. 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 ASMP2 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 FRAM1 is the primary Loop comprising Pass 1 
               
               
                   
                 From here service routines such as the label 
               
               
                   
                 processor (LABPR), assembler directives, op 
               
               
                   
                 code processor (OPCD1) process the source text. 
               
               
                   
                 On detecting an end card, a call to Pass 2 
               
               
                   
                 (ASMP2) is executed. FRA1 is the entry point by 
               
               
                   
                 the service routines to re-enter the Pass 1 frame, 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIc 
               
               
                 UPDAT 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Reads and formats the edit source text. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call UPDAT 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 SAVEC, CARDN, HOLEB, TOKEN, ERRIN, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 DISKN, FTCHE, NXEDT. 
               
               
                 Core Loads 
                 EPLOG 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If errors are detected in the edit source text or if 
               
               
                   
                 the edit file overflows, a call to EPLOG is 
               
               
                   
                 executed. An edit code is inserted as a header 
               
               
                   
                 with each edit directive card. Also a From and 
               
               
                   
                 Thru address is inserted as specified on each 
               
               
                   
                 edit directive card. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXId 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 LABPR 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 label processing. It marks the 
               
               
                   
                 attribute and guarantees the definition reference 
               
               
                   
                 is at the end of the reference chain. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call LABPR 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 MOVER, ERRIN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIe 
               
               
                 OPCD1 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Pass 1 processing of op codes 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call OPCD1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ERRIN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-routines 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Instructions are placed on even boundaries 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIf 
               
               
                 NCODE 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Calls for processing 4 comments and list control 
               
               
                   
                 assembler directives HDNG and LIST 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call NCODE 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 GETNF, HDNG1, LIST1, INSP2, WRTP2, READC, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 ERRIN 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 MOD1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Pass 1 processing of MODE assembler directive. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call MOD1. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 TESTL, GETNF, ERRIN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 MODE is originally processed by PIDIR. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIh 
               
               
                 ORG1/EQU1 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Pass 1 processing of ORG and EQU assembler 
               
               
                   
                 directives. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call ORG1 or Call EQU1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ERRIN, GETNF, EXPRN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-Routine 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 ORG and EQU allow no forward references. 
               
               
                 Flowchart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIi 
               
               
                 DC1 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of the DC assembler 
               
               
                   
                 directives. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call DC1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 Home 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-routine Called 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The token pointer is saved for Pass 2. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 HDNG/LIST1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provide Pass 1 processing of list control directives 
               
               
                   
                 HDNG1 AND LIST1 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call HDNG1 and Call LIST1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 TESTL 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-routines Called 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 No registers are saved 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIk 
               
             
          
           
               
                 BSS1/BES1/BSSE1/BSSO1 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Co-routines 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provide Pass 1 processing for assembler directives 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 BSS 
                 block starting storage 
               
               
                   
                 BES 
                 block ending storage 
               
               
                   
                 BSSE 
                 block starting storage even 
               
               
                   
                 BSSO 
                 block starting storage odd 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call BSS1, BES1, BSSE1, BSSO1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 PSHRA, GETNF, EXPRN, POPRA 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-routines Called 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This set of assembler directives is processed by a 
               
               
                   
                 tightly knit package. These directives are totally 
               
               
                   
                 processed in Pass 1 where core allocation is made. 
               
               
                   
                 No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 ABS1 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of ABS assembler 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call ABS1 
               
               
                   
                 Subprograms 
                 TESTL, ERRIN 
               
               
                   
                 Called 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 ABS is originally processed by PIDIR. No 
               
               
                   
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIm 
               
               
                   
                 ENTI 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of ENT assembler 
               
               
                   
                   
                 directive. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call ENT1 
               
               
                   
                 Subprograms 
                 TESTL, ERRIN 
               
               
                   
                 Called 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 ENT is originally processed by PIDIR. No 
               
               
                   
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIn 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIm 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 MDAT1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of MDATA assembler 
               
               
                   
                 directive. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call MDAT1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 TESTL, ERRIN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 There is no Pass 2 processing of this directive. 
               
               
                   
                 No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIo 
               
               
                 CALL1/REF1 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine, Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of the CALL and REF 
               
               
                   
                 assembler directives. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL CALL1 or CALL REF1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ERRIN, GETNF, SVEXT 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-routines Called 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Routine calls SVEXT to accumulate all external 
               
               
                   
                 references. No registers are saved. Both 
               
               
                   
                 assembler directives are processed essentially 
               
               
                   
                 alike. Different error checks are made and REF 
               
               
                   
                 executes a subroutine exit, whereas CALL exhibits 
               
               
                   
                 the co-routine characteristics. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIo 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIp 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 MDUM1/END1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Co-routine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of MDUMY and END 
               
               
                   
                 assembler directives. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call MDUM1 and Call END1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 TESTL, ERRIN, GETNF, EXPRN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Co-routines Called 
                 FRA1 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 END terminates Pass 1 processing by setting the 
               
               
                   
                 end flag. FRAM1 tests this flag and when set calls 
               
               
                   
                 for Pass 2 execution. MDUMY causes the MDUMY 
               
               
                   
                 flag to be set after which every statement (except 
               
               
                   
                 the END) is expected to be labelled. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIq 
               
               
                 DEF1 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Provides Pass 1 processing of DEF assembler 
               
               
                   
                 directive. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call DEF1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ENT1 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The DEF statement is processed in Pass 1 precisely 
               
               
                   
                 as the ENT statement. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIr 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIq 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIr 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 DMES1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Decodes DMES statement text into DC 
               
               
                   
                 instructions, two characters (ASC1) per DC 
               
               
                   
                 instruction. If number of text characters is odd, 
               
               
                   
                 a blank character is added to end the last DC 
               
               
                   
                 Instruction. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 WOFF, TOK1, ERRIN, RGADC, PASON, 
               
               
                 called 
                 CHEKC, FRA2. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Program exits to FRA2. READC is called for 
               
               
                   
                 continuation of DMES onto another card. Illegal 
               
               
                   
                 character, missing or incorrect control 
               
               
                   
                 characters, missing or incorrect continuation 
               
               
                   
                 are detected and error message printed by ERRIN 
               
               
                   
                 subroutine. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Intended for use with PASON and WOFF sub- 
               
               
                   
                 routines to decode DMES statements into DC 
               
               
                   
                 statements. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIs 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIs 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 WOFF 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Writes Pass 2 text to disk (Non Process Working 
               
               
                   
                 Storage) of header and card image of DMES 
               
               
                   
                 instruction. Moves the unpacked card image to 
               
               
                   
                 SAVE area for decomposition into DC instructions. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 INSP2, WRTP2, MOVE, UNPAC 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The Pass Two text header (P2LOC, OPCDN, 
               
               
                   
                 P2FLG) is initialized for DMES instruction. The 
               
               
                   
                 save area is a buffer in COMMON area. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Intended for use with DMES1 and PASON sub- 
               
               
                   
                 routines to decode DMES directive. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIt 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIt 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 PASON 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Inserts “DMES EXPANSION” into the DC state- 
               
               
                   
                 ments resulting from decomposition of a DMES 
               
               
                   
                 statement. This keys the PASS TWO list option 
               
               
                   
                 to suppress printing of the DC statements, printing 
               
               
                   
                 only the DMES statement. Writes each DC 
               
               
                   
                 instruction Pass Two text to disk (Nonprocess 
               
               
                   
                 Working Storage). 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 MOVE, UNPAC, INSP2, WRTP2. 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The Pass Two Text header (P2LOC, OPCDN, 
               
               
                   
                 P2FLG) is initialized for DC instruction, plus 
               
               
                   
                 column pointer for Pass Two scan of expansion 
               
               
                   
                 text. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Intended for use with DMES1 and WOFF subroutines 
               
               
                   
                 to decode DMES directive. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIu 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIu 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     5. Execution of Pass Two 
     Pass Two is a collection of programs which perform the following functions: 
     a) Zero the flags, pointers and buffers used by Pass Two. 
     b) Fetch records (Pass Two Text) from disk, one at a time. Note: Paws Two Text consists of a three-word header and the source card image truncated to the first 74 columns. The three-word header contains location assignment, error indicator, op code number, Pass Two text flag and last card column scanned in Pass One. 
     c) Process the record according to the Pass Two Text Flag. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Value of 
                   
                 Produces 
                 (Option) 
               
               
                 Pass Two 
                 Requires 
                 Object 
                 May be 
               
               
                 Text Flag 
                 Processing 
                 Code 
                 Listed 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 0 
                 Yes 
                 Yes 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 1 
                 No 
                 No 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 2 
                 Yes 
                 Yes 
                 No 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     In certain noted instances the value of the flag may be altered during processing. If no processing is required, skip to k). 
     d) If processing is required, determine if the op code number indicates an assembler directive of instruction. Of the sixteen assembler directives recognized by the assembler, eight are processed completely in Pass One. The other eight require processing in Pass Two; a separate subroutine is provided to process each of the eight as follows: 
     1) HDNG 
     If list option specified, move source text into heading buffer and cause printer to skip to top of new page. This will cause the listing subprogram to print the contents of the heading buffer, with data, time and page number. Ignore if list option is not set. 
     2) LIST 
     Set list option if “ON” is specified; reset list option if “OFF” is specified. 
     3) ABS) ENT) (pname) DEF) 
     Mark (pname) in the symbol table as an external entry point (except for DEF which is marked external) for the program. Set Pass Two Text Flag to one. 
     Error conditions detected: Variable field syntax, if (pname) missing or incorrect; undefined symbol; multiple external declaration of symbol. 
     Note: The Pass Two Text Flag is altered for these directives; the effect is to suppress printing of generated object code when list option is specified (the other fields will still be listed). 
     4) DC 
     The operand field is interpreted as an expression. 
     5) CALL) REF) (xname) 
     Extract the external name called or referenced from the symbol table and store it as the object code for the instruction. Update the external reference list pointer to the next entry. Set Pass Two Text Flag to one. 
     Note: The Pass Two Text Flag is altered for these assembler directives; the effect is to suppress printing of generated object code when list option is specified (the other fields will still be listed). 
     All assembler directives skip to k). 
     e) If the op code number indicates an instruction, the instruction definition (for specified mode) in the symbol table is accessed. 
     f) The syntax type is used to transfer control to a particular parsing subroutine, one for each syntax type. The subroutine “parses” the operand field of the record by continuation of scanning from the last card column scanned in Pass One. The column is the first one after the op code which is the last field detected in Pass One. Operands are detected by recognition of keywords, commas, and parantheses as special delimiters. Scanning is ended when a blank column is detected. Parsing is terminated when a syntax error, relocation type error, or record overrun is detected. Control passes to step i). 
     g) Each field is inserted into an operand list by the parse subroutine. 
     h) Each instruction is built according to its definition in the Instruction Definition Area. Data from the operand list is inserted in the proper subfield of the instruction as specified in the instruction composition list. 
     i) Finally the op code is added to complete the instruction code. 
     j) The completed instruction is added to an object code buffer which is written to disk when full or when a discontinuity in program core allocation is detected. 
     k) The program line number, assigned core location, generated op code source text and appropriate error indication may be listed optionally. 
     l) As an option (STORE or EDIT) the source text may be written back to disk storage (in particular, if editing is performed on the source text, it is desirable to update the source file to agree with the edited results). In this case the Pass Two Text is modified by moving the three-word header to the last three words (corresponding to columns 75-80) of the card image. This modified record (source text followed by header) is written into the source file reserved for the program. 
     m) Fetch the next record from disk. If not an END record, return to c). 
     n) When an END instruction is encountered, control is passed to EPILOG. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 PASS TWO 
                   
               
               
                 INIP2 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Main program (core load name ASMP2) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The program performs initialization for Pass Two 
               
               
                   
                 of the ASSEMBLER. If zeroes flags and resets 
               
               
                   
                 buffer pointers used in Pass Two, initializes page 
               
               
                   
                 and line counters for listings and sets up the first 
               
               
                   
                 page heading. It reads the first record of Pass Two 
               
               
                   
                 Text to initialize the Pass Two Text buffer. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area (INIP2) or core load 
               
               
                   
                 area (ASMP2). 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The program is entered via LINK from core load 
               
               
                   
                 PASS1. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL WRBIN 
                 to initialize write source text 
               
               
                 Called 
                 back 
               
               
                   
                 CALL FITCH2 
                 to get Pass Two Text records 
               
               
                   
                 CALL REPK 
                 to pack source text in A2 format 
               
               
                   
                 CALL RPSVW 
                 to write source text to disk file 
               
               
                   
                 CALL CALEN 
                 to obtain date 
               
               
                   
                 CALL RDTIM 
                 to obtain time of day 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LSTI 
                 to print page heading 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Core Loads 
                 ASP2A 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The program assumes a “common” area as 
               
               
                   
                 described in ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 INOBJ 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To initialize object module header 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL INOBJ 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 ERRIN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This program initializes the object module by 
               
               
                   
                 setting the number of entries, external references, 
               
               
                   
                 program type, binary core allocated in the header. 
               
               
                   
                 It also copies the names of external references 
               
               
                   
                 from EXLST into the header and checks to avoid 
               
               
                   
                 any possible duplication. Pointers to be used by 
               
               
                   
                 WOBJC are set. An error message is inserted if 
               
               
                   
                 a name is not specified for Mode 2 programs. The 
               
               
                   
                 object code buffer and object module buffer can be 
               
               
                   
                 dumped with SSW 3 on. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 P2FRM 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Main Program (core load name ASP2A) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The program determines the type of processing 
               
               
                   
                 required for each card image on the basis of the 
               
               
                   
                 Pass Two Text Flag assigned to Pass One. If 
               
               
                   
                 required, the program calls subroutines to process 
               
               
                   
                 the card image operand field and generate object 
               
               
                   
                 code corresponding to the card image, and also to 
               
               
                   
                 write the object code to disk. 
               
               
                   
                 Optionally, the program will list the card image 
               
               
                   
                 and/or store source text back on disk. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area (P2FRM) or core load 
               
               
                   
                 area (ASP2A). 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The program is entered via LINK from core load 
               
               
                   
                 ASMP2. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL P2STT 
                 to process operand field of card 
               
               
                 Called 
                   
                 image and produce object code. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL WOJBC 
                 to add generated object code to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 object module on disk 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LISTI 
                 to print card image 
               
               
                   
                 CALL REPK 
                 to pack source text in A2 format 
               
               
                   
                 CALL RPSVW 
                 to write source text back to disk 
               
               
                   
                   
                 file 
               
               
                   
                 CALL FTCH2 
                 to obtain the next Pass Two text 
               
               
                   
                   
                 record from disk 
               
               
                   
                 CALL WRBUF 
                 To write the last source record 
               
               
                   
                   
                 back to disk file 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Limitations 
                 The program assumes a “common” area as des- 
               
               
                   
                 cribed with respect to the ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 P2STT 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine is called to process each card 
               
               
                   
                 image that contains an operand field. It calls a 
               
               
                   
                 special subroutine to process each assembler 
               
               
                   
                 directive. For normal instructions it extracts 
               
               
                   
                 from the instruction definition the syntax type 
               
               
                   
                 (parse type) and branches to a parsing subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 (which builds a list of operands from the operand 
               
               
                   
                 field). On return from the parse subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 the values from the operand list are combined into 
               
               
                   
                 the subject code for the instruction, as described 
               
               
                   
                 in the instruction composition list for that 
               
               
                   
                 instruction. Error checking includes counting the 
               
               
                   
                 number of values in the list, appropriate range of 
               
               
                   
                 value depending on field width, and validity of the 
               
               
                   
                 instruction in the specified program mode. Output 
               
               
                   
                 of the subroutine is object code for the instruction 
               
               
                   
                 described on the card image being processed. (If 
               
               
                   
                 errors are detected, an instruction with all zero 
               
               
                   
                 operands is produced). The instruction is saved 
               
               
                   
                 in a “common” variable area. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The subroutine is entered by a CALL P2STT. 
               
               
                   
                 No arguments are required; the subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 assumes the input card image (Pass Two Text) is 
               
               
                   
                 located in buffer IAREA. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Additional Entry Points: 
                 CALL SFAIL 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CALL VFAIL 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CALL RFAIL 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CALL EFAIL 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL DC2 
                 to process “DC” directive 
               
               
                 Called 
                 CALL LIST2 
                 to process “LIST” directive 
               
               
                   
                 CALL HDNG2 
                 to process “HDNG” directive 
               
               
                   
                 CALL ASBS2 
                 to process “ABS” directive 
               
               
                   
                 CALL ENT2 
                 to process “ENT” directive 
               
               
                   
                 CALL CALL2 
                 to process “CALL directive 
               
               
                   
                 CALL PSHRA 
                 to save return address 
               
               
                   
                 CALL POPRA 
                 to return to calling program 
               
               
                   
                 CALL SFAIL 
                 to generate “variable field 
               
               
                   
                   
                 syntax error” message. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL ERRIN 
                 to generate various error 
               
               
                   
                   
                 messages 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS1 
                 to parse for syntax type 1 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS2 
                 to parse for syntax type 2 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS3 
                 to parse for syntax type 3 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS4 
                 to parse for syntax type 4 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS5 
                 to parse for syntax type 5 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS6 
                 to parse for syntax type 6 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS7 
                 to parse for syntax type 7 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS8 
                 to parse for syntax type 8 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2RS9 
                 to parse for syntax type 9 
               
               
                   
                 CALL PRS10 
                 to parse for syntax type 10 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Remarks 
                 The subroutine has five entry points; 
               
               
                   
                 P2STT - normal entry 
               
               
                   
                 VFAIL - error entry, illegal value in variable 
               
               
                   
                 field 
               
               
                   
                 SFAIL - error entry, variable field syntax error 
               
               
                   
                 RFAIL - error entry, invalid relocatable variable 
               
               
                   
                 in variable field. 
               
               
                   
                 EFAIL - error entry, invalid expression in 
               
               
                   
                 variable field. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Arguments are assumed to be in a “common” 
               
               
                   
                 area. See ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION for a 
               
               
                   
                 description of the common area. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 LISTI 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine prints a card image on the system 
               
               
                   
                 printer, along with the corresponding object code 
               
               
                   
                 for the instruction and the assigned location, an 
               
               
                   
                 error flag (two asterisks) and column marker 
               
               
                   
                 (dollar sign) when errors are detected, plus a line 
               
               
                   
                 count and page headings when bottom of page is 
               
               
                   
                 encountered. See ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION for 
               
               
                   
                 description of line and heading formats. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The subroutine is entered by CALL LISTI. 
               
               
                   
                 Additional entry points: CALL LSTI 
               
               
                   
                 No arguments are required; the card impage 
               
               
                   
                 (Pass Two Text) to be printed is assumed to be in 
               
               
                   
                 buffer IAREA. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL PSHRA 
                 to save return address 
               
               
                 Called 
                 CALL POPRA 
                 to return to calling program 
               
               
                   
                 CALL REPK 
                 to repack card image to A2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 format 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LSTI 
                 to print heading on new page. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 System 
                 PRNTN, BINDC, HOLPR, BINHX 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The subroutine has two entry points. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LISTI - normal entry point 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LSTI - to print heading on new page 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Arguments used are assumed to be in a “common” 
               
               
                   
                 area. See ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION for a 
               
               
                   
                 description of the common area. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 HDNG2 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process HDNG assembler directive in Pass 2 
               
               
                   
                 to print heading on each page of listing. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL HDNG2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 REPK 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If the list flag is on, the next 61 characters after 
               
               
                   
                 HDNG are picked up, converted and stored in 
               
               
                   
                 heading buffer and the heading is printed. Other- 
               
               
                   
                 wise, the program just exits. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Only 61 characters will be printed. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIf 
               
               
                 LIST2 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process LIST assembler directive in Pass 2 
               
               
                   
                 to start or stop listing of the programs r 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LIST2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 GETNF 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This checks the variable field of the LIST card and 
               
               
                   
                 accordingly turns off the list flag or sets the list 
               
               
                   
                 flag on and sets no object code flag. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ABS2, ENT2, DEF2 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process ‘ABS and ‘ENT‘ and ‘DEF‘ assembler 
               
               
                   
                 directives in Pass 2 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ABS2 
               
               
                   
                 or 
               
               
                   
                 CALL ENT2 
               
               
                   
                 or 
               
               
                   
                 CALL DEF2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 GETNF, ERRIN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This has three entry points but they are the same. 
               
               
                   
                 This checks if ‘TOK‘ is an identifier and if the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol is defined. If not an error message is set 
               
               
                   
                 up. This also sets the P2 text flag. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIh 
               
               
                 DC2 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process ‘DC‘ Assembler directive in Pass 2 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call DC2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 GETNF, EXPRN 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This calls GETNF and EXPRN to get the value of 
               
               
                   
                 the constant in the variable field and puts in INSBL. 
               
               
                   
                 If there is an error it returns back to the error 
               
               
                   
                 return, stores zero for value. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ,1/5 CALL2 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process CALL op code in Pass 2 by extracting 
               
               
                   
                 the ALPHA name of external entry and storing in 
               
               
                   
                 INSBL for later processing to generate object 
               
               
                   
                 module. This also sets P2 text flag = 1 to prevent 
               
               
                   
                 print of instruction field in listing. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL CALL2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 None 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Pointed in EXLST is reset. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Parse Subroutines 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Subroutines 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The parse subroutines generate a list of operands. 
               
               
                   
                 The operands are found by scanning the operand 
               
               
                   
                 field of a card image. Parentheses and commas 
               
               
                   
                 are used to separate the operands, and a blank 
               
               
                   
                 indicates the end of the field. Each parse sub- 
               
               
                   
                 routine expects a certain order and number of 
               
               
                   
                 operands. The order and number of operands 
               
               
                   
                 determine the syntax type (parse type) of the 
               
               
                   
                 instruction on the card image. See User&#39;s Manual 
               
               
                   
                 for description of each syntax tape. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 There are presently nine parse subroutines 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR1 - parse syntax type 1 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR2 - parse syntax type 2 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR3 - parse syntax type 3 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR4 - parse syntax type 4 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR5 - parse syntax type 5 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR6 - parse syntax type 6 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR7 - parse syntax type 7 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR8 - parse syntax type 8 
               
               
                   
                 CALL P2SR9 - parse syntax type 9 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 These subroutines are called by  all  the parse 
               
               
                 Called 
                 subroutines. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL PSHRA to save return address 
               
               
                   
                 CALL POPRA to return to calling program 
               
               
                   
                 These subprograms are called by at least one of 
               
               
                   
                 the parse subroutines 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 CALL TOKEN 
                 to find the next character on the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 card image. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL GETNF 
                 to find the next non-blank 
               
               
                   
                   
                 character on the card image. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL EXPRN 
                 to evaluate a variable expression 
               
               
                   
                   
                 on the card image. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL INS2 
                 to insert an operand in the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 available space in an operand 
               
               
                   
                   
                 list. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL EFAIL 
                 when expression error is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 detected. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL SFAIL 
                 when syntax error is detected 
               
               
                   
                 CALL RFAIL 
                 when relocation error is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 detected 
               
               
                   
                 CALL VFAIL 
                 ) when illegal variable is detected 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LILR 
                 ) to find and insert “r” in operand 
               
               
                   
                 or 
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL LILR2 
                 ) list 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL OPERA 
                 ) to find and inert “address” and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 or CALL OPERA2 
                 ) “M” field in operand list. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL INDX 
                 ) to find and insert “index 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) register” in operand list. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL CSAV 
                 ) to find “mask, clear” or “mask 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 or CALL CSAV2 
                 ) save” operands and appropriately 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) modify “M field” and “T field” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) operands 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL INDR 
                 ) to find “indirect addressing” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 or CALL INDR2 
                 ) operand and appropriately 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) modify “M field” operand. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 CALL REG 
                 ) to find “register-to-register” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                 or CALL REG2 
                 ) operands and appropriately 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) modify “T field” and “address 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ) field” operands. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Remarks 
                 The parse subroutines provide a flexible way to 
               
               
                   
                 separate operands in an operand list, where a 
               
               
                   
                 “free-form” type of operand description is used. 
               
               
                   
                 Various types of operand lists may be separated 
               
               
                   
                 and decoded by adding new parse subroutines or 
               
               
                   
                 modifying one of these. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The card image to be scanned, the operand list to 
               
               
                   
                 be generated and various flags and pointers are 
               
               
                   
                 assumed to be in a “common” area described in 
               
               
                   
                 ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIII 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     LILR, LILR2 
     Type Subroutine 
     Function To get “little R” in processing regular op codes in Pass 2. 
     Availability Relocatable area 
     Use CALL LILR or CALL LILR2 
     Subprograms 
     Called PSHRA, EXPRN, GETNF, TOKEN, POPRA 
     Remarks This has two entry points LILR and LILR2. This exits through different routines depending on the conditions detected. If no errors—exits through POPRA. If there is a relocation error or other errors in variable field, the exit is through RFAIL, EFAIL or SFAIL of P2STT. 
     Flow Chart Described in TABLE XXIIm 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIm 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 OPERA 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine scans the operand field of a card 
               
               
                   
                 image to find and evaluate the address referenced 
               
               
                   
                 by the instruction on the card image. If an address 
               
               
                   
                 is found it is inserted in an operand list. The M- 
               
               
                   
                 field operand is initialized to indicate “immediate” 
               
               
                   
                 or “direct” addressing. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The subroutine is called by CALL OPERA. 
               
               
                   
                 Additional entry point: CALL OPER2 
               
               
                   
                 No arguments are required in the calling sequence. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL PSHRA 
                 to save return address. 
               
               
                 Called 
                 CALL POPRA 
                 to return to calling program. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL EXPRN 
                 to evaluate the address. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL EFAIL 
                 when invalid expression is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 detected. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL SFAIL 
                 when syntax error is detected. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Remarks 
                 The program has two entry points. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL OPERA 
               
               
                   
                 CALL OPER2 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Arguments are assumed to be in a “common” area 
               
               
                   
                 described in ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 INDX, IN, IN3 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To handle indexing in Pass 2 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL INDX or CALL IN or CALL 1N3 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 PSHRA, TOKEN, POPRA and EFAIL, RFAIL, 
               
               
                 Called 
                 SFAIL, VFAIL in P2STT. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This has three different entry points. Each checks 
               
               
                   
                 for different values of TOK like ‘,‘, ‘C‘, and ‘X‘. 
               
               
                   
                 The normal exit is through RA stack (POPRA) 
               
               
                   
                 and the four different error exits are into P2STT. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIo 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIo 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 REG 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The subroutine scans the operand field of a card 
               
               
                   
                 image to determine if register-to-register, register 
               
               
                   
                 mask and clear, or register mask and save options 
               
               
                   
                 are specified. If so, the M-field operand is 
               
               
                   
                 modified accordingly and the specified register is 
               
               
                   
                 inserted in the operand list. The keywords 
               
               
                   
                 which specify these options are R, RC, and RS, 
               
               
                   
                 respectively. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 The subroutine is called by CALL REG. 
               
               
                   
                 Additional entry point: CALL REG2. 
               
               
                   
                 No arguments are required in the calling sequence. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL PSHRA 
                 to save return address 
               
               
                 Called 
                 CALL POPRA 
                 to return to calling program 
               
               
                   
                 CALL TOKEN 
                 to find keywords R, RC or RS 
               
               
                   
                 CALL IN3 
                 to find specified register and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 insert it in operand list. 
               
               
                   
                 CALL OPERA 
                 if no register option specified. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Remarks 
                 The program has two entry points: 
               
               
                   
                 CALL REG 
               
               
                   
                 CALL REG2 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Arguments used are assumed to be in a “common” 
               
               
                   
                 area described in ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIp 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 CSAV2 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To handle ‘C‘ and ‘S‘ in variable field. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL CSAV2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 PSHRA, IN, SFAIL, POPRA. 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This handles ‘C‘ and ‘S‘ in variable field by testing 
               
               
                   
                 identifiers, ‘C‘ and ‘S‘ . There are 3 different 
               
               
                   
                 exits. 
               
               
                   
                 If Identifier (TOK − 17) and ‘C‘ or ‘S‘ — IN 
               
               
                   
                 If Identifier (TOK = 17) but not ‘C‘ or ‘S‘ — SFAIL 
               
               
                   
                 If not an identifier — POPRA 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIq 
               
               
                 INDR2 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To handle indirect addressing by testing for 
               
               
                   
                 Asterisk and Blank. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL INDR2 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 PSHRA, TOKEN, POPRA, SFAIL. 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This takes two exits depending on TOK and ‘*‘ or 
               
               
                   
                 ‘,‘ in operand field. 
               
               
                   
                 If TOK = 6 and OPRND + 2 = 8 or 9 and TOK = 1 
               
               
                   
                 after calling TOKEN it exits to POPRA else to 
               
               
                   
                 SFAIL. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIr 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIq 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIr 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 WOBJC 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Writes object code into buffer. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call WOBJC 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 TLOCA, SRABS, SRREL, SRCAL, INSCD 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This program inserts code, or external name or 
               
               
                   
                 entry name for one instruction, also calling 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate routines to set relocation bits. This 
               
               
                   
                 takes care of blocking the object module and incre- 
               
               
                   
                 ments the pointers also. This is called for 
               
               
                   
                 processing ENTRY, CALL, DC or regular op code. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 None except system symbols. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIs 
               
               
                 SRABS 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Sets relocation bits in relocation word to absolute 
               
               
                   
                 during assembly. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 CALL SRABS 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This sets the relocation bits in the relocation word 
               
               
                   
                 of the object code buffer BFW8 to absolute. One 
               
               
                   
                 call sets the bits for one word of code. If the 
               
               
                   
                 buffer is full, it is copied to ODISK and the re- 
               
               
                   
                 location word and pointer to data word are reset. 
               
               
                   
                 This is not used during absolute assembly. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIt 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIs 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIt 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 SRREL 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Sets relocation bits in relocation word to re- 
               
               
                   
                 locatable during assembly. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 WRTOB 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL SRREL 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This sets the relocation bits in the relocation word 
               
               
                   
                 of the object code buffer BFW8 to relocatable. One 
               
               
                   
                 call sets the bits for one word of code. If the 
               
               
                   
                 buffer is full, it is transferred to ODISK and the 
               
               
                   
                 relocation word and pointer to data word are reset. 
               
               
                   
                 This is not used during absolute assembly. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIu 
               
               
                 SRCAL 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Set relocation bits in relocation word to call and 
               
               
                   
                 insert # of external name 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call SRCAL 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 WRTOB 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This program scans the names of external 
               
               
                   
                 references in the header and gets the number of the 
               
               
                   
                 currently referenced external name and inserts 
               
               
                   
                 that in the object code buffer in addition to setting 
               
               
                   
                 relocation bits. The buffer is checked for the 
               
               
                   
                 availability of space and emptied if full by calling 
               
               
                   
                 WRTOB. The external name is referenced by 
               
               
                   
                 INSBL. Object code buffer can be dumped with 
               
               
                   
                 SSW 5 on. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIv 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIu 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIv 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 TLOCA 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To test location assignment and start a new block 
               
               
                   
                 for object code if necessary 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL TLOCA 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 None 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If the binary core counter and location assigned 
               
               
                   
                 are not the same, the block in the object module 
               
               
                   
                 is wrapped up and a new block is started, inserting 
               
               
                   
                 proper counts. The buffer is written to disk if 
               
               
                   
                 necessary. Buffers and counters can be dumped 
               
               
                   
                 with SSW 2 on. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIw 
               
               
                 INSCD 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Builds object code in an intermediate buffer prior 
               
               
                   
                 to being transferred to the main object module 
               
               
                   
                 buffer. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 ACC has object code (1 word) CALL INSCD 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 WRTOB 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The routine is called by ‘Write Object Code‘ and 
               
               
                   
                 transfers one 16 bit word of object code per call. 
               
               
                   
                 The intermediate buffer is used because a re- 
               
               
                   
                 location word must be added for each eight object 
               
               
                   
                 code words in relocatable assemblies. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIx 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIw 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIx 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 WRAPO 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To wrap up object module 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL WRAPO 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 INSCD 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This wraps up the object module by inserting the 
               
               
                   
                 origin and zero for word count of next block and 
               
               
                   
                 the word count for current block and also the total 
               
               
                   
                 size of module in the header. 
               
               
                   
                 First and last sectors of object module can be 
               
               
                   
                 dumped with SSW 3 on. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIy 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     6. Execution of Epilog 
     Epilog is a collection of programs which perform the following functions: 
     a) if save symbol table requested, reset the boundary of the symbol table and save the whole symbol table on disk. 
     b) if printing of symbol table or cross reference table is requested, merge the symbol table into an alphabetical chain, purging keyword and directive symbols, and print either or both as requested. 
     c) Print the number of errors detected during assembly. 
     d) Test an indicative flag to cause suppression of output if any fatal errors occurred (fatal errors are errors which might cause the computer to lose program sequence control, thereby endangering real-time process control). If no fatal errors occurred, store the object module generated by the assembly. 
     e) If disk input was specified, return program control to the control record analyzer for possible further assemblies. 
     f) If card input was specified, return control to the operating system (non-process monitor). 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIy 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 EPILOG 
                   
               
               
                 EPLOG 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Main Program (Core Load) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The purpose of this program is to 
               
               
                   
                 (1) Save symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 (2) Print symbol table, and 
               
               
                   
                 (3) Print cross reference table when these options 
               
               
                   
                 are specified by the Assembler Control Cards 
               
               
                   
                 for the Assembly. 
               
               
                   
                 The Main Program tests for the option to save 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table and if it is specified, checks if it is 
               
               
                   
                 Absolute Assembly. If it is, then it saves the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table or else aborts to save function. Next 
               
               
                   
                 it checks for print symbol table option and prints 
               
               
                   
                 out the symbol table with the appropriate attribute 
               
               
                   
                 preceding the symbol table and the location in HEX 
               
               
                   
                 following the symbol (seven per line). 
               
               
                   
                 The cross reference table print option is checked 
               
               
                   
                 and printed if specified. The line number of the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol, the symbol and the references are printed. 
               
               
                   
                 Depending on the errors, a flag is sent to load or 
               
               
                   
                 abort the assembly and prints appropriate message. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Main Program of coreload EPLOG (called by 
               
               
                   
                 Pass 2 of the ASSEMBLER). 
               
               
                 Subprogram 
                 PRINT, CROSR, WRTFL, ORDER. 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 (a) This is a part of the ASSEMBLER 
               
               
                   
                 (b) This uses information stored by Pass 1 and 
               
               
                   
                 Flags RTYPE, IFLAG. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LINK called by link 
               
               
                   
                 CALL EPLOG 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 This program expects the hash links to be in 
               
               
                   
                 alphabetical order. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIa 
               
               
                 PRINT 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To print out the symbol table with proper attribute 
               
               
                   
                 and the Hex location (seven symbols per line). 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program (PRINT) in LET 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL PRINT 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 (a) It is a subroutine used by core load EPLOG 
               
               
                   
                 (b) It uses information contained in Hash Table to 
               
               
                   
                 get hash links and the information in hash links. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 CROSR 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To print the cross reference table with the 
               
               
                   
                 definition (line no. of the symbol), symbol and the 
               
               
                   
                 references. Conversion from packed EBCDIC to 
               
               
                   
                 1443 code is done. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program (LET) on Drive 0 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call CROSR 
               
               
                 Subprogram Called 
                 RVRSL 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 (a) It is a part of the EPLOG core load 
               
               
                   
                 (ASSEMBLER) 
               
               
                   
                 (b) It uses information in hash chain and 
               
               
                   
                 reference chains. 
               
               
                   
                 (c) A zero pointer to next hash link means end of 
               
               
                   
                 chain. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 ORDER 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 This subroutine merges hash chains in the symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table into an alphabetical linear chain. With the 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table thus organized, printing the symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table and generating a cross reference is made 
               
               
                   
                 easier. 
               
               
                   
                 This uses two subroutines (1) NEXTH to find the 
               
               
                   
                 next non zero hash chain pointer and (2) FINDE 
               
               
                   
                 (secondary entry point in FXHAS routine) to find 
               
               
                   
                 the hash link prceding the one where the entry has 
               
               
                   
                 to be inserted. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable subprogram (LET) and part of the Core 
               
               
                   
                 Load EPLOG. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ORDER 
               
               
                   
                 no arguments, data referenced through global 
               
               
                   
                 symbols. 
               
               
                 Subroutines Called 
                 NEXTH, FINDE 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This gets the necessary pointers through global 
               
               
                   
                 symbols in system symbol table. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 This assumes that the hash chains are in alpha- 
               
               
                   
                 betical order. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 RVRSL 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 To reverse the order of the reference chain from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 descending to ascending order of line numbers. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The reference chain contains the entries in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 descending order with the definition in the last and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 zero pointer to next link which is the end of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 chain. This subroutine reverses that order and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 gets the definition to the beginning. Here 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ‘definition’ means line number where symbol is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 defined. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable subprogram (LET) 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 CALL RVRSL 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DC P where P is the location that 
               
               
                   
                   
                 contains pointer to first 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reference link. 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 This uses the reference links created by Pass 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and changes the pointers to links to get them in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reverse order without actually moving the infor- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 mation. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIe 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 PNCHO 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Punches an object deck for an absolute assembly in‘ 
               
               
                   
                 the ASSEMBLER. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL PNCHO 
               
               
                 Subprograms Called 
                 SPMOC, TBLOC, CINSP, CONPC 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This is part of Core Load EPLOG of ASSEMBLER. 
               
               
                   
                 This punches object deck from the object module 
               
               
                   
                 of an absolute assembly that is in non process 
               
               
                   
                 working storage of 2310. 
               
               
                   
                 If a non-blank card is read for punching it loops 
               
               
                   
                 around and has to be manually interrupted to get 
               
               
                   
                 out of loop. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The object deck can be punched only along with an 
               
               
                   
                 assembly. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIf 
               
               
                 TBLOC 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Tests if any more data words are in the buffer 
               
               
                   
                 ODISK (data is the object module) 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call TBLOC 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If there are no more data words in the buffer, the 
               
               
                   
                 next sector of the object module (from the non 
               
               
                   
                 process working storage) is read and the pointer 
               
               
                   
                 to the data word is set. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 CINSP 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Convert one word of Binary Code into HEX and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 insert in Buffer 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call CINSP 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 This picks up one binary word of code from next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 word of ODISK Buffer, converts it into 4 words of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 card code HEX and inserts into the next 4 words of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 punch buffer pointed by the buffer pointer. 
               
               
                   
                 Limitations 
                 The availability of space in punch buffer has to be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 checked before this is called. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIh 
               
               
                   
                 CONPC 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Inserts the word count into the punch buffer and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 punches the card. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call CONPC 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 This checks if the card is blank before punching 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the card from punch buffer data and if it is non- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 blank a dynamic wait situation results. A dump of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data can be obtained with the SSW 4 on. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIi 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 STOBJ 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Stores object module on 2311 disk files. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call STOBJ 
               
               
                 Subprograms Called 
                 WRBIN, WRBUF 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The user has to specify the ‘STORE’ option in the 
               
               
                   
                 variable field (starting in column 41 of ASM card) 
               
               
                   
                 if the object module is to be stored on a successful 
               
               
                   
                 assembly. The object module generated by Pass 2 
               
               
                   
                 of the ASSEMBLER is in the NPWS area on 2310. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The user has to create a subfile in the 2311 disk 
               
               
                   
                 file with proper name before it can be stored. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 EROUT 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To print out the Assembler Error Messages with 
               
               
                   
                 line number, code number and alpha description 
               
               
                   
                 An asterisk before the code number indicates that 
               
               
                   
                 it is a fatal error. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program LET (part of Core Load 
               
               
                   
                 EPLOG). 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call EROUT 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This is mainly used by the Core Load EPLOG and 
               
               
                   
                 not a utilities subroutine. This assumes that the 
               
               
                   
                 location TEC contains a pointer to the next avail- 
               
               
                   
                 able location in the error table. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 All error messages should be two words long with 
               
               
                   
                 the two right bytes of the first word containint the 
               
               
                   
                 code number. A maximum of only 100 messages 
               
               
                   
                 can be stored. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIk 
               
               
                 WRFL 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Copies symbol table into symbol table file on 2310 
               
               
                   
                 disk (DEFIL) 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call WRFL 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 DISKN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The program searches FLET for a file named in the 
               
               
                   
                 argument list and returns the word count and 
               
               
                   
                 sector address, or an error flag if the file name 
               
               
                   
                 is not in FLET 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIIIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE IIIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXl 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     UTILITIES 
     The programs in the Utilities section perform necessary functions for the ASSEMBLER, but are not directly related to the logic of the ASSEMBLER itself. Rather than clutter up (and perhaps obscure) the main logic of the ASSEMBLER, they are presented separately. 
     In a sense, these programs interface the ASSEMBLER with the particular computer (the IBM 1800) used as the host or supervisory computer in the system. To implement the ASSEMBLER on a different computer, the logic in some of these utility programs might need changing. The rest of the ASSEMBLER programs should require only recoding in the particular language supported, without any changes in the logic flow. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 PSHRA/POPRA 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Pushes and pops the return address stack thereby 
               
               
                   
                 providing recursive capabilities to the calling 
               
               
                   
                 routine. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms Called 
                 ERRIN 
               
               
                 Core Loads Called 
                 EPLOG 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The return address stack pointer (RAP) must be 
               
               
                   
                 initialized to contain the address of the first 
               
               
                   
                 available location in the stack. A call to EPLOG 
               
               
                   
                 is made if the return address stack overflows. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The call to PSHRA must be the first executable 
               
               
                   
                 statement upon entry to a subroutine. POPRA 
               
               
                   
                 may be called anywhere. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVa 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 TOKEN 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 TOKEN scans the card image returning a code for 
               
               
                   
                 each token found (see ASSEMBLER DESCRIP- 
               
               
                   
                 TION). Appropriate conversions are applied to 
               
               
                   
                 each data type, routines are called to add symbols 
               
               
                   
                 and references in the symbol table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call TOKEN 
               
               
                 Subprograms Called 
                 ERRIN, COMPS, HSAH, FXHAS, INSYM, REFR, 
               
               
                   
                 NOTHR. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The value of the token is returned in TOK and 
               
               
                   
                 TOKTP (see ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION). 
               
               
                   
                 Errors such as symbol too long, constants 
               
               
                   
                 too large, symbol table overflow, etc., are 
               
               
                   
                 diagnosed. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 TOKEN is restricted to the data types and character 
               
               
                   
                 set as specified in ASSEMBLER DESCRIPTION. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 READC 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Brings in a new source record (from disk or card) 
               
               
                   
                 for each call, initializes the token pointer, and 
               
               
                   
                 skips blank cards. If labels are found a pointer to 
               
               
                   
                 the symbol table entry is left in LABEL. For 
               
               
                   
                 statements with no labels LABEL = 0. When 
               
               
                   
                 editing is specified, READC performs the edit. 
               
               
                   
                 Line numbers for pass 1 are generated. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call READC 
               
               
                 Subprograms Called 
                 CARDN, HOLEB, TOKEN, INSP2, WRTP2, 
               
               
                   
                 FTCHS, FTCHE, NXEDT. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Input control is specified by CONTL, the control 
               
               
                   
                 vector. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Input devices must be either card reader or 2311 
               
               
                   
                 disk. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVc 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 EXPRN 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Recursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Parses expressions. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL EXPRN 
               
               
                   
                 error return 
               
               
                   
                 relocatable expression return 
               
               
                   
                 absolute expression return 
               
               
                 Subprograms Called 
                 PSHRA, EX1, GENRA, ERRIN, POPRA 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The token pointer should point to the first token 
               
               
                   
                 of the expression and upon return, token pointer 
               
               
                   
                 points to the next token following the expression. 
               
               
                   
                 Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and 
               
               
                   
                 division are the allowable operations. Parentheses 
               
               
                   
                 may be nested to any level (until the parse stack 
               
               
                   
                 or return address stack overflows). A bottom up 
               
               
                   
                 parse is the basic parsing technique, while the 
               
               
                   
                 method of recursive descent is used to parse unary 
               
               
                   
                 operators, constants, symbols, and parentheses. 
               
               
                   
                 Syntax errors are detected. The registers are not 
               
               
                   
                 saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVd 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVd 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EX1 
     Type Recursive Subroutine 
     Function Recursive descent portion of expression parse. 
     Availability Relocatable area. 
     Use Call EX1 
     Subprograms Called PSHRA, TOKEN, ERRIN, FAIL, POPRA 
     Remarks Routine uses both the parse stack and return address stack. The registers are not saved. 
     Flow Chart Described in TABLE XXIVe 
     GENRA 
     Type Nonrecursive Subroutine 
     Function Expression evaluation. Companion to EXPRN. GENRA is called from the expression parse to evaluate a term or expression. It consists of 2 basic parts: ADD/SWB generator and MUL/DIV generator. 
     Availability Relocatable area. 
     Use Call GENRA 
     Subprograms Called ERRIN, FAIL 
     Remarks Relocation errors are detected. A pseudo accumulator ACC is used on conjunction with the parse stack in the expression evaluation process. No registers are saved. 
     Flow Chart Described in TABLE XXIVf 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 INSP2 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Prefixes the Pass Two text with a header. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call INSP2 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The header consists of 
               
               
                   
                 LOC CNTR 
               
               
                   
                 ERR INDIC/Op Code Num 
               
               
                   
                 P2 Text Flag/TOK PNTR 
               
               
                   
                 The routine is called just prior to writing the 
               
               
                   
                 source text out to disk for use in Pass 2. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVg 
               
               
                 WRTP2 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Buffers pass 2 text to 2310 disk. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call WRTP2 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 DISKN, MOVE 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 A 322 word (320 data words) buffer named IDISK 
               
               
                   
                 is the working buffer. 320 word physical records 
               
               
                   
                 are written sequentially. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 A 40 word logical record is expected. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVh 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 ERRIN 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Accumulates error messages which will later be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 printed by EROUT. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call ERRIN 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DC KCODE KCODE contains an error code. 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 An entry in the error table consists of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 column #/error code 
               
               
                   
                   
                 line # 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Both fatal and total error counts are maintained. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ERRIN is called from both Pass 1 and Pass 2. No 
               
               
                   
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVi 
               
               
                   
                 NXEDT 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 During the editing process and after each edit is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 made, a new edit vector is set up. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call NXEDT 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 After the last edit is accomplished, the edit flag is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 turned off. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVj 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 SAVEC 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Buffers edit cards to the 2310 disk file EDIT. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call SAVEC 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 DISKN, MOVE, ERRIN 
               
               
                 Files referenced 
                 EDIT 
               
               
                 Core Loads Called 
                 EPLOG 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Eight card images are blocked per sector. Edit 
               
               
                   
                 file overflow is checked; and if it occurs, a call 
               
               
                   
                 to EPLOG is executed. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVk 
               
               
                 COMPS 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Maps five EBCDIC characters into right justified 
               
               
                   
                 name code (30 bits). 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call COMPS 
               
               
                   
                 DC ENAME 5 EBCDIC characters 
               
               
                   
                 DC NAME Resultant packed code. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The reverse transformation is SPMOC. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVl 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVm 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVl 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 SPMOC 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Maps right justified name code into 5 EBCDIC 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call SPMOC 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DC NAME Name code 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DC ENAME 5 character EBCDIC 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 The reverse transformation is COMPS. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVm 
               
               
                   
                 HASH 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine. 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Generates a hash number of a symbol. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 XR2 points to first word of symbol 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Call HASH 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ACC returns hash number. 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 Algorithm described in January, 1968 issue of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ‘Communications of the ACM’ entitled ‘An 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Improved Hash Code for Scatter Storage’, by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 W. D. Maurer. 
               
               
                   
                 Limitations 
                 The hash code is generated for two words pointed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to by XR2. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVn 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVn 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 FXHAS 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Searches a hash chain to determine if a symbol 
               
               
                   
                   
                 resides in the symbol table. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Hash number in ACC 
               
               
                   
                   
                 XR2 pointing to symbol 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Call FXHAS 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Present return 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Not present return 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 On “not present” return XR1 points to the  hash   
               
               
                   
                   
                   link  of the preceding chain item. On “present” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 return XR1 points to the  hash link  of the entry 
               
               
                   
                   
                 just found. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVo 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVo 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 INSYM/ERINS 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Creates a BCD entry in symbol table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 XR1 points to hash link of prceding entry in the 
               
               
                   
                 hash chain. XR2 points to the symbol character 
               
               
                   
                 string (name code) 
               
               
                   
                 Call INSYM 
               
               
                   
                 ACC returns a pointer to new symbol. 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 ERRIN 
               
               
                 Core Loads called 
                 EPLOG 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Symbol table overflow is checked, and if it occurs, 
               
               
                   
                 EPLOG is called. ERINS is a secondary entry 
               
               
                   
                 point that accomplishes the call to EPLOG. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVp 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 REFR 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Creates references to symbol and maintains the 
               
               
                   
                 reference chain whose head resides in the symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table entry of the symbol referenced. 
               
               
                 Available 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 ACC contains pointer to the symbol table entry 
               
               
                   
                 Call REFR 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 References are pushed down on the reference chains. 
               
               
                   
                 The definition is maintained as the last entry on 
               
               
                   
                 the chain. Symbol table overflow is checked. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVq 
               
               
                 TESTL 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Tests for a labeled statement: If labeled, a non- 
               
               
                   
                 terminating error is generated, and the label is 
               
               
                   
                 purged from the symbol table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call TESTL 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Routine is called for statements that must not 
               
               
                   
                 have labels. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVr 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVq 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVr 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 CHEKC 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Checks to see if core size has been exceeded. 
               
               
                   
                 Also records the lower and upper boundaries of the 
               
               
                   
                 program 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call CHEKC 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVs 
               
               
                 GETNF 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Calls taken discarding blanks until a non blank 
               
               
                   
                 taken is found. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call GETNF 
               
               
                   
                 error return 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 TOKEN, ERRIN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If the end of the card is detected before finding a 
               
               
                   
                 non blank token, a syntax error message is 
               
               
                   
                 generated. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVt 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVs 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVt 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 SVEXT 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Creates an entry in the external reference list for 
               
               
                   
                 each external reference encountered. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call SVEXT 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 ERRIN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If the maximum number of external references is 
               
               
                   
                 exceeded, a non fatal error is created and the 
               
               
                   
                 reference not stored. ACC is returned = 0 if 
               
               
                   
                 successful; ACC = 1 otherwise. No registers are 
               
               
                   
                 saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVu 
               
               
                 MOVE 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Move data storage to storage. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 XR1 points to source. 
               
               
                   
                 XR2 points to destination. 
               
               
                   
                 XR3 contains a word count. 
               
               
                   
                 Call MOVE. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 A call of zero word count does nothing. Registers 
               
               
                   
                 are returned in their final state after the move is 
               
               
                   
                 performed. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Maximum block that may be moved per call is 
               
               
                   
                 32767 words. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVv 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVu 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVv 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 WRTOB 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Routine buffers object code to the 2310 disk non 
               
               
                   
                 process working storage. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable Area 
               
               
                 Use 
                 XR1 is set to source. 
               
               
                   
                 XR3 contains the word count. 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 MOVE, DISKN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Sectors are written sequentially. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVw 
               
               
                 FTCH2 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Reads Pass 2 text from 2310 disk for Pass 2 
               
               
                   
                 processing. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call FTCH2 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 MOVE, DISKN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The card image is unpacked to one character per 
               
               
                   
                 word in the card area. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVx 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVw 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVx 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 INS 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Inserts an operand into the next available location 
               
               
                   
                 on the operand list. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call INS 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 None. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 As a parse routine extracts an operand from the 
               
               
                   
                 variable field, it calls INS to save the operand in 
               
               
                   
                 the operand list. No registers are saved. The 
               
               
                   
                 count of the number of variables referenced is 
               
               
                   
                 incremented. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVy 
               
               
                 WRFL/WRTFL 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Writes the symbol table to the 2310 file specified 
               
               
                   
                 in ASVSM + 1. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call WRFL or Call WRTFL 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 DISKN, PRNTN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 WRFL is called whenever the save symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 option is specified. WRTFL is called during 
               
               
                   
                 assembler definition and uses the default file 
               
               
                   
                 DEFIL. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVz 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVy 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIVz 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 NOTHR 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Checks if another symbol table entry exists for the 
               
               
                   
                 same symbol. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 XR1 points to hash link of symbol table entry. 
               
               
                   
                 Call NOTHR 
               
               
                   
                 EXIT no other entries 
               
               
                   
                 EXIT if other entries and XR1 points to 
               
               
                   
                 the hash link of the new entry. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 A symbol may be used differently in the same 
               
               
                   
                 assembly as a keyword, an internal symbol, or 
               
               
                   
                 an external symbol, and a different symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 entry is created for each use. This routine will 
               
               
                   
                 find all symbol table entries for a given symbol. 
               
               
                   
                 No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVa 
               
               
                 STRIK 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Strikes all reference chains from the symbol table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call STRIK 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 NEXTH 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 When the system symbol table is used in an 
               
               
                   
                 assembly, it contains the reference chains of the 
               
               
                   
                 assembly when the save symbol table was 
               
               
                   
                 executed. 
               
               
                   
                 These chains are deleted so that only references 
               
               
                   
                 in this assembly will be remembered. No 
               
               
                   
                 registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 CUTB 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Performs a fix up of the hash chains in the symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call CUTB 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 NEXTH 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 If a symbol table is used where a prior save 
               
               
                   
                 symbol table has been executed, the user system 
               
               
                   
                 symbols will be present on the hash chains. If an 
               
               
                   
                 assembly is called which does not reference the 
               
               
                   
                 system symbol table, the symbols which comprise 
               
               
                   
                 the user system symbol table must be removed. 
               
               
                   
                 This routine performs the needed garbage 
               
               
                   
                 collection on the hash chains. No registers are 
               
               
                   
                 saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVc 
               
               
                 NEXTH 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Finds the head of the next hash chain to be 
               
               
                   
                 processed. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 XR1 points to the next address in the hash table. 
               
               
                   
                 Call NEXTH 
               
               
                   
                 ACC contains the head of the hash chain. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 XR1 is used to step through the hash table. Zero 
               
               
                   
                 hash table entires are discarded, and the A- 
               
               
                   
                 register returns the head of each hash chain. When 
               
               
                   
                 the hash table is exhausted, A-register is returned 
               
               
                   
                 zero. No registers are saved. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVd 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVd 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 FLTSH 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Finds disk location of a data file in the fixed area 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of the 2310. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call FLTSH 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DC Name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 DC Data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 · 
               
               
                   
                   
                 · 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name BSS E 2 File name in name code 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Data BSS 3 Disk location is returned in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 * DATA + 1 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 The 3 word return in word “DATA” is in the same 
               
               
                   
                   
                 format as the 1800 DSA statement. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVe 
               
               
                   
                 REPK 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 The subroutine repacks to A2 format (37 words) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the first 74 characters of a card image and moves 
               
               
                   
                   
                 a three word header to words 38-40 of the card 
               
               
                   
                   
                 image. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable program area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call REPK 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 The unpacked card image is assumed to be in words 
               
               
                   
                   
                 4-77 of an 83 word area referenced by the system 
               
               
                   
                   
                 symbol IAREA, equated to the address of word 3 of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the area (third word of the header). 
               
               
                   
                 Limitations 
                 See Remarks 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVf 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 RPSVW 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Writes source text back to the 2311. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call RPSVW 
               
               
                 Subprogram called 
                 WRBUF, TYPEN 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 When assembling with the edit feature, the 
               
               
                   
                 amended source text must be written back to the 
               
               
                   
                 source file. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVg 
               
               
                 FTCHS 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To read source code from 2311 disk during 
               
               
                   
                 assembly. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL FTCHS 
               
               
                 Subprogram called 
                 RDBUF 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This reads one card source code for each call from 
               
               
                   
                 2311 into ‘SBUFR’. A ‘DISK READ ERROR’ 
               
               
                   
                 message will be printed and the nonprocess monitor 
               
               
                   
                 is called (job terminates) if there is a 2311 disk 
               
               
                   
                 error. The card image can be dumped with SSW 5 
               
               
                   
                 on. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVh 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 FTCHE 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Fetches one card from edit file on 2310 disk into 
               
               
                   
                   
                 input area during the EDIT function of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ASSEMBLER. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 CALL FTCHE 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 Buffering is done during the fetch of EDIT cards 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and when the buffer is empty the next sector of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 EDIT file is read into the buffer called “EDISK”. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVi 
               
               
                   
                 MOVER 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Moves definition reference to end of reference 
               
               
                   
                   
                 chain. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 XR1 points to symbol table entry. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Call MOVER 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 Since the reference chain is pushed down for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 references, it must be reversed to reflect the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 proper order. Thus the definition is placed at the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 end of the chain so that it will appear first after 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reversal. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVj 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 EXTRK 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
                 Extracts keywords from base chain of the symbol 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                   
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                   
                 Use 
                 Call EXTRK 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks 
                 The first hash chain of the symbol table contains 
               
               
                   
                   
                 keywords. They must be extracted before the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 symbol table is ordered, so that the symbol table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 can be printed out. 
               
               
                   
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVk 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     I/O DATA FLOW 
     The ASSEMBLER is subdivided into sections which each perform a functional step in the assembly process. To aid in comprehension of these functional steps, an understanding of the input and output of each section is helpful. The peripheral media used to obtain inputs and to hold the output of each step is pictures in FIGS. 17 A and B. 
     Referring to FIG. 17 A, the analyzer section of the ASSEMBLER  800  reads a control card  805  from the card reader. It scans the information punched into the card and interprets it as descriptive information which determines what the rest of the ASSEMBLER is to do, identifies the program name in a symbol table to be used, determines whether the program listing is to be obtained, formulates a cross reference map, determines whether the program is to be stored or erased, determines whether an object card deck is to be punched, and so on. Control is passed  801  to the Prolog Pass 1 which reads in the symbol table from disk  810  which is either the default or the one specified on the control card read by the analyzer. The remainder of Pass 1 reads  802  cards punched with instructions and other program data from the card reader  806 . Each card is scanned to determine any labels and instructions punched into it and the card image with a code number for the instruction is written to the Pass 2 text area  811  on the disk. Control then passes to Pass 2 of the ASSEMBLER  803 . In Pass 2, the Pass 2 text is read back from the disk  11 . The rest of the card is scanned for operands and a corresponding instruction is built. The instruction (or object code) is inserted into an object module in relocatable form or absolute form and stored back on the disk  812 . During this step, if the list option was specified on the control card, the information on each card is printed along with the assembled instruction and any detected errors  807 . Control passes to the Epilog of the ASSEMBLER  804 . The Epilog contains the object code from the disk  812  and either stores the module  808  on disk or optionally punches the object module onto cards  809  or optionally prints the contents of the symbol table at the end of the assembly  813  or optionally prints a cross reference map of the symbols in the symbol table. Another option is to save the contents of the symbol table  814  on the disk. 
     Referring to FIG. 17B, the peripherals used in the instruction definition options of the ASSEMBLER are described. When the ASSEMBLER is executed in the definition phase, the source information is contained from card  813  in the card reader. A symbol table is built by the ASSEMBLER and stored onto disk  814 . 
     SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 
     Two features of the ASSEMBLER are worthy of special mention. They are 1) the scanning of source text on card images, and 2) the non-restricted use of symbols (i.e., the possible use of a symbol such as SUB to mean the name of a subroutine and also the name of a variable, in the same program). 
     CARD IMAGE SCANNING 
     One requirement in a free-form language, such as adopted here, is the ability to interpret each column on a card image. The method selected is a left-to-right scan (i.e., columns  1 - 74  on the card), with the restriction that labels must begin in column  1 , and asterisk in column  1  denotes a comment. Blanks are used as field delimiters. The order of fields on the card is label, followed by operand field, followed by comments. 
     The ability to distinguish fields, then, is an additional requirement. 
     In the operand field it is useful to permit subfields to describe options available in a given instruction. The subfields themselves may be arithmetic combinations of symbols and constants (expressions). Commas (and in some cases, parentheses) are used as subfield delimiters. 
     A third requirement is the ability to analyze expressions, subject to the normal precedence rules of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. 
     There are three related programs in the ASSEMBLER which together provide the three capabilities mentioned above. The programs are TOKEN, GETNF, and EXPRN. 
     TOKEN is the program that scans and cracks each source record into its logical primitives. It must recognize combinations of letters as being symbols, such as LABEL or ENTRY, decimal and hexidecimal numeric data, and character strings. It is used by both EXPRN and GETNF to analyze the next item on the card (a pointer, IPNTR, is used to keep track of the next column to be analyzed). TOKEN moves the pointer to the next column and analyzes the character. If required, it continues until a blank or other special symbol is encountered, and returns one or two code number (TOK and TOKTP) to describe the result (token). The code numbers are arranged so that arithmetic operators (plus, minus, multiply, divide) have the desired precedence (i.e., the code number for multiply or divide is greater than the code number for add or subtract). 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 TOKEN VALUES 
               
             
          
           
               
                 if the SYMBOL is: 
                 then TOK is set to: 
                 and TOKTP is set to: 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 invalid character 
                 0 
                 0 
               
               
                 blank 
                 1 
                 (ignored) 
               
               
                 = 
                 3 
                 (ignored) 
               
               
                 + 
                 5 
                 1 
               
               
                 − 
                 5 
                 2 
               
               
                 * 
                 6 
                 1 
               
               
                 / 
                 6 
                 2 
               
               
                 ) 
                 10 
                 (ignored) 
               
               
                 ( 
                 11 
                 (ignored) 
               
               
                 &#39; 
                 14 
                 (ignored) 
               
               
                 identifier (symbol) 
                 17 
                 symbol table address 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of BCD entry 
               
               
                 decimal constant 
                 18 
                 0 
               
               
                 hexadecimal constant 
                 18 
                 1 
               
               
                 character string constant 
                 18 
                 2 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     GETNF is a subprogram which skips blank characters. It is used to move the card scan pointer IPNTR to the next non-blank character (i.e., the next field). 
     EXPRN is a subprogram used to evaluate expressions. It uses TOKEN to locate primitives. The parse proceeds ‘bottom up’ (routine EXPRN) with unary operators parsed by recursive descent (routine EX1). A push down stack is maintained during parsing, and the evaluation of the stack (routine GENRA) is accomplished by performing the specified operations in a pseudo-accumulator (ACC). When an entire expression is evaluated, ACC+1 contains the value. 
     Arithmetic in the evaluation follows these rules, where 
     R=relocatable symbol 
     A=absolute symbol 
     a=absolute coefficient 
     a) R±A→R 
     b) aR±R→(a±1)R (note: O R is absolute) 
     c) A*R→aR 
     The following combinations are errors: 
     d) A/R 
     e) R/A 
     f) R*R 
     g) R/R 
     The * (when used to denote the location counter) assumes the relocation property of the program being assembled (either absolute or relocatable). 
     In general, to have a valid relocatable evaluation the expressions&#39;s R coefficient must be 1, when 0 denotes absolute and 1 denotes relocatable. 
     DOMAIN OF SYMBOL DEFINITION 
     Three classes of symbols are known to the assembler: 
     1) Assembler keywords: This class of symbols include the current set of operation code mnemonics, assembler directives, and key words recognized in parsing. 
     2) Internal symbols: Internal symbols are created by the user during the assembly and are defined (used as a label) internally to the assembly. 
     3) External symbol: External symbols are defined external to the assembly and may be referenced only. A symbol may be defined in one assembly and be declared external; another assembly may reference the same symbol, denoting it as externally defined. The loader program used to link the assembled programs and subroutines for execution must set up the appropriate linkage for the external symbols. 
     There are no reserved or ‘forbidden’ symbols. The same symbol may be used as an 
     a) Assembler keyword, 
     b) Internal symbol, 
     c) External symbol in certain instances (ex: call to a subroutine), 
     in the same assembly. A different symbol table entry is created for each use of the same symbol, the difference being the type and attributes of the symbol. It is, therefore, one function of the ASSEMBLER to determine from the contextual usage of the symbol which symbol table entry of the symbol to choose. The subroutine TOKEN, as one of its tasks, performs this class analysis of the symbol and directs the symbol table access appropriately. 
     STORAGE ASSIGNMENT AND LAYOUT STRUCTURE 
     STORAGE LAYOUT 
     Allocation of variable core is shown in TABLE XXVIa 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     For the Edit option, the core allocation shown in TABLE XXVIb. is applicable, during execution of Pass One. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XXVIb 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Core Address 
                 Reference 
               
               
                   
                 (decimal) 
                 Symbol 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The symbol table after instruction definition is shown in TABLE XXVIc. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     When assembly is requested the symbol table area in core is initialized to contain the preload and instruction definition areas. However, if “system symbol table” is specified, the system symbol area will also be included. Entries for symbols encountered during assembly will be added in the next available space in the symbol table. 
     If “save symbol table” is specified, all entries in the symbol table will become system symbols by updating the third pointer word to the end of the table. 
     For assembly not requiring the system symbol table 
     
       
         SYMPT←(SYMBL+1)  
       
     
     To obtain the system symbol table 
     
       
         SYMPT←(SYMBL+2)  
       
     
     To save the system symbol table 
     
       
         (SYMBL+2)←SYMPT  
       
     
     The symbol table for hash table entries is shown in TABLE XXVIe The hash table in the present embodiment is a 67 word table. Entries are one word each, containing a pointer to a string of symbol table entries. Each symbol table entry contains a “hash link” word, which points to the location in the table of the next entry on the same string. The end of the string is indicated by the last entry having zero for its hash link. The symbol entries on each string are kept in aphabetical order. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The hashing algorithm for deciding which chain a symbol belongs to is as follows: 
     1. Transform the alpha character string representing the symbol to truncated packed EBDIC format (5 characters into two words). 
     2. Exclusively “OR” the two words together. 
     3. If the result is negative, take the 2&#39;s complement of it. 
     4. Divide by 67 (an odd prime number) 
     5. The remainder (0&lt;r&lt;67) is the hash value for the symbol 
     This algorithm is implemented in subroutine HASH. 
     The symbol table insertion algorithm is as follows: 
     1. Given the hash value for the symbol, it is interpreted as a displacement within the hash table where the head of the appropriate hash chain resides. 
     2. The chain is transversed until the proper position for insertion in the chain is determined (chain must remain in alphabetical order). The hash chain search is accomplished with subroutine FXHAS. 
     3. Create a symbol table entry at the end of the symbol table and ‘include’ the entry in the determined position in the has chain. The actual insertion is accomplished with subroutine INSYM. 
     The symbol table for symbol table entries is shown in TABLE XXVIf Each symbol table entry is six words in length in the present embodiment. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The reference link is the head of the reference chain for that symbol, one two word reference is created at the end of the reference chain. The hash link points to the next symbol entry on the same hash chain. The locator contains the core address assigned to the symbol, if the symbol is a label. The type/attribute describes the symbol. There are three types recognized; op codes, assembler directives, and labels. A symbol may have the following attributes: 
     Bit  15  defined for internal use 
       14  multiply defined 
       13  literal (not implemented) 
       12  entry 
       11  external 
       10  relocation 
       9  defined for external use 
     Bits  0 - 7  Type: op code number, if between 1 and 127 assembler pseudo op, if between 128 and 255 label, if zero. 
     The symbol is the truncated packed EBCDIC equivalent of the alpha-numeric characters of the symbol. 
     The symbol table for reference entries is shown in TABLE XXVIg. Labels are normally referenced in a program. For each symbol a chain of reference entries is generated, one entry for each reference to a given symbol. Each entry is two words in length. The first word is a pointer and the second is the line number in the program where the label was referenced. The entries are linked by pointers, from one entry to the next, the last reference entry will have zero as its pointer and be interpreted as the line where symbol definition occurred. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     In the above example the symbol ‘A’ is defined on line  7  and referenced on lines  5  and  10 . Note that the cross reference is by line number. 
     The creation of references is accomplished with subroutine REFR. 
     Each entry in the op code list of the Instruction Definition Area is one word in the present embodiment. The word is a pointer to the instruction definition header. 
     Header Op Code Definition Entries in Instruction Definition Area—The header for each instruction in the present embodiment is four words in length as shown in TABLE XXVIh The first word is the machine operation code number for the instruction. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XXVIh 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Op Code 
               
               
                   
                 Mode 1 Composition List 
               
               
                   
                 Mode 2 Composition List 
               
               
                   
                 Descriptor 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The second and third words are pointers to the composition list for Mode  1  and Mode  2 , respectively. They may point to the same composition list if the instruction has identical form in both modes. One of them will contain zero if the instruction is not valid in that particular mode. 
     The fourth word contains the relocatable test type, the core allocation requirement, and syntax type (parse code number) for the instruction. 
     Op Code Definition Entries in Instruction Definition Area—The instruction composition list is variable in length. The first word contains both the number of variables referenced and numbers of fields used. Twice the number of fields used, plus one for the first word, is the length of the composition list. The description of each field used required two words. The first word contains the field code number and number of bits in the field. The second word contains either data or the number of the operand from the operand list to be used (first, second, third, etc.). 
     The Instruction Composition List is shown in TABLES XXVIi and XXVIj. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     RETURN ADDRESS STACK 
     The return address stack is provided to permit recursive use of subroutines. When a subroutine is entered the return address is saved by adding it to the stack. When exit from a subroutine occurs, the last stack entry is removed and used as the branch address, thereby returning to the calling program. The stack is shown in TABLE XXVIk 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     FLAG TABLE 
     The flag table provides a means of passing information from program to program without the overhead of passing argument lists as shown in TABLE XXVIl. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVI1 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 SYMBOL 
                 Meaning 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 CONTL 
                 Assembler control vector. Bits are set by selecting options. 
               
               
                 IPNTR 
                 Card scan pointer. Points to next character on card image. 
               
               
                 LINE 
                 Line number in program. Same as card count, except 
               
               
                   
                 HDNG and LIST ignored. 
               
               
                 MNEMO 
                 Count of mnemonics being defined. 
               
               
                 COLUM 
                 Card scan pointer. Points to beginning character of a field. 
               
               
                 LABEL 
                 Card scan pointer. Points to symbol entry for a label. 
               
               
                 LARGP 
                 Maximum address assigned in program being assembled. 
               
               
                 NUM 
                 Card scan value, if a constant. 
               
               
                 VREG 
                 Count of variables referenced in instruction build. 
               
               
                 CONFG 
                 Card scan flag, set if a constant is detected. 
               
               
                 SYMPT 
                 Symbol table pointer. Points to next available space. 
               
               
                 BASE 
                 Points to beginning of symbol chain during merge of 
               
               
                   
                 alphabetically ordered symbol strings for printing. 
               
               
                 LOCAT 
                 Location counter. Contains next assignable location. 
               
               
                 CHAIN 
                 Points to last symbol string merged during merge of 
               
               
                   
                 alphabetically ordered symbol strings for printing. 
               
               
                 FEC 
                 Fatal error count. Incremented for each fatal error detected. 
               
               
                 LOPCD 
                 Base address of instruction definition portion of symbol 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 NWORD 
                 Number of words used for symbol table build. 
               
               
                 IDEFN 
                 Count of op codes defined. 
               
               
                 MODE 
                 Mode of instruction being defined. 
               
               
                 INFLD 
                 Number of fields in instruction being defined. 
               
               
                 IHADR 
                 Instruction definition pointer. Points to next available 
               
               
                   
                 address. 
               
               
                 P2FLG 
                 Pass Two Text Flag 
               
               
                 ICORE 
                 Core allocation. 
               
               
                 MAXC 
                 Maximum core size of assembler target computer. 
               
               
                 RTYPE 
                 Program relocation type. 
               
               
                 TOK 
                 Card scan flag. Contains code number for type of character 
               
               
                   
                 detected. 
               
               
                 TOKTP 
                 Card scan pointer. Points to symbol table entry if an 
               
               
                   
                 identifier (keyword or label) detected. 
               
               
                 SIMEX 
                 Expression parse flag. Set to indicate expression evaluation 
               
               
                   
                 is in progress. 
               
               
                 MACHF 
                 Pass One Control vector. Bits used as indicative flags. 
               
               
                 ENTRY 
                 Count of number of entry points encountered. 
               
               
                 OBJCT 
                 Pass Two control vector. Bits used as indicative flags. 
               
               
                 THESM 
                 External reference pointer. Points to symbol table entry 
               
               
                   
                 for an externally referenced symbol. 
               
               
                 EXREF 
                 Count of number of external references encountered. 
               
               
                 PGCNT 
                 Page count for listing. 
               
               
                 INSBL 
                 Contains generated object code (two words). 
               
               
                 OPRND 
                 List of operands decoded from operand field (seven words). 
               
               
                 EDITV 
                 Edit control vector. 
               
               
                 LINE2 
                 Line count for updated source text under edit option. 
               
               
                 SMALL 
                 Minimum address assigned in program being assembled. 
               
               
                 ASVSM 
                 Word count and sector address (two words) for symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 specified under “use symbol table” option. 
               
               
                 AUSSM 
                 Word count and sector address (two words) for symbol table 
               
               
                   
                 specified under “use symbol table” option. 
               
               
                 PARSP 
                 Parse stack pointer. First word of list (41 words) used in 
               
               
                   
                 expression evaluation. 
               
               
                 ACC 
                 Value(s) returned from expression evaluation (4 words). 
               
               
                 RAP 
                 Return address stack pointer. First word of list (16 words) 
               
               
                   
                 of current return address. 
               
               
                 EXTRN 
                 Card scan flag. Set to indicate search for external reference. 
               
               
                 OBJMS 
                 Object module size. Contains length of object module. 
               
               
                 BCCNT 
                 Binary core counter. Contains count of locations used. 
               
               
                 PRTYP 
                 Program relocation type. 
               
               
                 HDCNT 
                 Header word count. Number of words in data header. 
               
               
                 SCHDR 
                 Word count and sector address of record containing current 
               
               
                   
                 data header. (two words). 
               
               
                 RPNTR 
                 Relocation word pointer. Points to word of relocation bits. 
               
               
                 WPNTR 
                 Word pointer. Points to next available word in BFW8. 
               
               
                 BFW8 
                 Buffer for object code (nine words). 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The three flags CONTL, MACHF, and OBJCT are used as control vectors. The bit assignments for each one is as shown in TABLES XXVIm and n. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                 TABLE XXVIm 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 CONTL 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Bit 
                 15 
                 Card Input 
               
               
                   
                   
                 14 
                 Disk Input 
               
               
                   
                   
                 13 
                 Print Symbol Table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 12 
                 Punch Binary Card Deck 
               
               
                   
                   
                 11 
                 Punch Binary Tape 
               
               
                   
                   
                 10 
                 List Source Text 
               
               
                   
                   
                 9 
                 Save Symbol Table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 
                 System Symbol Table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 7 
                 Cross Reference 
               
               
                   
                   
                 6 
                 Premature Terminate Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 5 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 4 
                 Program Name Supplied 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 
                 Store Program OBJ Module 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2 
                 Edit Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 
                 Insert Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIml 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 MACHINE FLAGS 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MACHF 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Bit 
                 15 
                 Machine Data Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 14 
                 Machine Dummy Data Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 13 
                 End Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 12 
                 Process Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 11 
                 Key Word Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 10 
                 External REF Flag (used by CALL) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 9 
                 External REF Indicator 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIn 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 PASS 2 FLAGS 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 OBJECT - System Symbol 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Bit 
                 15 
                 No Object Code, if On 
               
               
                   
                   
                 14 
                 Entry Flag, if On 
               
               
                   
                   
                 13 
                 Tag Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 12 
                 Simple Expression Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                 11 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 10 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 9 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 7 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 6 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 5 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 4 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 
                 Not Used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 
                 Relocatable Operand Flag 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     CARD BUFFER 
     The card buffer is 81 words long in the present embodiment. The symbol IAREA references its beginning address. It is used to read and process one card image (source text) at a time. Data is read in packed EBCDIC form (40 words) starting ar IREA+1. The data is “unpacked” to 80 words. Pass Two text is formed by using the three words IAREA, IAREA−1 and IAREA−2 as a three word header appended to the card image, repacking the card image to 40 words, and using IAREA−2 to IAREA+37 as a unit record of Pass Two text. The last three words from the card image (IAREA+38, IAREA+39, IAREA+40) are discarded. The Card Buffer is represented in TABLES XXVIo and p. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIo 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIp 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PASS TWO TEXT 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     P2 TEXT CONVENTION PASS 1 
     a) Each special subroutine processor specified the following P2 data to be inserted into P2 text. 
     1. LOC CNTR 
     2. OP CODE # 
     3. ERR INDICATOR 
     4. Last value of token pointer 
     b) Pass 1 processor inserts this information into P2 text prior to writing it. 
     c) Each special subroutine is responsible for calling the error generator when required. 
     d) The error generator maintains the ERROR CODE LIST and the error counter. 
     DISK BUFFERS 
     There are three 2310 disk buffers used by the ASSEMBLER. The symbols used to reference the beginning addresses are IDISK and ODISK. Each of them is 322 words long, with the first two words containing word count and sector address as shown in TABLE XXVIq. 
     IDISK is used for reading and writing card images from source text and Pass Two test. Card images are added (removed), 40 words at a time, until the buffer is full (empty). Then the buffer is written to (read from) disk, and the filling (emptying) process begins again. 
     ODISK is used for the object module generated by the ASSEMBLER. Object code for each instruction, along with the associated relocation factors, and new starting locations when program discontinuities are encountered, is added to the buffer. When full, it is transferred to the disk. 
     EDISK is used to buffer the edit text to the edit file. The buffer is used only during the Prolog. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIq 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Another disk buffer is WDISK, shown in TABLE XXVIr. It is used to write edited source test to the 2311 disk. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIr 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Heading Buffer and Print Buffer 
     A special buffer, shown in TABLE XXVIs is provided for page headings output listing. When a heading instruction is encountered, the listing is ejected to a new page. The rest of the card image is interpreted as a comment and transferred to the heading buffer. The comments appear at the top of every page, until another heading instruction appears. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIs 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The printing buffer, shown in TABLE XXV. It is provided for listing card images during assembly. Each card image is transferred to the buffer, along with the location, generated object code, line number and error indicators and printed when the list option is set. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIt 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The error list of the present embodiment is 201 words long. The symbol used to reference this beginning address shown in TABLES XXVIu and v is TEC. The first word contains the address of the next available space in the table. Error entries are two words each; the first word contains the card column (from scanning) and code number for the error type; and the second word contains the line number in the program where the error occurred. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIu 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIv 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 ERROR CODE LIST 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     TOTAL ERR CNT’ is initialized to ‘ER LIST’ and points to next available location in the list. 
     ACTUAL CNT=(TOTAL ERR CNT−RE LIST)·/2 
     Only the first hundred errors will be retained. If more than 100 occur, ASM will not stop but only the first hundred errors will be listed; however, the error count will be maintained. 
     FEC (‘FATAL ERROR COUNT’) will also be kept. An object will be produced as long as FEC=0 regardless of the value of TEC. 
     PARSE STACK 
     The parse stack shown in TABLE XXVIw is used to evaluate expressions in the operand field of an instruction. When the operand field is scanned and the beginning of an expression detected, entries are made in the parse stack for each type of symbol, constant and operator. When a delimiter is reached, the contents of the stack serve as a pattern for evaluation. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIw 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The stack is the mechanism for executing a bottom-up parse of the expression. An entry in the parse stack is shown in TABLE XXVIx. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIx 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 PSEUDO REGISTER DESIGNATOR 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1 = data in Pseudo Register 
               
               
                   
                 0 = data in Value Field 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 F CODE - Precedence Level Indicator 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 VALUE - 
                 IDENTIFIERS - LOCATOR VALUE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CONSTANTS - CONTANT VALUE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 * UNARY OPERATOR - LOCATION COUNTER 
               
               
                   
                   
                 OPERATORS - TOKTP 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     ABS/REL Properties—A tally is kept to insure no relocation errors are generated. 
     In conjunction with the parse stack, a pseudo accumulator, shown in TABLE XXVIy, is maintained. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXVIy 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PSEUDO ACCUMULATOR 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The pseudo accumulator is used by Expression Parse&#39;s generator sub-routine. The pseudo accumulator in conjunction with the parse stack provides the vehicle for evaluation of expressions. 
     OPERAND LIST 
     The operand list is eleven words long in the present embodiment. The symbol used, as shown in TABLE XXVIz to reference its beginning address is OPRND. As the operand field of an instruction is scanned, the specified parse routine evaluates the data in the field and puts each item into the operand list. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIz 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EXTERNAL REFERENCE LIST 
     The external reference list in the present embodiment is 100 words long. The symbol used to reference its beginning address, as shown in TABLE XXVIIa is EXLST. The first word contains the address of the next available place for an entry. Each entry is one word, containing the starting address of the symbol table entry for the referenced symbol. (external symbols). 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     EDIT VECTOR 
     The Edit Vector shown in TABLE XXVIIb is utilized for updates. When all updates are complete, the update flag is turned off. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CODE:  
               
               
                 0 - TEXT  
               
               
                 1 - Insert  
               
               
                 2 - delete ([/replace] 
               
               
                 3 - END of update  
               
             
          
         
       
     
     OUTPUTS 
     OBJECT MODULE 
     The ASSEMBLER outputs an object module for each error-free program assembled. The object module contains the generated object code for each instruction in the program, the number and name of entry points, the number and name of external references, and the type and size of the program. 
     The object module is generated during execution of Pass Two. It is maintained in disk storage in Non Process Working Storage. 
     The format of the object module for relocatable programs is shown in TABLE XXVIIc. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The format of the object module for absolute programs is shown in TABLE XXVIId. 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The OBJ Module Program Type is shown in TABLE XXVIIe. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIe 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Mode Restriction 
                 Program Type 
                 Type Code 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 MODE 2 
                 MDATA 
                 =1 
               
               
                 MODE 2 
                 PROGRAM 
                 =2 
               
               
                 MODE 1 
                 ABS 
                 =3 
               
               
                 MODE 1 
                 REL 
                 =4 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The Data Block (Header and Data) is shown in TABLE XXVIIf. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 For ABS Program, data consists of binary code. 
               
               
                   
                 For REL Program, data consists of relocation word + object code. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Relocation Code  
               
               
                 00 - EXTERNAL  
               
               
                 01 - ABS  
               
               
                 10 - REL  
               
               
                 1100 - CALL  
               
             
          
         
       
     
     For ABS Program, data consists of binary code. 
     For REL Program, data consists of relocation word+object code. 
     Relocation word appears only in Mode 1 relocatable programs. 
     ABS—No relation 
     REL—Add in relocation factor 
     SUB NAME—Replace with a BSI call 
     Error Messages—The ASSEMBLER outputs a message regarding errors detected during assembly, either that none were detected, or the number and description of errors that were detected. The Error Codes utilized in the present embodiment are as listed in TABLE XXVIIg. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIg 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 ERROR CODES AND ERRORS 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 USER 
                 ASSEMBLY ERRORS: 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 *A1 
                 EDIT DIRECTIVE EXPECTED 
               
               
                 *A2 
                 RELOCATION TYPE NOT SPECIFIED 
               
               
                 *A3 
                 UNRECOGNIZABLE OP CODE 
               
               
                 *A4 
                 MULTIPLE SYMBOL DEFINITION 
               
               
                 *A5 
                 ILLEGAL OP CODE THIS MODE 
               
               
                 A6 
                 STATEMENT MUST NOT BE LABELLED 
               
               
                 *A7 
                 INVALID CHARACTER READ 
               
               
                 *A8 
                 STATEMENT SYNTAX ERROR 
               
               
                 *A9 
                 PROGRAM EXCEEDS FEP CORE SIZE 
               
               
                 A10 
                 ASSEMBLER DIRECTIVE MUST APPEAR BEFORE 
               
               
                   
                 BODY OF PROGRAM 
               
               
                 A11 
                 ILLEGAL MODE SPECIFICATION 
               
               
                 A12 
                 MDATA STATEMENT ALLOWED ONLY IN MODE 2 
               
               
                 A13 
                 MULTIPLE RELOCATION TYPE SPECIFICATION 
               
               
                 A14 
                 CONFLICTING RELOCATION TYPE SPECIFICATION 
               
               
                 *A15 
                 RELOCATION ERROR 
               
               
                 *A16 
                 VARIABLE FIELD SYNTAX ERROR 
               
               
                 *A17 
                 ILLEGAL VALUE IN VARIABLE FIELD 
               
               
                 *A18 
                 UNDEFINED SYMBOL 
               
               
                 *A19 
                 EXCEED SIZE OF SYMBOL TABLE, ABORT JOB 
               
               
                 *A20 
                 EXCEED SIZE OF PARSE STACK 
               
               
                 *A21 
                 STATEMENT MUST BE LABELLED 
               
               
                 *A22 
                 INVALID SYMBOL OR CONSTANT OR CONSTANT TOO 
               
               
                   
                 LARGE 
               
               
                 *A23 
                 NEGATIVE LOCATION COUNTER IS RESULT OF ORG 
               
               
                   
                 OR MDUMY 
               
               
                 *A24 
                 INVALID OPERATION AND OR RELOCATION ERROR 
               
               
                   
                 IN EXPRESSION 
               
               
                 A25 
                 ABORT SAVE SYMBOL TABLE. NOT AN ABS ASSEMBLY 
               
               
                 A26 
                 ORG STATEMENT ALLOWED ONLY IN MODE 1 
               
               
                 *A27 
                 ABS ALLOWED ONLY IN MODE 1 OR ENT OR DEF 
               
               
                   
                 ALLOWED ONLY IN MODE 2 
               
               
                 *A28 
                 EXCEED SIZE OF RETURN ADDRESS STACK. 
               
               
                   
                 ABORT JOB 
               
               
                 A29 
                 MDUMY STATEMENT ALLOWED ONLY IN MODE 2 
               
               
                 A30 
                 MULTIPLE MDUMY STATEMENTS NOT ALLOWED 
               
               
                 A31 
                 ABORT SAVE SYMBOL TABLE. ASSEMBLY ERRORS 
               
               
                 *A32 
                 NAME NOT SUPPLIED FOR MODE 2 PROGRAM 
               
               
                 *A33 
                 EXCEED MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ENTRY SPECIFI- 
               
               
                   
                 CATIONS AND EXTERNAL DEFINITIONS 
               
               
                 *A34 
                 CALL OR REF ALLOWED ONLY ON MODE 1 
               
               
                   
                 RELOCATABLE 
               
               
                 *A35 
                 EXCEED MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EXTERNAL 
               
               
                   
                 REFERENCES 
               
               
                 *A36 
                 EDIT DIRECTIVE MUST REFERENCE INCREASING LINE 
               
               
                   
                 NUMBERS 
               
               
                 *A37 
                 EDIT FILE OVERFLOW. ABORT JOB. 
               
               
                 *A38 
                 EXTERNAL SYMBOL NOT ALLOWED IN AN 
               
               
                   
                 EXPRESSION 
               
               
                 *A39 
                 MULTIPLE EXTERNAL DECLARATION OF SYMBOL 
               
               
                 A40 
                 FEATURE NOT IMPLEMENTED 
               
               
                 A41 
                 DMES NOT TERMINATED OR CONTINUED PROPERLY 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 *Indicates a fatal error.  
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Program Listing—The ASSEMBLER will print source text for each card in the program, along the generated object code, assigned location, and error indicators whenever the list option is selected. The listing has page and line numbers, and page headings for each page. 
     When list flag is on the ASSEMBLER prints page headings and lists each card image along with core location, generated object code, line number and error indicators. 
     The format of the page headings is as follows: 
     Total width of print line=120 columns. 
     First line at top of page: Heading. 
     In columns 2-13: ASSEMBLY 
     In columns 16-76: blanks, or 61 characters from the last HDNG card encountered. 
     In columns 79-91: DATE XX/YY/ZZ, where XX=month, YY=day, ZZ=year. The data is kept in one word in INSKEL/COMMON in the computer. 
     In columns 94-108: TIME XX, YY, ZZ, WW, where XX=hours, YY=minutes, ZZ=seconds, WW=AM or PM. Time of day is kept in fixed contents of core by system clock (Time C). 
     In columns 111-119: PAGE XXXX, where XXXX=page number. 
     Second line on page: blank. 
     Third line of page: column titles. 
     In columns 3-6: HLOC (hexadecimal location) 
     In columns 9-19: INSTRUCTION (generated object code). 
     In columns 21-24: LINE (line number assigned by ASSEMBLER. 
     In columns 27-29: ERR (error flag). 
     In columns 31-40: SOURCE TEXT (card image) 
     In columns 116-120: DLOC (if not procedure program); or EVENT (if procedure program). 
     Card images are listed on fifth through fifty-fifth line of each page. 
     The format is: 
     In columns 3-6: hexadecimal equivalent of location. 
     In columns 11-18: hexadecimal equivalent of generated object code. 
     In columns 27-28: blanks, if no error was detected on this card; or, two asterisks, if an error was detected. 
     In columns 31-104: first 74 columns of card image. 
     PRINT SYMBOL TABLE 
     The ASSEMBLER will print an alphabetical list of entries in the symbol table with a code for each entry showing type of symbol. 
     The format of the print symbol table is shown below. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 ATTRIBUTE CODE (type of symbol) 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 C = 
                  - relocatable internal 
               
               
                   
                   
                 M - multiply defined 
               
               
                   
                   
                 U - undefined 
               
               
                   
                   
                 E - entry 
               
               
                   
                   
                 A - absolute internal 
               
               
                   
                   
                 X - external 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 HEADING: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 ‘SYMBOL TABLE’ 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Cross Reference Map—The ASSEMBLER will print an alphabetized list of symbols used in the program. For each symbol a summary of lines where that symbol was mentioned is generated. 
     The format of the Cross Reference Map is shown below: 
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The following heading precedes the cross reference table: 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 CROSS REFERENCE 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 DEF 
                 SYMBOL 
                 REF 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Field Definitions 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 F 1  = defining line number 
               
               
                   
                 F 2  - SYMBOL 
               
               
                   
                 F 3  - referencing line number. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Object Code Card Deck—The ASSEMBLER will punch an object deck on cards for error-free absolute programs. The cares and formatted a special way. 
     Each card of the object deck contains starting address, data word count, data words, and identification. 
     In columns 1-4: location, in hexadecimal 
     In column 5: zero 
     In columns 6-7: data word count (maximum 16) in decimal 
     In column 8: zero 
     In columns 9-72: data words, in hexadecimal 
     In columns 73-76: the first four letters of the program name. 
     In columns 77-80: card sequence number, in decimal. 
     CORE LOAD BUILDER 
     This program builds a core load for MODE 1 programs to be loaded into a 2540M computer. Inputs to the program are object modules residing on disks (2311) generated and stored previously by the ASSEMBLER. Object modules for mainline and all other programs referenced by the mainline or interrupt servicing routines, if assigned, must reside on the disks for building the core load. Both absolute and relocatable programs can be input but cannot be intermixed in a given core load. Difference core loads are built to handle the two types. The programs, after relocation, are converted to core image format and stored on other (2310) disks in the fixed area supported by TSX. A core load map can be obtained, if desired. Core loads can be built for different core sizes. At present, the allowable options are only 8K and 16K. Object modules for mainline and all other programs that are referenced by the mainline or interrupt servicing routines (if assigned) is residing on 2311 disk for building the core loads successfully. A core load map can be obtained if desired. Core loads can be built for different core sizes. At present the allowable options are only 8K and 16K. 
     The program recognizes 6 control cards. 
     1) @ LOADR 
     2) @ LOADA 
     3) @ ASSIGN 
     4) @ COMMON 
     5) @ INCLUDE 
     6) @ END 
     The format and options of the control cards are described below in detail. 
     1. @ LOADR 
     The specifies the number of loader specification cards to follow this card, the load, the name of the program, load point, 
     module buffer, map option, maximum core size, and that the program to be loaded is relocatable. 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 89 
                 11 
                 21 
                 31 
                 41 
                 51 
               
               
                 @ 
                 NN 
                 NAMEP 
                 XXXXX 
                 MODULE- 
                 MAP 
                 CSIZE 
               
               
                 LOADR 
                   
                   
                   
                 NAME 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     NN specifies the number of specification cards following this card for this core load (right justified). 
     NAMEP Columns 11 through 15, left justified is the name of the mainline program to be loaded (the first one loaded). 
     XXXXX Columns 21 through 25, right justified, specifies the load point in decimal, where the programs should start. 
     MODULENAME Starting the column 31 (maximum of 10 characters including embedded blanks) is the name of the module for which this coreload is desired. 
     MAP in columns 41, 42 and 43 prints coreload map, otherwise no coreload map. 
     CSIZE Columns 51 through 55 right justified in decimal specifies the maximum core size. 
     Note: Any number greater than or equal to 16000 will set the core size to 16K, otherwise the core size is set to 8K. The default option is 8K. 
     Caution: Make sure that the size of the core image file on 2310 disk for this module is equal to or greater than the core size specified by this control card. Otherwise, the fixed area on disk will be overlayed. 
     2. @ LOADA card 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 1 
                 11  15 
                 21 
               
               
                   
                 @ LOADA 
                  XXXXX 
                 NAMEP 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     same as LOADR—no map option. For absolute programs. This option not implemented. 
     3. @ ASSIGN 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 1 
                 14 
                 21 
               
               
                   
                 @ ASSIGN 
                 YY 
                 NAMEP 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     This card assigns an interrupt service program to the specified interrupt level. 
     YY Columns 14 and 15—Interrupt level to be assigned. 
     NAMEP—Name of the program to be assigned to that level. 
     Note: 
     1) Only relocatable programs can be assigned to interrupt levels. 
     2) This should follow a @ LOADR or @ COMMON cards and may not be used together with @ LOADA. 
     4. @ COMMON 
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 1 
                 11  15 
               
               
                   
                 @ COMMON 
                 XXXXX 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     XXXXX is the size of the common (in decimal) to be reversed at the high end of core memory. (right justified). 
     This card can be used in conjunction with @ LOADR card only. 
     5. @ INCLUDE 
     This specifies any subroutines to be included in a special dedicated branch table in the 2540 memory. A branch instruction referencing the entry point of the subroutine is stored into the branch table location specified by the inclusion number on the control card. 
     The format of the control card is: 
     
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 1 
                 14 
                 21 
               
               
                   
                 @ INCLUSIVE 
                 NN 
                 NAMEP 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     NN specifies the table entry assigned for this subroutine. 
     NAMEP is the name of the program to be loaded. 
     6. @ END 
     This card indicates the end of the loading process. 
     Note: The core load build program searches the 2311 disk file to get the name of the core file for the specified module (computer) and find the disk address of the flies by searching FLET entries. The format of the core load map is described in Functional Description part of this write up. For an example of the loader control cards and core load map, see the listing which follows. 
     PROGRAM OPERATION 
     The CORE LOAD BUILDER reads in all control cards and generates a Load Matrix, specifying by name all programs mentioned on the control cards. The order of entries is determined by order of appearance, except for interrupt assignments and special inclusions. The order of entries is important in that secondary entry points of programs, and external definitions, are loaded before they are referenced by other programs. 
     The CORE LOAD BUILDER program then makes two passes over the programs. During Pass 1, the object module header is read into core, and all the entries and references are processed for all the programs whose names were entered in the load matrix by the control program that reads control cards. Processing of entries and references is described in detail below. The names in the load matrix are processed in the same way as the other program names ad continued until no more programs are referenced. If any errors are detected during Pass 1 no load indicator is set and the errors are printed out. 
     Four types of errors can be detected during Pass 1. 
     1. XXXXX NO PROGRAM THIS NAME means the object module for program XXXXX could not be found on 2311 disk. 
     2. XXXXX LOAD ONLY RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS means this program was assembled as absolute program and the object module is in absolute format. Correction: assemble as relocatable program and store. 
     3. XXXXX MULTIPLE ENTRY POINTS WITH SAME NAME means there are more than one entry points with same name XXXXX at different addresses. Correction: reassemble after correcting name, and store 
     4. CORE SIZE EXCEEDED All the programs can not be loaded into core as the programs exceed the core size of computer. 
     PROCESSING ENTRIES AND REFERENCES 
     Processing could mean two different operations here. 1) To assign addresses if the name is entry point and marking it as defined in the load matrix, or 2) to enter the name of the external reference in the load matrix, if it was not there already and mark it as undefined. Later on we have to process these names for entries and references if they are the names of programs. 
     A core load map is printed if desired, irrespective of the errors at the end of Pass 1. The format of core load MAP is 
     
       
         NAMEP LOC I.L. 
       
     
     where 
     NAMEP is the name of the program or entry point or external reference and LOC is the address of the program or entry point or the symbol in hex. I.L. is the interrupt level of the program, if the program had been assigned. if NAMEP is COMMON the value in LOC. specifies the size of COMMON in HEX assigned at the high end of the core. If NAMEP=CORE, the LOC. specifies the size of core remaining after loading all the program during this job. 
     The No Load indicator is checked before proceeding to Pass 2 and the job is aborted if it is set. Then the interrupt level assignments are made if necessary. 
     At this stage the total size of the core load excluding COMMON is inserted in the module file under programs 2311 disk file. 
     PASS 2 
     During Pass 2, the programs are relocated and converted to absolute format and stored on 2310 disk. This is done in the following manner. 
     Initialize load pointer to the beginning of load matrix. The first 5 records of object module are read into core by the main program. 
     MARKL subroutine is called to mark all the entry point names of this program that appear in the load matrix as loaded. 
     ERDEF subroutine is called to establish definitions (addresses) for all external references listed in the object module for this program. This is necessary since the serial number of the external reference is stored in object code. So we prepare a list of addresses of all external references of this program in the same order and pick up the address when this is referenced in code. Now everything is ready to relocate the program. 
     LOAD program converts all relocatable addresses (specified by relocation bits in the (object module) by adding load point of this program to the address and stores on 2310 disk files (file protected). Internal buffering is used to achieve this relocation. In actual practice LOAD subroutine moves 9 words of object module and calls RLD subroutine to relocate. This RDL relocates the code and leaves it in another buffer DLIST and calls WRTCD subroutine to copy the relocated code buffer DLIST into the big buffer CIWC. Whenever this is full, it is copied onto the 2310 disk. 
     LOAD program calls MOVEW subroutine to move object module code into small buffer DBUF and also TSTBF to test for the availability of data in the object module buffer. (See block diagram of buffers). Whenever a block in the object module is completed it is copied to disk if necessary (i.e., if there are no more blocks) and a sector is read from the disk corresponding to the current address. 
     When the whole program is complete the load pointer is moved to the next entry until there are no more entries. (Entries marked as loaded are skipped). 
     The end is specified by the matrix pointer. At the end of Pass 2 when all the programs are finished a message is printed starting LOAD COMPLETED. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 CORE LOAD EXECUTED FOR MODE 2 CORE LOAD BUILD 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 CORE LOAD NAME 
                 MAINLINE RELOCATABLE NAME 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 CLBLD 
                 CONL 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The program flowcharts for the MODE 1 CORE LOAD BUILDER are as follows. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 CONL Control Record Analyzer 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Mainline program (FORTRAN) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To read loader control cards and process them. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 LOADR, LOADA 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This is the mainline program that reads all the loader 
               
               
                   
                 control cards and makes entries in the load matrix. 
               
               
                   
                 This recognizes 5 types of cards. 1) LOADR; 
               
               
                   
                 2) LOADA, 3) ASSIGN; 4) COMMON; 5) IN- 
               
               
                   
                 CLUDE and 6) END. More than one program 
               
               
                   
                 can be loaded within the same job. An END 
               
               
                   
                 card terminates loading. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 All object modules are on 2311 disk for loading. 
               
               
                 Note: 
                 Absolute loader is not implemented. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIa 
               
               
                 LOADR 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To load relocatable programs from object module on 
               
               
                   
                 to 2310 disk file in core image format. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LOADR 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 FIND1, PREF1, PENT1, CMAP, ILEAVA, 
               
               
                   
                 ERDEF, MARKL, LOAD, RDBIN, RDBUF. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This is called by control card analyzer after reading 
               
               
                   
                 all the control cards and making entries in the load 
               
               
                   
                 matrix. This is the main program that calls the 
               
               
                   
                 other programs to load. If the core size exceeds 
               
               
                   
                 the limit, or the object module is not found on the  
               
               
                   
                 2311 disk, the load function is aborted and a 
               
               
                   
                 message is printed. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 FIND1 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To find the disk address physical file number and 
               
               
                   
                 record number of the object module of a program on 
               
               
                   
                 2311 files. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Reloctable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call FIND1 
               
               
                 Subprograms called 
                 SPMOC, ISRCH, RDRC, KDISK 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The name of the program whose disk address has to 
               
               
                   
                 be found is picked up from the location pointed by 
               
               
                   
                 the Load Matrix definition pointer, converted from  
               
               
                   
                 truncated EBCDIC and then searched in index files. 
               
               
                   
                 If the search is successful, positive value is returned 
               
               
                   
                 in the accumulater, else zero. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 System symbols are used for pointers and values 
               
               
                   
                 rather than using arguments in call. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 PENT1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process entry points in a program during Pass 1 
               
               
                   
                 of loader to set up load matrix. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL PENT1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 RDBIN, RDBUF 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This reads the object module from the 2311 disk and 
               
               
                   
                 processes all entries by assigning absolute addresses 
               
               
                   
                 and storing file and record numbers for multiple 
               
               
                   
                 entries. An error message is printed if there are 
               
               
                   
                 multiple entry points with the same name. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Usage of system symbols instead of passing argu- 
               
               
                   
                 ments with call. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 PREF1 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To process external references in a relocatable 
               
               
                   
                 program during Pass 1 of loader. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call PREF1 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 None. 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This uses the object module read by PENT1 program. 
               
               
                   
                 While processing the references, the load matrix is 
               
               
                   
                 checked to make sure that no multiple entries are 
               
               
                   
                 made for the same subroutine. After an entry is 
               
               
                   
                 made in the load matrix, it is marked as undefined 
               
               
                   
                 and the matrix reference pointer is bumped. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIe 
               
               
                 CMAP 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To print out core load map. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 SPMOC 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL MAP 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The core load map is printed out if “MAP” option is 
               
               
                   
                 specified in loader control cards. Column headings 
               
               
                   
                 are printed and the names and the loading points (in 
               
               
                   
                 HEX) and the interrupt level (if assigned) are 
               
               
                   
                 printed in one line. The available core and the 
               
               
                   
                 size of the common area are also printed at the end. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIf 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ILEVA 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To set up transfer vectors in the trap locations for 
               
               
                   
                 the programs assigned to interrupt levels. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ILEVA 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This sets up the XSW instruction and the loadpoint 
               
               
                   
                 of the program in the trap locations assigned for that 
               
               
                   
                 interrupt level. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The maximum number of levels that can be assigned 
               
               
                   
                 is 16. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIg 
               
               
                 MARKL 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To mark all the entries of the program currently 
               
               
                   
                 being loaded as loaded. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL MARKL 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This marks all the entry points of the current pro- 
               
               
                   
                 gram as loaded by placing a negative value in the file 
               
               
                   
                 number for that entry. The number of entries and 
               
               
                   
                 the names are picked up from the object module read 
               
               
                   
                 earlier by LOADR just before calling this. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIg 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIh 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ERDEF 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To establish definitions for all the external 
               
               
                   
                 references in a program. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL ERDEF 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The external references are picked up from the 
               
               
                   
                 object module which has already been read into 
               
               
                   
                 record buffer and compared with the names in the 
               
               
                   
                 load matrix. When a match is found the loading 
               
               
                   
                 point is copied into the RLIST. The addresses are 
               
               
                   
                 in the same order as the external references. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIi 
               
               
                 LOAD 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To load relocatable programs after converting to 
               
               
                   
                 absolute 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL LOAD 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 RLD, TSTBF, MOVEW 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This is called by LOADR to load programs once for 
               
               
                   
                 each  program  in the load matrix (not to be confused 
               
               
                   
                 entries). This sets up the sector address and 
               
               
                   
                 displacement within the sector for load point, and 
               
               
                   
                 also checks for word count in the data blocks of 
               
               
                   
                 object module. The data is moved into another 
               
               
                   
                 buffer (DBUF) and RLD is called to convert this data 
               
               
                   
                 to absolute. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIi 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIj 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 RLD 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To convert relocatable object code into absolute 
               
               
                   
                 code. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL RLD 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 WRTCD 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This converts the relocatable addresses to absolute 
               
               
                   
                 address by adding load point to the addresses and by 
               
               
                   
                 picking the absolute address from RLIST for external 
               
               
                   
                 references. The relocation word specifies the type 
               
               
                   
                 of conversion to be done and if any. (See diagram 
               
               
                   
                 of buffers used). 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The buffers should be initialized and set ready before 
               
               
                   
                 calling this program. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIk 
               
               
                 MOVEW 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To move data from one buffer to another small 
               
               
                   
                 buffer (fixed location). 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL MOVEW 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 TSTBF 
               
               
                 Called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 This always moves data into a fixed area from 
               
               
                   
                 RECBF, the starting address of the data being moved, 
               
               
                   
                 picked up from a pointer (RECBF-1). 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 The maximum number of words that can be moved at 
               
               
                   
                 one time is 9. This is dictated by the size of the 
               
               
                   
                 buffer. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIk 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIl 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 TSTBF 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 To test if there are any words available in the 
               
               
                   
                 buffer and if not, to read the next record into the 
               
               
                   
                 buffer. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable Area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL TSTBF 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 RDBUF 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 A dump of the record can be obtained with SSW 4 
               
               
                   
                 on. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIm 
               
               
                 COMPS 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Maps five EBCDIC characters into right justified 
               
               
                   
                 name code (30 bits). 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call COMPS 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 DC ENAME 
                 5 EBCDIC characters 
               
               
                   
                 DC NAME 
                 Resultant packed code. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Remarks 
                 The reverse transformation is SPMOC. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVl 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIm 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 SPMOC 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Maps right justified name code into 5 EBCDIC 
               
               
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Call SPMOC 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 DC NAME 
                 Name code 
               
               
                   
                 DC ENAME 
                 5 character EBCDIC 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Remarks 
                 The reverse transformation is COMPS 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXIVm 
               
               
                 WRTCD 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Nonrecursive Subroutine 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Copies relocated code into core image buffer 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Relocatable area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 CALL WRTCD 
               
               
                   
                 Index registers 2 and 3 should be set to the starting 
               
               
                   
                 address of the block of words and the word count 
               
               
                   
                 respectively. 
               
               
                 Subprograms 
                 MOVE, DISKN 
               
               
                 called 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Blocking and spanning is taken care of and the 
               
               
                   
                 buffer is copies onto the disk whenever it is full. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXVIIIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXVIIIn 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXIX 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     The above TABLE XXIX shows the movement of data from the object module to core load and the core load programs utilized for this purpose. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 LOAD MATRIX DESCRIPTION (TABLES XXXa-XXXd) 
               
             
          
           
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
                 REF PNTR points to the next location for making an entry.    DEF PNTR points to the entry that is being processed currently.   Each entry has six words: Words 1 and 2 Truncated EBCDIC name Word 3  Load point or address Words 4 and 5 Disk address (File and re-   cord number on   
               
               
                 #  2311 files) Word 6  Bit 0 - off nothing   Bit 0 - on - This    program is   assigned to   
               
               
                 #  interrupt load.   Bit 4 through   15 - interrupt level   of this program DEF PNTR is initialized to the first  entry at the beginning of Pass 1 and pass 2.   Total sixe of Load Matrix is 1200 words 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
             
          
           
               
                 CIWC 
                 First word in CIWC points to the word where data has to be 
               
               
                   
                 copied. When the whole buffer is copied onto disk, the sector 
               
               
                   
                 address is incremented to the next sector and then read into  
               
               
                   
                 buffer. The pointer initialized to the first data word 
               
               
                   
                 (CIWC + 2). 
               
               
                 RECBF 
                 RECBF keeps count of the number of data words still available 
               
               
                   
                 in the buffer and the word before that points to the next 
               
               
                   
                 available data word. Whenever the count is zero, the next 
               
               
                   
                 record is read into the buffer by MOVEW and the pointer and 
               
               
                   
                 the count are initialized to RECBF + 1 and the number 
               
               
                   
                 of data words respectively. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 DBUC 
                 Object code (relocatable) 
               
               
                   
                 DBUF initialized to DBUF + 2 and incremented as the data 
               
               
                   
                 words are picked up 
               
               
                 DBUF+1 
                 will always be the relocation word. 
               
               
                 DLIST 
                 Buffer to hold the absolute code. 
               
               
                   
                 The first word is a pointer initialized to DLIST+1, and in- 
               
               
                   
                 cremented as the data is stored into the buffer. 
               
               
                   
                 At the end the buffer content is copied to CIWC buffer. 
               
               
                 RLIST 
                 List containing the absolute addresses of external refer- 
               
               
                   
                 ences for the program currently being loaded, in the serial 
               
               
                   
                 order. (This is set up by ERDEF). 
               
               
                   
                 Pointer points to the end of the list (not used in this program). 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXd 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 MODUL(6) 
                 30290 → 30295 
                 Module Name 
               
               
                 INBLK(204) 
                 30296 → 30499 
                 Index blocks to read 2311 files 
               
               
                 CADD 
                 30588 
                 Core size to be added 
               
               
                 IRN 
                 30589 
                 Record number of object module 
               
               
                 IFN 
                 30590 
                 File number of object module 
               
               
                 IDATA(3) 
                 30591 → 30593 
                 Data of sector header 
               
               
                 IFILA 
                 30592 
                 Sector address of 2310 file 
               
               
                 ICONV 
                 30594 → 30595 
                 Truncated EBCDIC name 
               
               
                 MAXC 
                 30596 
                 Maximum core size 
               
               
                 ICOMN 
                 30597 
                 Size of COMMON 
               
               
                 INAME 
                 30598 → 30600 
                 EBCDIC name of program 
               
               
                 OBJBF 
                 30608 
                 Buffer for use of RDBIN 
               
               
                 RECBF 
                 30666 
                 Buffer for object module 
               
               
                 MATXB 
                 30974 → 32175 
                 Load Matrix 
               
               
                 RLIST 
                 32176 → 32227 
                 External reference address list 
               
               
                 DBUF 
                 32278 → 32287 
                 Object module data buffer 
               
               
                 DLIST 
                 32288 → 32298 
                 Data list of relocated code 
               
               
                 DISPL 
                 32299 
                 Displacement within the sector 
               
               
                 LDPNT 
                 32300 
                 Load point of this core load 
               
               
                 MAP 
                 32301 
                 Core load map option flag 
               
               
                 INTRF 
                 32302 
                 Interrupt assignment flag 
               
               
                 CIWC 
                 32446 → 32767 (322) 
                 Core image buffer area 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 SEGCL 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Process mainline program (Segmented core load 
               
               
                   
                 builder). 
               
               
                 Function 
                 This program combines the already linked MODE 1 
               
               
                   
                 for a 2540 with up to 5 data bases containing 
               
               
                   
                 PROCEDURES and MDATA and makes all data 
               
               
                   
                 bases absolute. A core load map and individual 
               
               
                   
                 module maps are also generated. The eventual 
               
               
                   
                 core layout is shown along with the flowchart. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 The mainline core load is initiated from the console 
               
               
                   
                 where the computer identification is input. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 This program will only work if the size of a single 
               
               
                   
                 data base is less than 7925 words in length and if 
               
               
                   
                 the MODE 1 size is less than 15,850 words. 
               
               
                 Flowchart 
                 Described in TABLE XXXIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXIa 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Data Base Builder (DATBX) 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Non-process core load. 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Build and save on disk under a specified module 
               
               
                   
                 name the object code block (executable procedures 
               
               
                   
                 and data) for a given set of machines comprising 
               
               
                   
                 the specified module. A disk-resident configura- 
               
               
                   
                 tion list is accessed to obtain the order and names 
               
               
                   
                 of the specific machines to be included. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Fixed area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Entered by //XEQ control card specifying name 
               
               
                   
                 of the program. Data card following specifies 
               
               
                   
                 the particular module. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 A “maps” is printed showing the name and order 
               
               
                   
                 of machines in the module, along with the name of 
               
               
                   
                 the control program (procedure) referenced by 
               
               
                   
                 each machine, and the total core requirement for 
               
               
                   
                 the object code block. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Object code block may not exceed 8K. Intended for 
               
               
                   
                 use with a particular file structured disk containing 
               
               
                   
                 pre-stored module names and configuration lists 
               
               
                   
                 for each module, and pre-stored object code for 
               
               
                   
                 each procedure referenced, and pre-stored object 
               
               
                   
                 code MDATA blocks for each machine referenced. 
               
               
                 Flowchart 
                 Described in TABLE XXXIb. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXIb 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Access Logical File (MACLF) 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Non-process core load. 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Allows user definition and maintenance of data 
               
               
                   
                 files on the 2311 disk. Control cards (ampersand 
               
               
                   
                 in column 1, followed by keywords for command) 
               
               
                   
                 are read from a card reader. Ten character 
               
               
                   
                 names for files and subfiles are recognized. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Fixed area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Entered by //XEQ control card specifying name 
               
               
                   
                 of program. Data cards following specify the 
               
               
                   
                 desired user options. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 The control cards recognized by the program are: 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     @ NEW FILE IIIIIIIIII 
     Used to define files and subfiles. The specified name may be ten characters in length. Special control cards specifying size and number of records follow. 
     @ STORE 
     Used to initialize file or subfile contents as specified on following data cards. Terminated by @ card. 
     @ 
     Used to terminate an initialize function&#39;s data cards. 
     @ ACCESS JJJJJJJJJJ/KKKKKKKKKK 
     Used to access a particular subfile (KKKKKKKKKK) of a defined file or subfile (JJJJJJJJJJ). May be followed by any control card except @. 
     @ BACK 
     Used to access one superfile level of the current subfile accessed (opposite of @ ACCESS function). 
     @ ADD LLLLLLLLLL 
     Used to add one entry LLLLLLLLLL to the current accessed subfile. 
     @ DELETE MMMMMMMMMM 
     Used to delete one entry MMMMMMMMMM to the current accessed subfile. 
     @ LIST 
     Used to list the entries of the current accessed subfile. 
     @ END 
     Used to terminate execution of MACLF program. 
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Note 
                 Error messages are printed if named files or 
               
               
                   
                 subfiles cannot be properly handled according to 
               
               
                   
                 the desired control option. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Intended for use with 2311 type disk. 
               
               
                 Flowchart 
                 Described in TABLE XXXIc. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXIc 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 2540 BOOTSTRAP 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type 
                 Absolute (core image) program for 2540M computer. 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Sets interrupt status and list word substitution 
               
               
                   
                 required for communication between host computer 
               
               
                   
                 and 2540M computer, supports two communications 
               
               
                   
                 approximately 8000 computer words long, and 
               
               
                   
                 provides transfer to known location for beginning 
               
               
                   
                 of Cold Start program execution when successful 
               
               
                   
                 transfer complete is acknowledged by host. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Punched paper tape for auto-load function of 2540M. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Entered through auto-load function of 2540M via 
               
               
                   
                 paper tape, followed by manual transfer to location 
               
               
                   
                 /3FB4. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Program will retry, if unsuccessful transmission 
               
               
                   
                 is indicated by host computer. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Intended for use with Segmented Loader program in 
               
               
                   
                 host computer, communicating through RCCA 
               
               
                   
                 communications network. 
               
               
                 Flowchart 
                 Described in TABLE XXXId. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXId 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ,1/7 LOAD 2540 
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Process core load. 
               
               
                 Function 
                 Finds a core load that has previously been built and 
               
               
                   
                 stored on the 2311 disk and, depending on the option 
               
               
                   
                 entered by the user, sends the core load to the 
               
               
                   
                 specified 2540 and/or dumps it. The dump may be 
               
               
                   
                 to cards and/or the printer. A selective dump is 
               
               
                   
                 also provided which allows the dumping of any 
               
               
                   
                 portion of the core load. 
               
               
                 Availability 
                 Fixed Area. 
               
               
                 Use 
                 Enter through ‘LOAD 2540‘ from keyboard 
               
               
                   
                 dictionary of data switches. If the partial dump is 
               
               
                   
                 chosen, a limit card must be read in with the hex 
               
               
                   
                 lower limit in Cols. 1-4 and the hex upper limit in 
               
               
                   
                 Cols. 10-13. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Sense switch 4 indicates that the user&#39;s option has 
               
               
                   
                 been entered through the data switches. Therefore, 
               
               
                   
                 SS4  MUST  be entered  LAST  and the switches must 
               
               
                   
                   NOT  be changed after execution has started. 
               
               
                 Limitations 
                 Both a partial dump and the sending of a complete 
               
               
                   
                 core load to a 2540 is not allowed during one 
               
               
                   
                 execution. 
               
               
                 Modifications 
                 1. Add a lead-back check. For the purpose of 
               
               
                   
                 checking the transfer the coreload is read from the 
               
               
                   
                 2540 and compared, word by word with the core- 
               
               
                   
                 load on disk. 
               
               
                   
                 2. Sense switch 7 may be used as a “kill” button 
               
               
                   
                 to stop the dump. 
               
               
                   
                 3. The current time, date, and day of week is put 
               
               
                   
                 into the coreload for use with the badge reader. 
               
               
                 Flow Chart 
                 Described in TABLE XXXIe. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE XXXIe 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     CONCLUSION 
     Several embodiments of the invention have now been described in detail. It is to be noted, however, that these descriptions of specific embodiments are merely illustrative of the principles underlying the inventive concept. It is contemplated that various modifications of the disclosed embodiments, as well as other embodiments of the invention will, without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention, be apparent to persons skilled in the art.